Home

471. RR-XS450 - Panasonic Middle East

Contents

1. Press to change the setting REC LED Recording indicator and press gt OK to enter You can choose whether to set the recording indication light ON or OFF To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE For details on DATE amp TIME gt page 11 and TIMER amp ALARM 3 page 55 see the OFF Not lit ON Lit respective pages The factory setting is ON WE so Even if it is set to OFF REC LED lights on blinks as a status indicator while charging or editing files STOP W RETURN BATT SETTING Set the type of batteries used rechargeable nickel metal hydride batteries or alkaline batteries Type of battery Ni Rechargeable battery Al Alkaline battery Type of battery RECHARGEABLE ALKALINE The factory setting is RECHARGEABLE O If the type of battery and setting do not match the battery indicator is not displayed correctly If BATT SETTING is set to ALKALINE the rechargeable battery cannot be charged AUTO POWER OFF BATT SETTING dini This function automatically turns the power off if there is no operation for a certain period of time such as when recording is stopped This function helps you save battery when you forget to turn off the power AUTO POWER OFF mui 15 Tam in AUTO POWER OFF 0 min OFF to 15 min The factory setting is 15min You can set the time in 1 minute increments When OFF
2. Appuyez sur pour s lectionner OFF puis appuyez sur gt OK Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE S lectionner le mode d enregistrement Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner MIC REC MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner MIC REC MODE et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le r glage fr quence d chantillonnage PCM d bit binaire MP3 et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Le r glage d usine est MP3 192kbps Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE La qualit sonore et le temps d enregistrement restant differen selon le r glage du mode d enregistrement Format d enregistrement PCM 44 1 kHz Enregistrement en haute qualit MP3 320 ko s MP3 192 ko s MP3 128 ko s MP3 64 ko s MP3 32 ko s Enregistrement long Si le mode d enregistrement est r gl sur MP3 32kbps enregistrement devient monophonique Changer la sensibilit du microphone Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner MIC REC MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner MIC SENS et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner HIGH ou LOW et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider
3. Stecker fest anschlieBen DEUTSCH A S g VQT4J81 8 A VQT4J81 L schen von Dateien ERASE A BC dr cken O dr cken um FILE auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken dr cken um YES auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken W hrend des L schens blinkt die Statusanzeige und ERASING wird angezeigt Es kann mehrere Minuten dauern bis das L schen abgeschlossen ist Durch die Auswahl von FOLDER in Schritt 2 ist es m glich zum L schbildschirm aller Dateien im ausgew hlten Ordner zu gelangen Zum Verlassen des L schbildschirms F2 CLOSE dr cken L schen von Dateien aus dem Listenbildschirm Dateien auf dem Listenbildschirm gt Seite 4 w hlen und dann ERASE A BC dr cken Danach erscheint der Bildschirm zum L schen der Datei Den Ordner w hlen und ERASE A BC dr cken Danach erscheint der Bildschirm zum L schen aller Dateien im Ordner Auswahl des Aufnahme Ortes 1 MENU etwa 1 Sekunde oder l nger gedr ckt halten Der Bildschirm zum Ausw hlen des Orts der Aufnahme wird angezeigt dr cken um den Ort auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Bei Auswahl von USER den Schritt berspringen O dr cken um LOAD auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Beim Dr cken von REC wird eine Aufnahme mit der ausgew hlten Au
4. Dividing files You can divide 1 file into 2 files at a specified position O While playing press STOP WRETURN at the point where you wish to divide the file 2 Select DIVIDE in the editing setting screen gt left 3 Press to select YES and press gt OK to enter DIVIDE DIVIDE AT ann THIS POSITION YES While the file is being divided the status indicator flashes Files in the MUSIC M folder OTHER FOLDER Ed or recycle bin Tl folder cannot be divided O A file length of approx 2 seconds or more is necessary for dividing a file You cannot divide a file at the beginning of the file Divided files cannot be recovered It is recommended that you make a backup copy of the file in advance After the file is divided the number of files in the folder increases by one gt page 67 O If a file containing index marks is divided the index marks will disappear after the file is divided gt page 38 O If there is no empty space in the internal memory or SD card or if there is already a total of 199 files in the folder you cannot use this function to divide a file ENGLISH ii a 2 VQT4J81 8 E VQT4J81 Editing Combining files 2 files recorded on this unit can be combined into 1 file Select COMBINE in the editing setting screen gt Displaying the editing setting screen page 51 Press to select PREVIOUS FILE and press gt OK
5. Pressione MENU di a reprodu o estiver a decorrer avance para o passo 2 Pressione para seleccionar PLAY MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar VOICE EMPHASIS e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar o tipo de nfase vocal e pressione gt OK para confirmar A programac o de f brica NORMAL Para sair do ecr de defini o pressione F2 CLOSE NORMAL Reproduz o som tal como foi gravado NOISE CXL L Realiza uma pequena quantidade de redu o do ru do NOISE CXL H Realiza uma grande quantidade de reduc o do ru do FOCUS FRONT Enfatiza o som frente FOCUS LEFT Enfatiza o som esquerda FOCUS RIGHT Enfatiza o som direita Definir o EQ de reproduc o SOUND EQ Pressione MENU Quando a reproduc o estiver a decorrer avance para o passo O 2 Pressione para seleccionar PLAY MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar SOUND EQ e pressione gt OK para confirmar O Pressione para seleccionar o modo de EQ de som Quando seleccionar modos que n o USER avance para o passo Definic o quando seleccionar USER Depois do passo O pressione F1 EDIT Pressione 44 gt gt para seleccionar a banda de frequ ncia a mudar e pressione para ajustar o n vel de volume 6 dB Quando todas as defini
6. Umschalten der Mikrofonempfindlichkeit MENU dr cken 2 dr cken um MIC REC MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um MIC SENS auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 4 dr cken um HIGH oder LOW auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Werkseinstellung ist HIGH F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Reduzieren von niederfrequenten St rger uschen w hrend der Aufnahme MENU dr cken 2 dr cken um MIC REC MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dricken 3 dr cken um LOW CUT FILTER auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dricken 4 dr cken um ON auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Werkseinstellung ist OFF F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Manuelle Einstellung des Aufnahmepegels Einstellung des Aufnahmepegels auf MANUELL stellen MENU dr cken O dr cken um MIC REC MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 3 dr cken um REC LEVEL ADJ auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um MANUAL auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Manuelle Anpassung des Aufnahmepegels REC f r 1 Sekunde oder l nger g
7. Uso di una scheda SD Inserimento della scheda SD Spegnere l unit e aprire il coperchio dell alloggiamento della batteria scheda SD 2 Inserire la scheda SD e chiudere il coperchio dell alloggiamento della batteria scheda SD Allineare la scheda SD nella direzione corretta D e inserirla completamente fino a quando si sente un clic Per rimuovere la scheda SD Spegnere l unit e aprire il coperchio dell alloggiamento della batteria scheda SD Spingere delicatamente la scheda SD Quando la scheda SD fuoriesce leggermente estrarla lentamente E possibile commutare tra la memoria interna e la scheda SD premendo F2 FOLDER per pi di 1 secondo quando visualizzata la schermata di arresto O Questa unit compatibile con le schede microSD da 2 GB e le schede microSDHC da 4 GB e 32 GB a partire da maggio 2012 O L unit potrebbe non funzionare correttamente a seconda del produttore o del tipo di scheda SD O Per informazioni dettagliate sulle schede SD che funzionano correttamente in base agli standard di produzione visitare la seguente home page di assistenza http panasonic net support O Se inserita una scheda SD ma microSD non visualizzato nella schermata SELECT FOLDER ecc l unit non riconosce la scheda SD Tenere la scheda di memoria fuori della portata dei bambini per evitare che possano inghiottirla Uso della funzione di ricerca del file W Tipi di ri
8. Eseguire la ripetizione A B pagina 13 Lo shadowing viene eseguito senza audio o a basso volume dopo la ripetizione A B Regolazione del volume di shadowing possibile regolare il volume dello shadowing separatamente rispetto alla ripetizione A B Se la ripetizione A B viene annullata o l impostazione di shadowing viene modificata durante la riproduzione il volume dello shadowing ritorna all impostazione originale Ascolto facilitato VOICE EMPHASIS Premere MENU mentre in corso la riproduzione andare al punto 2 Premere per selezionare PLAY MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare 3 Premere per selezionare VOICE EMPHASIS quindi premere gt OK per confermare 4 Premere per selezionare il tipo di enfatizzazione della voce quindi premere gt OK per confermare L impostazione di fabbrica NORMAL Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE NORMAL Consente di riprodurre l audio cos come stato registrato NOISE CXL L Consente di eseguire una leggera riduzione del rumore NOISE CXL H Consente di eseguire una consistente riduzione del rumore FOCUS FRONT Consente di enfatizzare l audio frontale FOCUS LEFT Consente di enfatizzare l audio a sinistra FOCUS RIGHT Consente di enfatizzare l audio a destra Impostazione della riproduzione EQ SOUND EQ Premere MENU mentre in corso la riproduzio
9. IBM e PC AT s o marcas registadas da International Business Machines Corporation dos E U A Macintosh e Mac OS s o marcas registadas da Apple Inc Os outros nomes de sistemas e produtos que aparecem neste documento s o de uma forma geral respectivamente marcas comerciais ou marcas registadas das empresas que os desenvolveram Note que as marcas e n o aparecem neste documento Dependendo do ambiente do computador podem ocorrer falhas no funcionamento por exemplo n o poder utilizar os dados de udio gravados no aparelho etc A Panasonic e os distribuidores Panasonic n o se responsabilizam pela perda dos dados de udio ou outros danos directos ou indirectos excepto nos casos de neglig ncia intencional ou flagrante Mem ria interna 4 GB RR XS450 2 GB RR XS420 A capacidade utiliz vel inferior PORTUGU S p El VQT4J81 229 l VQT4J81 230 Ligar a unidade a um computador 1 Puxe a ficha USB da unidade para fora 2 Ligue a unidade a um computador utilizando a porta USB Se n o for poss vel ligar a unidade ao computador directamente utilize o cabo de extens o USB incluido O N o utilize quaisquer outros cabos de extens o USB excepto o fornecido N o utilize o cabo inclu do com outros dispositivos Atenc o Utilize apenas o cabo de extens o USB inclu do com um n cleo de ferrite quando ligar a unidade ao computador 0 0 0 0 0 0
10. per selezionare ON Auto Stop oppure ON Manual Stop quindi premere gt OK per confermare Auto La registrazione viene messa in pausa se si rileva silenzio per circa 2 secondi o pi e viene interrotta se il silenzio continua per circa 15 secondi o pi Manual anche se il silenzio continua la registrazione rimane in pausa standby fino alla pressione di STOP II RETURN L impostazione di fabbrica OFF Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Registrazione sincronizzata Eseguire i passaggi da a gt sinistra Selezione della modalit di registrazione della linea Premere MENU 2 Premere per selezionare LINE REC quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare LINE REC MODE quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare l impostazione frequenza di campionamento PCM bit rate MP3 quindi premere gt OK per confermare L impostazione di fabbrica MP3 192kbps Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Funzione indice Aggiunta di un indice Durante la registrazione o la riproduzione oppure mentre la registrazione in pausa premere F2 INDEX quando ci si trova sulla posizione dove si intende aggiungere un indice Vengono visualizzati E lampeggiante e ADDING INDEX Viene visualizzato E illuminato per i fi
11. Premere Hd gt gt Ogni volta che si preme il tasto circa 5 secondi vengono saltati impostazione di fabbrica Per modificare l intervallo di salto Premere MENU mentre in corso la riproduzione andare al punto O O Premere per selezionare PLAY MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare TIME SKIP quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare l ora quindi premere gt OK per confermare possibile impostare l intervallo di salto su 5 sec 10 sec 30 sec 1 min 5 min 10 min o 15 min L impostazione di fabbrica 5sec Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Shadowing Impostazione dello shadowing Premere MENU mentre amp in corso la riproduzione andare al punto O 2 Premere per selezionare PLAY MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare 3 Premere per selezionare SHADOWING quindi premere gt OK per confermare 4 Premere per selezionare il tipo di shadowing quindi premere gt OK per confermare Se si seleziona ON small volume il volume sar circa un terzo del volume corrente durante lo shadowing L impostazione di fabbrica OFF Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE ITALIANO m g VQT4J81 o a a VQT4J81 o a Shadowing Utilizzo della funzione di shadowing
12. Pulse H gt gt para seleccionar 00 00 00 hora minuto segundo y pulse para cambiar los valores O Pulse gt OK La reproducci n comenzar desde la posici n especificada Pulse F2 CLOSE para detener el ajuste a mitad del proceso Reproducci n con ligero retroceso Pulse gt OK durante la reproducci n Cada vez que se pulsa el bot n la reproducci n se rebobina unos 3 segundos ajuste de f brica Establecimiento del tiempo de retroceso Pulse MENU Cuando la reproducci n est en curso acuda al paso O 2 Pulse para seleccionar PLAY MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar SLIGHT RETURN y pulse gt OK para confirmar gt E Pulse para seleccionar el n mero de segundos 1 a 5 y pulse gt OK para confirmar El ajuste de f brica es 3 sec Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE nz Reproducci n de repetici n REPEAT Pulse MENU Cuando la reproducci n est en curso acuda al paso 2 Pulse para seleccionar PLAY MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar REPEAT y pulse gt OK para confirmar 4 Pulse para seleccionar el tipo de reproducci n de repetici n y pulse gt OK para confirmar El ajuste de fabrica es OFF Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE OFF La reproducci
13. VERSION Pode verificar a vers o do firmware da unidade Requisitos do sistema data de Maio de 2012 Computador Maquinas compativeis com IBM PC AT Macintosh Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Professional e Service Pack 2 Service Pack 3 Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business Ultimate e Vers o pr instalada so Service Pack 1 Service Pack 2 pl Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate e Service Pack 1 e Mac OS X 10 2 8 10 7 Interface Porta USB N o possivel garantir o funcionamento se utilizar um hub USB Alguns PC n o podem ser utilizados mesmo que respeitem os requisitos do sistema mencionados neste documento Macintosh Este software funciona na driver padr o do Sistema Operativo O funcionamento s garantido num SO compat vel O funcionamento n o garantido num SO actualizado O funcionamento n o garantido nos computadores constru dos em casa Quando utilizar o Windows Media Player o computador tem de respeitar os requisitos de sistema do Windows Media Player Para mais informa es sobre o Windows Media Player consulte a Microsoft Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows Media e Windows Vista s o marcas comerciais ou marcas registadas da Microsoft Corporation nos E U A e noutros pa ses Tecnologia de codifica o de udio MPEG Layer 3 licenciada pela Fraunhofer IIS e Thomson
14. Changez la valeur qui suit le mot TIME pour d finir la position de d part Appuyez sur td PP pour choisir 00 00 00 heure minutes secondes puis appuyez sur pour modifier les valeurs O Appuyez sur gt OK La lecture d bute partir de la position d finie Appuyez sur F2 CLOSE pour arr ter le r glage avant d avoir termine Lecture avec un bref retour en arri re Appuyez sur gt OK pendant la lecture A chaque pression la lecture retourne en arri re d environ 3 secondes r glage d usine R gler le temps de retour Appuyez sur MENU Lors de la lecture passez l tape O 2 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner PLAY MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner SLIGHT RETURN et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le nombre de secondes de 1 5 et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Le r glage d usine est 3 sec Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE Lecture r p t e REPEAT Appuyez sur MENU Lors de la lecture passez l tape Appuyez sur pour s lectionner PLAY MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner REPEAT et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le type de lecture r p t e et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider
15. Turning the Power ON OFF E About the battery indicator The remaining battery level is displayed as below while this unit is operating m gt o gt a gt Blinking AH O If the battery runs out _P blinks Replace the battery or charge the rechargeable battery as soon as possible O Please replace battery within approx 1 minute for preservation of the clock data Depending on the battery status or the operation content to use even if the power turns off due to the battery exhaustion this unit may be used for a while if turned on again However the unit may suddenly turn off during operation due to the low level of battery Some level of battery is required when recording or performing Deleting files gt page 19 Dividing files page 51 Deleting index page 38 FORMAT gt page 60 If the battery indicator shows LI blinking and these operations are performed the power turns OFF automatically Remove the battery from the unit if you will not use it for a long period of time ES Make sure to turn the power off before removing the battery 9 e If the battery is removed while the unit is on data may be lost or this unit may be damaged B Hold function Button operations are ignored when the Hold function is on To switch the Hold function on Slide the OPR HOLD switch to the HOLD side during recording or playback lt lt Ho GED To switch the Hold function off Sl
16. l Union europ enne Ce pictogramme n est valide qu l int rieur de Union europ enne Pour conna tre la proc dure applicable dans les pays hors Union Europ enne veuillez vous renseigner aupr s des autorit s locales comp tentes ou de votre distributeur Note relative au pictogramme apposer sur les piles voir les 2 exemples ci contre Le pictogramme repr sentant une poubelle sur roues barr e d une croix est conforme la r glementation Si ce pictogramme est combin avec un symbole chimique il remplit galement les exigences pos es par la Directive relative au produit chimique concern FRAN AIS a 8 VQT4J81 177 E VQT4J81 q o Este manual describe las operaciones y funciones b sicas de la unidad Accesorios suministrados 1 Pila AAA de Ni MH recargable O Aparece referida en el texto como pila recargable 1 Bolsa para el transporte de las pilas 1 Cable alargador de USB Aseg rese de que adquiere HHR 4MVE para Europa o HHR 4MVT para Asia y Latinoam rica y de que utiliza una del par cuando remplace la pila recargable Desde mayo de 2012 Inserci n de la pila 1 pila AAA de Ni MH recargable incluida Compruebe que la pila est correctamente orientada Carga de la pila Saque la clavija USB Emp jela deslizando hasta que oiga el sonido clic Almacenamiento de la clavija USB 2 Enchufe la toma USB de la unid
17. para seleccionar VAS y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar ON y pulse gt OK para confirmar El ajuste de fabrica es OFF Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Para iniciar la grabaci n VAS pulse REC Ajuste del nivel de funcionamiento VAS Pulse 44 gt gt durante la grabaci n VAS El ajuste de f brica es 3 Funci n de grabaci n anterior PRE RECORD Pulse MENU 2 Pulse para seleccionar MIC REC MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar PRE RECORD y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar ON y pulse gt OK para confirmar El ajuste de f brica es OFF Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Para grabar utilizando la funci n de grabaci n anterior O Pulse y mantenga pulsado REC durante 1 segundo o m s La unidad entra en el modo de espera de grabaci n anterior Cambia a 1 seg 2 seg 3 seg y se detiene en 3 seg Los datos de audio recogidos por el micr fono en los 3 segundos anteriores al inicio de la grabaci n aproximadamente se a aden siempre a sta y la unidad se mantiene en espera Pulse REC El indicador de grabaci n se enciende y la grabaci n se inicia continuando directamente despu s de los datos de audio que se hayan preservado Para detener Pulse STOP W RETURN Grabaci n me
18. para seleccionar a pasta e pressione gt OK para confirmar Se tiverem sido criadas pastas na pasta MUSIC ou OTHER FOLDER ED repita o passo 3 para seleccionar a pasta pretendida 4 Pressione para seleccionar o ficheiro e pressione gt OK para confirmar E iniciada a reproduc o do ficheiro Mudar a posicao do microfone Posic o do microfone Usos recomendados STEREO Funciona como um microfone est reo normal Adequado para a grava o de eventos tais como uma reuni o ou espect culo por um grande n mero de pessoas ZOOM Grava com o som sua frente enfatizado Adequado para a grava o de eventos tais como uma palestra ou entrevista em que o som emitido a partir de uma direcg o especifica Gravac o Pressione F2 FOLDER 2 Pressione td gt gt para seleccionar a pasta de destino da gravac o e pressione gt OK para confirmar Para a gravac o de microfone seleccione uma pasta entre as pastas A B C e D A programa o de f brica A Pressione REC 0 a grava o iniciada Pressione STOP W RETURN para parar a grava o Pausar a gravac o O Pressione REC durante a grava o O indicador de gravac o pisca Q Pressione REC novamente para retomar a grava o Reprodu o Pressione gt OK a reprodu o iniciada Ajustar o volume Aumentar o volume Pressione Di
19. 10 seg 30 seg 1 min 5 min 10 min ou 15 min A programa o de f brica 5sec Para sair do ecr de defini o pressione F2 CLOSE Seguimento Definir o seguimento Pressione MENU Quando a reprodu o estiver a decorrer avance para o passo Pressione para seleccionar PLAY MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar SHADOWING e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar o tipo de seguimento e pressione gt OK para confirmar Se seleccionar ON small volume o volume corresponder aproximadamente a um terco do volume actual durante o seguimento A programag o de f brica OFF Para sair do ecr de definic o pressione F2 CLOSE PORTUGU S Wi E VQT4J81 219 A VQT4J81 220 Seguimento Utilizar a fun o de seguimento Realize a reprodu o com repeti o de A B gt p gina 13 O seguimento realizado utilizando nenhum som ou volume baixo ap s a reprodu o com repeti o de A B Ajustar o volume para o seguimento Pode ajustar o volume de apenas a parte a seguir em separado a partir da parte de reprodug o com repetic o de A B Se arepetic o de A B for cancelada ou a definig o de seguimento for alterada durante a reprodu o o volume da parte a seguir reposto para a defini o original Tornar o som mais f cil de ouvir VOICE EMPHASIS
20. Cuando la tarjeta SD sobresalga ligeramente s quela despacio 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 006000 Puede alternar entre la memoria interna y la tarjeta SD pulsando F2 FOLDER durante algo m s de 1 segundo cuando se muestra la pantalla de detenci n O Esta unidad es compatible con tarjetas de 2 GB microSD y tarjetas microSDHC de 4 GB a 32 GB Desde mayo de 2012 O Esta unidad puede no funcionar correctamente dependiendo del fabricante o tipo de tarjeta SD O Si desea informaci n detallada sobre las tarjetas cuyo correcto funcionamiento de acuerdo a nuestros est ndares de fabricaci n est confirmado acuda a la p gina de inicio de asistencia a continuaci n http panasonic net support Si una tarjeta SD est conectada pero no aparece microSD en la pantalla SELECT FOLDER etc esta unidad no reconoce la tarjeta SD O Mantenga la tarjeta de memoria fuera del alcance de los ni os para evitar que se la traguen Uso de la funci n de de b squeda de archivos M Tipos de b squeda de archivos CALENDAR SRCH Los archivos grabados se refinan por fecha y se muestran en una lista DAY OF WEEK Los archivos grabados se refinan por d a de la semana y se muestran en una lista RECENT R FILE Los archivos grabados se muestran en orden de fecha de grabaci n empezando por la fecha m s reciente 20 archivos B squeda de archivos O Pulse LIST 9 durante 1 segundo aprox
21. Le r glage d usine est HIGH Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE R duire les bruits a basse fr quence durant l enregistrement Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner MIC REC MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner LOW CUT FILTER et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner ON et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Le r glage d usine est OFF Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE R gler le niveau de l enregistrement manuellement R gler le niveau d enregistrement sur MANUAL Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner MIC REC MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner REC LEVEL ADJ et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider 4 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner MANUAL et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE Ajuster le niveau de l enregistrement manuellement Maintenez enfonc REC 6 pendant 1 seconde ou plus Lappareil passe en attente d enregistrement 2 Dirigez le microphone vers la source sonore enregistrer Appuyez sur 44 gt gt pour r gler le niveau de Penregistrement La plage de r glage s tend de 0 a 30 Le r glage d usine est 15 Appuyer sur REC
22. Zu Schritt gehen wenn eine SD Karte eingesetzt ist und zu 6 falls dies nicht der Fall ist 2 dr cken um INT MEMORY interner Speicher oder microSD CARD auszuw hlen und dann F1 SEARCH dr cken 3 dr cken um die Art der Dateisuche auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken iii interner Speicher oder En SD Karte wird als Suchort angezeigt Wenn CALENDAR SRCH ausgew hlt ist lt 4 PP dr cken um den gespeicherten Termin auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Wenn DAY OF WEEK ausgew hlt ist dr cken um den Wochentag auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Es kann nur ein Wochentag ausgew hlt werden dr cken um die Datei auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken H ren von Musik mit diesem Ger t Abspielen von WMA MP3 Musikdateien Wahl einer Datei aus dem Ordner M 1 Datei ausw hlen und gt OK dr cken Ordner Cue Funktion 1 F2 1 CUE w hrend der Wiedergabe dr cken FOLDER SKIP wird angezeigt zur Ordner Cue Anzeige ri O kea PP dr cken wenn et angezeigt wird Aufheben der Ordner Cue Funktion Diese Einstellung kann durch eine der folgenden Methoden aufgehoben werden F2 CJCUE noch einmal dr cken Wenn dies abgebrochen wird k nnen Dateien mit td PP bersprungen werden gt OK dr cken STOP W RETURN dr cken Wiederhabe ist abgeschloss
23. pour l Asie et l Am rique Latine et utilisez l un des deux lorsque vous remplacez les piles rechargeables A partir de mai 2012 Ins rer la pile 1 pile rechargeable Ni MH AAA fournie Assurez vous que la pile est orient e dans le bon sens Charger la pile Sortez la fiche USB Appuyez et faites glisser jusqu a ce que se produise un clic Ins rez la fiche USB de l appareil dans l ordinateur Si l appareil ne peut pas tre directement raccord Pordinateur utilisez le cable prolongateur USB fourni Premi re connexion de l appareil votre ordinateur Comme beaucoup de messages tels que nouveau p riph rique d tect vont appara tre ne d branchez pas l appareil de votre ordinateur avant leur complete disparition Ne jamais d brancher l appareil ou retirer la carte SD lorsque ACCESS s affiche sinon cet appareil pourrait tre endommag Faites glisser le commutateur OPR HOLD du c te ON Faites glisser le commutateur OPR HOLD du c te OFF Le voyant d tat s allume et le rechargement commence Faire glisser le commutateur OPR HOLD sur ON peut interrompre le chargement O Le chargement est termin lorsque l indicateur de fonctionnement s teint E D brancher l appareil Double cliquez sur l ic ne Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 de la barre des t ches au bas de l cran de l ordinateur et sui
24. to select TIMER amp ALARM and press gt OK to enter Set items such as TIMER amp ALARM am the date and time SETTING 0FF and sound source REPEAT ONCE For details on the TIME 0 00 items see page 56 0 00 CC Aa O Press to select the item and press gt OK to enter O Press lt PPI to select the setting and press gt OK to enter Repeat steps and to complete the settings Press to select OK and press gt OK to enter STOP W RETURN To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE O Be sure to perform the OK operation in step O If this operation is not performed the timer will not operate correctly If a button such as F2 CLOSE is pressed while setting the timer REGISTER SETTING may be displayed Select YES or NO and press gt OK to enter O The sound volume at the timer playback is the same volume as when the timer was set Set the appropriate sound volume before setting the timer ENGLISH in amp E VQT4J81 3 E VQT4J81 Using the timer Setting Item Details Setting Item Details SETTING OFF Timer does not operate ON Timer operates REPEAT ONCE Recording or playback is performed just once DAILY Recording or playback is performed daily SELECT Recording or playback is performed every week on the selected day Press to select the day a
25. CLOSE Gravag o sincronizada Execute os passos a esquerda Seleccionar o modo de gravac o de linha Pressione MENU 2 Pressione para seleccionar LINE REC e pressione gt OK para confirmar O Pressione para seleccionar LINE REC MODE e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar a defini o frequ ncia de amostragem PCM taxa de bits MP3 e pressione gt OK para confirmar A programa o de f brica MP3 192kbps Para sair do ecr de defini o pressione F2 CLOSE Fun o ndice Acrescentar ndice 1 Durante a gravac o ou reproduc o ou enquanto a gravac o est em pausa pressione F2 INDEX na posic o onde quer acrescentar um ndice F a piscar e ADDING INDEX s o apresentados F aceso apresentado para o ficheiro ao qual s o acrescentados ndices Apagar ndice Pressione ERASE A BC 2 Pressione para seleccionar INDEX e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar YES e pressione gt OK para confirmar Alterar a velocidade de reproduc o Pressione F1 SPEED durante a reprodu o Pressione F1 SLOW ou F2 FAST para seleccionar a velocidade e pressione gt OK para confirmar Velocidade de reproduc o A velocidade de reprodu o pode ser ajustada em varia es de 10 para velocidades superiores veloc
26. FILE Les fichiers enregistr s sont affich s par ordre de date d enregistrement en commen ant par le plus r cent 20 fichiers Recherche de fichier O Appuyez au moins une seconde sur LIST P Passez l tape 2 si une carte SD est ins r e et l tape dans le cas contraire Appuyez sur pour s lectionner INT MEMORY m moire interne ou microSD CARD puis appuyez sur F1 SEARCH Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le type de recherche de fichier et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider in m moire interne ou ny carte SD est affich comme cible de recherche Avec CALENDAR SRCH s lectionn Appuyez sur Htd gt gt pour s lectionner la date enregistr e et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Avec DAY OF WEEK s lectionn Appuyez sur pour s lectionner un jour et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Vous ne pouvez s lectionner qu un seul jour 4 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le fichier et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Ecouter de la musique sur cet appareil fichiers musicaux WMA MP3 S lectionner un fichier du dossier M S lectionnez le fichier et appuyez sur gt OK Fonction de rep re de dossier O Appuyez sur F2 C CUE pendant la lecture FOLDER SKIP est affich et est remplac par l affichage du rep re du dossier ri Appuyez sur M lt PP lorsque FI est aff
27. O dr cken um YES auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Statusanzeige blinkt und die ausgew hlte Datei wird zum Ende des urspr nglichen Ordner zur ckbewegt gt OK dr cken um zum Bildschirm im Schritt 3 zur ckzukehren DEUTSCH a A VQT4J81 w N VQT4J81 Eq Papierkorbfunktion Leeren des Papierkorbordners ERASE A BO dr cken O dr cken um EMPTY RECYCLE BIN auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Wenn der Papierkorb Ordner ausgew hlt wird EMPTY in Schritt 2 ausw hlen und gt OK dr cken O dr cken um YES auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Statusanzeige blinkt und der Papierkorbordner wird geleert Benutzung des Timers MENU dr cken O dr cken um COMMON MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 3 dr cken um TIMER amp ALARM auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 4 Punkte wie etwa das Datum die Zeit und die Tonquelle einstellen O dr cken um den Punkt auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O Hd PPI dr cken um die Einstellung auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Schritte und zur Vervollst ndigung der Einstellungen wiederholen O dr cken um OK auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Einstellpunkt Einzel
28. You can also set an alarm to sound or file to play back at a specified time Table of contents Supplied accessories Features Part names Screen display Inserting the battery Charging Turning the Power ON OFF Hold function Setting the clock File and Folder Selecting the folder Selecting the folder or file in the list screen Basic Operations Switching microphone position Recording Listening to the audio using earphon Deleting files BR Advanced Operations Selecting the recording scene tees 20 Direct scene Selecting recording mode Switching microphone sensitivity Reducing low frequency noise during recording Setting the recording level manually Setting the recording EQ Self timer ENGLISH N VQT4J81 5 t o gt 4 Table of contents Preventing unnecessary recording VAS Past recording function PRE RECORD Recording by connecting an external microphone Copying to other devices Recording from other devices Index function Changing the playback speed A B Repeat play Playback from a specified position TIME SEARCH 40 Slight return playback x Repeat play REPEAT Skip at regular intervals TIME SKIP Shadowing Br Making sound easier to hear VOICE EMPHASIS 44 Setting the playback EQ SOUND EQ Using an SD Card Using th
29. commence l enregistrement FRANCAIS il a VQT4J81 q 5 VQT4J81 a o R gler le niveau de l enregistrement manuellement R gler le limiteur de pic d enregistrement sur ON Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner MIC REC MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider 3 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner PEAK LIMITER et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner ON et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Le r glage d usine est OFF Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE Regler l galiseur d enregistrement Maintenez enfonc REC pendant 1 seconde ou plus Lappareil passe en attente d enregistrement Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner REC EQ et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider 4 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le mode d galiseur d enregistrement Si vous choisissez un mode autre que USER rendez vous l tape 6 R glage en cas de s lection du mode USER Apres l etape 6 appuyez sur F1 EDIT Appuyez sur td gt gt pour choisir la bande de fr quence a modifier et appuyez sur pour ajuster le niveau d enregistrement 12 dB Lorsque les r glages pour chaque bande de fr quence modifier sont termin s passez l tape 6 5 Appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Pour quitter l cran de
30. es sur cet appareil peuvent se produire Panasonic et les revendeurs de produits Panasonic ne peuvent tre tenus responsables pour toute perte de donn es audio ni pour tout autre dommage direct ou indirect exception des cas de n gligence grossi re intentionnelle n est garanti que sur les syst mes d exploitation conformes n est pas garanti sous un syst me d exploitation mis niveau n est pas garanti sur les ordinateurs fabriqu s par l utilisateur lui m me codage audio MPEG Layer 3 est sous licence de Fraunhofer IIS et Thomson les autres noms de syst mes et de produits mentionn s dans ce document sont des marques d pos es ou non M moire interne 4 Go RR XS450 2 Go RR XS420 La capacit r elle disponible sera moindre FRANCAIS il El VQT4J81 173 5 VQT4J81 Raccorder cet appareil a un ordinateur 1 Sortez la fiche USB de l appareil Branchez l appareil un ordinateur en utilisant le port USB Si l appareil ne peut pas tre directement raccord l ordinateur utilisez le cable prolongateur USB fourni N utilisez pas d autres c bles prolongateur USB l exception de celui fourni N utilisez pas le cable fourni avec d autres appareils Attention Utilisez uniquement le cable prolongateur USB avec un tore magn tique fourni pour raccorder l appareil a un ordinateur 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
31. grale et Service Pack 1 Service Pack 2 Version pr install e d exploitation Microsoft Windows 7 Edition Starter Edition Familiale Basique dition Familiale e Mac OS X 10 2 8 10 7 Interface Port USB Il n est pas possible de garantir le fonctionnement si un concentrateur de ports USB est utilis Certains ordinateurs ne peuvent tre utilis s m me s ils poss dent la configuration syst me requise sp cifi e dans ce document Macintosh Ce logiciel s utilise sur le lecteur standard du syst me d exploitation Le fonctionnemen Le fonctionnemen Le fonctionnemen Lors de l utilisation de Windows Media Player l ordinateur doit poss der la configuration syst me requise pour Windows Media Player Pour plus de d tails sur Windows Media Player s informer aupr s de Microsoft Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows Media et Windows Vista sont des marques d pos es ou non de Microsoft Corporation aux tats Unis et ou dans d autres pays La technologie de IBM et PC AT sont des marques d pos es de International Business Machines Corporation aux Etats Unis Macintosh et Mac OS sont des marques de commerce d Apple Inc En r gle g n rale de leurs d veloppeurs respectifs Noter que les symboles et n apparaissent pas dans ce document Suivant l environnement de l ordinateur des dysfonctionnements tels que l impossibilit d utiliser les donn es audio enregistr
32. gt OK para confirmar 4 Pulse para seleccionar la hora y pulse gt OK para confirmar Puede establecer el intervalo de salto a 5 seg 10 seg 30 seg 1 min 5 min 10 min o 15 min El ajuste de fabrica es 5sec Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Imitacion Configuraci n de la imitaci n Pulse MENU Cuando la reproducci n est en curso acuda al paso 2 Pulse para seleccionar PLAY MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar SHADOWING y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar el tipo de imitaci n y pulse gt OK para confirmar Si selecciona ON small volume el volumen durante la imitaci n ser de aproximadamente un tercio del volumen actual El ajuste de f brica es OFF Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE ESPANOL Di E VQT4J81 e 5 VQT4J81 N Imitaci n Uso de la funci n de imitaci n Lleve a cabo la reproducci n de la repetici n A B gt p gina 13 La imitaci n se lleva a cabo sin sonido o con un volumen bajo tras la reproducci n de la repetici n A B Ajuste del volumen para la imitaci n Se puede ajustar el volumen solo del fragmento para la imitaci n de forma separada del fragmento de reproducci n de la repetici n A B Si se cancela la repetici n A B o se modifica la configuraci n de la imitaci n durante l
33. hrleistet Bei Einsatz mit selbstgebauten Computern ist kein einwandfreier Betrieb gew hrleistet Bei Verwendung von Windows Media Player muss der Computer die Systemanforderungen von Windows Media Player erf llen Einzelheiten zum Windows Media Player sind von Microsoft Corporation erh ltlich Bei Microsoft Windows Windows Media und Windows Vista handelt es sich um eingetragene Marken bzw Marken der Microsoft Corporation in den Vereinigten Staaten und anderen L ndern Der Einsatz von MPEG Layer 3 Audiodecodierungs Technologie bei diesem Ger t erfolgt unter Lizenz von Fraunhofer IIS und Thomson Bei IBM und PC AT handelt es sich um eingetragene Marken von International Business Machines Corporation der Vereinigten Staaten Macintosh und Mac OS sind eingetragene Warenzeichen von Apple Inc Bei allen anderen in diesem Dokument erw hnten System und Produktbezeichnungen handelt es sich generell um eingetragene Marken bzw Marken der betreffenden Unternehmen Die Symbole und werden in diesem Dokument nicht verwendet Je nach der Betriebsumgebung des Computers kann es vorkommen dass Fehlfunktionen auftreten z B Audiodaten die auf diesem Ger t aufgenommen wurden k nnen nicht verwendet werden usw Panasonic und Panasonic Fachh ndler bernehmen keinerlei Haftung f r den Verlust von Audiodaten sowie andere direkte oder Folgesch den die nicht auf vors tzliche oder grobe Fahrl ssigkeit auf Hersteller bzw Vertrieb
34. o indicador de estado pisca Editar Combinar ficheiros Seleccione COMBINE no ecr de defini es de edic esquerda Pressione para seleccionar PREVIOUS FILE e pressione gt OK para confirmar 3 Pressione para seleccionar o ficheiro que pretende combinar e pressione gt OK para confirmar Quando seleccionar o ficheiro numa outra pasta pode deslocar se dentro das hierarquias da pasta pressionando Id Para mais informa es sobre m todos de selec o de ficheiros e pastas consulte a p gina 4 4 Pressione para seleccionar NEXT FILE e pressione gt OK para confirmar 5 Pressione para seleccionar o ficheiro que pretende combinar atr s do ficheiro anterior e pressione gt OK para confirmar 16 Pressione para seleccionar NEXT e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar YES e pressione gt OK para confirmar Enquanto os ficheiros est o a ser combinados o indicador de estado pisca Se pressionar F2 CLOSE antes de a combina o estar conclu da o processo de combinac o cancelado Editar Copiar ou mover ficheiros Copiar ficheiro Seleccione COPY no ecr de definic es de edic o gt pagina 20 2 Pressione para seleccionar o ficheiro que pretende copiar e pressione gt OK para confirmar Quando seleccionar o ficheiro numa outra pasta pode deslocar se dentro da
35. para confirmar Seleccione YES y pulse gt OK para confirmar INIT MENU Inicializaci n Si ha inicializado los ajustes de esta unidad se restaurar n al modo predeterminado todos los ajustes exceptuando DATE amp TIME Seleccione YES pulse gt OK para confirmar y los ajustes se inicializar n VERSION Puede comprobar la versi n de firmware de esta unidad Requisitos del sistema Desde mayo de 2012 Ordenador Equipos compatibles IBM PC AT Macintosh Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Professional y Service Pack 2 Service Pack 3 Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business Ultimate y Service Sistema Pack 1 Service Pack 2 Versi n preinstalada operativo Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate y Service Pack 1 SO Mac X 10 2 8 a 10 7 Interfaz Puerto USB no se puede garantizar el funcionamiento si se usa un concentrador USB Aunque se cumplan los requerimientos del sistema mencionados en este manual algunos ordenadores personales no se podr n utilizar Macintosh Este software funciona en la unidad est ndar del SO El funcionamiento s lo se garantiza con un sistema operativo compatible No se garantiza el funcionamiento en un sistema operativo actualizado No se garantiza el funcionamiento en ordenadores de fabricaci n casera Cuando utilice Windows Media Player su ordenador deber cumplir co
36. step O Setting when selecting USER When the settings for the frequency band to change are all complete go to step O O Press gt OK to enter To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE The EQ mode name is not displayed after exiting the setting screen Pressing REC starts recording EQ mode Effect and application FLAT This basic mode does not emphasise a specific sound range EXTRA BASS Emphasise the bass range strongly BASS Emphasise the bass range slightly MIDDLE Emphasise the middle range BASS amp TREBLE Emphasise the bass and treble ranges slightly O After step press F1 EDIT 150 Hz band is selected E 60 500 1k dk 12k O Press H PPI to select the frequency band to change and press to adjust the recording level 12 dB TREBLE Emphasise the treble range slightly EXTRA TREBLE Emphasise the treble range strongly This mode enables adjustment of USER frequency bands of 150 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 4 kHz and 12 kHz The factory setting is FLAT When the recording level adjustment is AUTO the recording EQ does not function ENGLISH RI 8 VQT4J81 8 8 VQT4J81 Self timer You can select your preferred time period from when REC is pressed until when the recording starts This function is very useful where you need time for preparation before recording should start for example in musical instr
37. to enter Press to select the file to be combined and press gt OK to enter When selecting the file in another folder you can move within folder hierarchies by pressing td For details of file and folder selection methods see page 13 COMBINE mi ND gt gt NEXT FILE gt gt MERT Press to select NEXT FILE and press gt OK to enter Press to select the file to be combined at the back of the previous file and press gt OK to enter COMBINE Ni COMBINE am JOIN gt gt 120920172040 MP AND 6 Press to select NEXT and press gt OK to enter Press to select YES and press gt OK to enter While the files are being combined the status indicator flashes e If you press F2 CLOSE before combining is complete the combine process is cancelled Combined files cannot be returned to their original state It is recommended that you make backup copies of the files in advance O If indexed files are combined the indexing is erased The combined file is saved in the same folder as the previous files Files cannot be combined in following cases O Files in the MUSIC M folder OTHER FOLDER kz or recycle bin M folder When the battery indicator displays 7 blinking or Combining files from the internal memory with files from the SD card If the total file size after combining will exceed 2 GB If th
38. y D El ajuste de f brica es A Pulse REC 0 se inicia la grabaci n Pulse STOP W RETURN para detener la grabaci n Para detener la grabaci n Pulse REC 6 durante la grabaci n El indicador de grabaci n parpadea Pulse REC 6 de nuevo para continuar con la grabaci n Reproducci n Pulse gt OK se inicia la reproducci n Ajuste del volumen Subir el volumen Pulse Bajar el volumen Pulse Operaciones durante la reproducci n Saltar Pulse 44 bb Retroceso r pido Avance r pido B squeda Mantenga pulsado Ht4 bb Para detener Pulse STOP W RETURN Comprobaci n de informaci n Pulse STOP B RETURNI Aparecer la pantalla de informaci n 2 Mueva la pantalla de informaci n arriba y abajo utilizando o Para salir de la pantalla de informaci n Pulse STOP W RETURN Escucha del audio mediante auriculares Conecte unos auriculares estereof nicos no incluidos Tipo de clavija mini clavija est reo de y 3 5 mm Auriculares adicionales recomendados Panasonic RP HV154 RP HJE120 Desde mayo de 2012 Control de la grabaci n en curso Ajuste del volumen Podr ajustar el volumen pulsando aunque el nivel de grabaci n no se ver afectado Escuchar el audio durante la reproducci n Durante la reproducci n el audio proviene del altavoz La escucha puede ser dif cil en lugares ruidosos debido a la salida del altav
39. 1 Premere F2 CUE durante la riproduzione Vengono visualizzati FOLDER SKIP e l indicatore della modalit di salto delle cartelle ri 2 Premere H bb quando viene visualizzato el Annullamento dell attacco cartella Limpostazione pu essere annullata tramite uno dei seguenti metodi Premere nuovamente F2 CJ CUE Se l impostazione viene annullata i file possono essere saltati utilizzando Ke PP Premere gt OK Premere STOP WRETURN La riproduzione terminata Uso della funzione playlist Registrazione dei brani preferiti su una playlist Selezionare la cartella MUSIC M sulla schermata di elenco pagina 4 anche possibile selezionare OTHER FOLDER ka 2 Premere per selezionare il file o la cartella quindi premere F1 PLAYLIST per confermare Quando si selezionano le cartelle o si selezionano i file sfogliando le cartelle premere k d per spostarsi tra le gerarchie Per dettagli sui metodi di selezione di file e cartelle si veda pagina 4 Premere 44 gt per selezionare la playlist quindi premere gt OK per confermare selezionare da PLAYLIST 1 a 5 Il file o tutti i file all interno della cartella vengono registrati nella playlist selezionata Riproduzione di brani registrati nella playlist Selezionare la playlist da P1 a P5 gt pagina 4 Premere H gt gt per selezionare il file da riprodurre e premere gt OK
40. Error message Checkpoints FILE FULL This is displayed when you attempt to record with the number of files exceeding maximum recordable number 199 in each folder gt page 12 INDEX FULL This is displayed when you attempt to add the index exceeding the maximum number 36 of indexes that can be added in 1 file INDEX ERROR This is displayed when you attempt to add the index at the same position This is displayed when you attempt to add the index while the battery indicator shows LT blinking CAN T CREATE ANY MORE FILES IN THIS FOLDER The file cannot be divided because the number of files in the folder has reached the limit 199 Delete unnecessary files and divide gt page 19 NOT ENOUGH SPACE FOR DIVIDING This is displayed when you attempt to divide a file when there is not enough free space required to divide a file Delete unnecessary files and divide ENGLISH fl 3 VQT4J81 q a E VQT4J81 q EN Error messages Error message Checkpoints e MEMORY WRITE SPEED IS SLOW microSD CARD WRITE SPEED IS SLOW This may be displayed when recording is performed using a slow write speed SD card or using the internal memory SD card whose writing speed is temporarily slow due to fragmentation Changing the recording mode to MP3 may remedy the problem To solve the fragmentation problem save necessary files to the computer or external device and format th
41. Even if file names are not changed if some file numbers overlaps in the folder those files cannot be played page 68 Playback is possible if they are transferred to the MUSIC M folder page 71 The transfer destination is wrong If the file transferred from the computer is stored in the recording folder it cannot be played back on this unit Transfer the file to the MUSIC M folder page 71 Symptom Checkpoints Playing Cannot play a file in the MUSIC M folder or OTHER FOLDER E or the playback is not correct e PCM WAV files recorded on this unit and WMA MPS3 files can be played on this unit Other file formats such as AAC cannot be played In MUSIC folder and OTHER FOLDER up to 199 files per one folder can be recognised and played back If subfolders are created number of files playable is reduced by the equivalent number of subfolders created Transferred files exceeding the maximum number cannot be played e For MUSIC M folder or OTHER FOLDER k playback is available to the second hierarchy Files on the third hierarchy and after cannot be played gt page 69 Copyright protected files cannot be played even if they are transferred via Explorer Was the file erased after registered with the playlist Transfer the file as it was or delete the file name from the playlist page 50 Playback speed is too fast or slow You changed the playback speed page 39 There is no so
42. Le r glage d usine est OFF Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE OFF La lecture est effectu e successivement du fichier s lectionn jusqu au dernier fichier du dossier puis s arr te ONE Lit un fichier de mani re r p t e FOLDER REPEAT Tous les fichiers du dossier sont lus de mani re r p t e FOLDER RANDOM Tous les fichiers du dossier sont lus de mani re r p t e dans un ordre al atoire ALL REPEAT Pour les dossiers MUSIC M ou OTHER FOLDER E tous les fichiers sont lus en boucle Pour les autres dossiers le fonctionnement est identique celui de FOLDER REPEAT ALL RANDOM Pour les dossiers MUSIC M ou OTHER FOLDER E tous les fichiers sont lus en boucle en ordre al atoire Pour les autres dossiers le fonctionnement est identique celui de FOLDER RANDOM Le nombre maximum de fichiers reconnus est de 3 000 Sauter des intervalles r guliers TIME SKIP Sauter des intervalles r guliers Appuyez au moins une seconde sur gt OK durant la lecture L appareil passe en mode de saut par intervalle et IA s affiche Le mode de saut change chaque pression Appuyez sur lt lt gt gt Chaque fois que le bouton est press 5 secondes sont pass es r glage d usine Pour modifier l intervalle de saut Appuyez sur MENU Lors de la lecture passez l tape 2 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner PLAY
43. Modifica dell ordine dei brani nella playlist Selezionare la playlist da P1 a P5 sulla schermata di elenco gt pagina 4 2 Premere per selezionare il file che si desidera modificare quindi premere F1 EDIT 3 Premere per selezionare CHANGE ORDER quindi premere gt OK per confermare mp viene aggiunto a sinistra del nome del file selezionato 4 Premere per spostare il file selezionato nella posizione desiderata quindi premere gt OK per confermare L ordine del brano viene modificato ITALIANO E 2 g VQT4J81 o 5 VQT4J81 D S Uso della funzione playlist Eliminazione dei brani registrati nell elenco di riproduzione Selezionare la playlist da P1 a P5 sulla schermata di elenco gt pagina 4 2 Premere per selezionare il file che si desidera eliminare quindi premere F1 EDIT 3 Premere per selezionare ERASE FILE quindi premere gt OK per confermare Per eliminare tutti i brani registrati Premere per selezionare ERASE ALL quindi premere gt OK per confermare 4 Premere per selezionare YES quindi premere gt OK per confermare Modifica divisione di file Visualizzazione della schermata delle impostazioni di modifica Premere MENU Premere per selezionare EDIT MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare Premere per selezionare la voce da modificare
44. OK per confermare di tempo tra l ora di inizio e l ora di fine F Premere per selezionare la voce REC PLAY PLAY Riproduce un file prestabilito o la sveglia REC Registra la fonte audio prestabilita dell impostazione quindi premere gt OK per PLAY ALARM Riprodi I li contermare Riproduce la sveglia 2 ne s Pi A FILE Riproduce un file 4 Premere per modificare l impostazione quindi Viene visualizzato l elenco dei file sulla cartella premere gt OK per confermare selezionata E na Sa e Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere Premere per selezionare il file quindi premere gt OK Quando si selezionano i file passando da F2 CLOSE una cartella all altra premere K per spostarsi Per dettagli su DATE amp TIME pagina 3 e TIMER amp tra le gerarchie Per informazioni dettagliate sui ALARM pagina 22 si vedano le rispettive pagine metodi di selezione dei file e delle cartelle vedere pagina 4 BEEP SOUND SOURCE MIC Registrazione con il microfono possibile impostare il suono emesso alla pressione dei tasti LINE Registra l audio da un dispositivo esterno OFF Nessun suono MODE PCM 44 1 kHz MP3 320 kb sec ON Riproduzione del suono MP3 192 kb sec MP3 128 kb sec L impostazione di fabbrica ON MS se MPS SA eee REC LED indicatore di registrazione REC TO Selezionare la cartella in
45. Ordner durchgef hrt und dann stoppt die Wiedergabe ONE Die laufende Datei wird wiederholt abgespielt FOLDER REPEAT Alle Dateien des Ordners werden wiederholt abgespielt FOLDER RANDOM Alle Dateien im Ordner werden wiederholt abgespielt ALL REPEAT Beim Ordner MUSIC M oder OTHER FOLDER El werden alle Dateien im Ordner wiederholt abgespielt F r andere Ordner ist die Funktionsweise die gleiche wie f r FOLDER REPEAT ALL RANDOM Beim Ordner MUSIC M oder OTHER FOLDER El werden alle Dateien im Ordner wiederholt in zuf lliger Reihenfolge abgespielt F r andere Ordner ist die Funktionsweise die gleiche wie f r FOLDER RANDOM Die maximale Anzahl der erfassten Dateien ist 3 000 Spr nge in regul ren Intervallen TIME SKIP Spr nge in regul ren Intervallen W hrend der Wiedergabe gt OK etwa 1 Sekunde oder l nger gedr ckt halten Der Modus wechselt zum Time Skip Modus und AT wird angezeigt Der Skip Modus wechselt jedes Mal wenn der Knopf gedr ckt wird O 44 PP dr cken Bei jedem Dr cken des Knopfes werden 5 Sekunden bersprungen Werkseinstellung Zum Wechseln des Sprungintervalls MENU dr cken W hrend der Wiedergabe zu Schritt wechseln dr cken um PLAY MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken dr cken um TIME SKIP auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken dr cken um die Zeit auszuw hlen und gt OK
46. Recording time 1 byte number 4 characters Folder name A to D and L Keyword Number 0 in this unit File extension MP3 WAV The above file name is displayed on the computer however 001_ is not displayed on this unit s screen 120920 1720A0 MP3 is displayed instead Automatic change of file name by file deletion or editing Deleting combining a recorded file on this unit will move subsequent files forward and file numbers are automatically reassigned Example When 002 120925 0905A0 MP3 is deleted 001_120920_1720A0 MP3 001_120920_1720A0 MP3 002_120925_0905A0 MP3 1002 121003_1233A0 MP3 121003_1233A0 MP3 H O 003 121231_1915A0 MP3 1004 121231_1915A0 MP3 File number parts of all file names following the deleted or combined file are changed 1 file is newly added by dividing or copying a file etc The file numbers of the files followed by the added file are automatically moved backward and file number parts of those file names are changed ENGLISH Hi E VQT4J81 D N 8 2 VQT4J81 File name Returning the files imported to the computer to this unit By returning the files imported to the computer to this unit such files can be played back on this unit If file names are changed those files cannot be played However if the names of files on this unit have been changed by deleting files etc the files to be returned may duplicate the file numbers of
47. Seite schieben um das Ger t einzuschalten AnschlieBend schaltet sich die Display Beleuchtung ein Ausschalten des Ger tes Den OPR HOLD Schalter zur OFF Seite schieben w hrend das Ger t im gestoppten Zustand ist El Automatisches Abschalten Nach einer voreingestellten Zeit die Werkseinstellung lautet 15 Minuten wird das Ger t automatisch ausgeschaltet wenn die Aufzeichnung unterbrochen wird Wenn der Strom durch die automatische Ausschaltfunktion ausgeschaltet wurde vor dem Einschalten den OPR HOLD Schalter in Richtung OFF Seite schieben gt Seite 24 HOLD Funktion Bei angestellter HOLD Funktion sind die Tastenbet tigungen gesperrt Zum Einschalten der Hold Funktion Den OPR HOLD Schalter w hrend der Aufnahme oder der Wiedergabe auf die HOLD Seite schieben Zum Ausschalten der Hold Funktion Den Schalter OPR HOLD Schalter in die entgegengesetzte Richtung von HOLD schieben Einstellen der Uhr MENU dr cken O dr cken um COMMON MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um DATE amp TIME auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O zur Einstellung der Jahreszahl dr cken und gt P dr cken O zur Einstellung des Monats dr cken und gt dr cken Q zur Einstellung des Datums dr cken und gt gt dr cken Q zur Einstellung des Uhranzeigeverfahrens dr cken und gt gt dr cken EN und EWG werden jeweils f
48. Si vous choisissez un mode autre que USER rendez vous l tape O R glage en cas de s lection du mode USER Apr s l tape O appuyez sur F1 EDIT Appuyez sur Ht4 bi pour choisir la bande de fr quence modifier et appuyez sur pour ajuster le niveau de volume 6 dB Lorsque les r glages pour chaque bande de fr quence modifier sont termin s passez l tape O O Appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE Mode A d galiseur Effet et application La fonction d galiseur de son n est pas utilis e Vous FLAT a entendez le son original sans aucun changement BASS Accentue fortement les sons graves CLEAR Accentue fortement les sons aigus HEAVY Accentue l g rement les sons graves et aigus SOFT Accentue les sons m diums Permet de r duire le bruit pour que la voix humaine VOICE A ar soit plus facile entendre USER Ce mode permet l ajustement des bandes de frequence de 150 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 4 kHz et 12 kHz Le r glage d usine est FLAT FRANCAIS al VQT4J81 N 165 Utiliser une carte SD Ins rer la carte SD teignez l appareil et ouvrez le couvercle de la pile carte SD Ins rez la carte SD et refermez le couvercle de la pile carte SD Alignez la carte SD dans le bon sens 14 et ins rez la compl tement jusqu a ce que se produise un c
49. Sie dabei wertvolle Ressourcen zu sch tzen und eventuelle negative Auswirkungen auf die menschliche Gesundheit und die Umwelt zu vermeiden die anderenfalls durch eine unsachgem e Abfallbehandlung auftreten k nnen Wenn Sie ausf hrlichere Informationen zur Sammlung und zum Recycling alter Produkte und Batterien w nschen wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihre rtlichen Verwaltungsbeh rden Ihren Abfallentsorgungsdienstleister oder an die Verkaufseinrichtung in der Sie die Gegenst nde gekauft haben Gem Landesvorschriften k nnen wegen nicht ordnungsgem er Entsorgung dieses Abfalls Strafgelder verh ngt werden F r gesch ftliche Nutzer in der Europ ischen Union Wenn Sie elektrische oder elektronische Ger te entsorgen m chten wenden Sie sich wegen genauerer Informationen bitte an Ihren H ndler oder Lieferanten Informationen zur Entsorgung in L ndern au erhalb der Europ ischen Union Diese Symbole gelten nur innerhalb der Europ ischen Union Wenn Sie solche Gegenst nde entsorgen m chten erfragen Sie bitte bei den rtlichen Beh rden oder Ihrem H ndler welches die ordnungsgem e Entsorgungsmethode ist Hinweis zum Batteriesymbol unten zwei Symbolbeispiele Dieses Symbol kann in Kombination mit einem chemischen Symbol verwendet werden In diesem Fall erf llt es die Anforderungen derjenigen Richtlinie die f r die betreffende Chemikalie erlassen wurde DEUTSCH a x g VQT4J81 VQT4J81 N N In que
50. alcuni minuti Selezionando FOLDER al punto 2 apparir la schermata per eliminare tutti i file nella cartella selezionata Per uscire dalla schermata di eliminazione premere F2 CLOSE Eliminazione di file dalla schermata di elenco Selezionare i file sulla schermata di elenco pagina 4 e premere ERASE A BC Viene quindi visualizzata la schermata di eliminazione del file Selezionare la cartella quindi premere ERASE A BC Viene quindi visualizzata la schermata di eliminazione di tutti i file nella cartella Selezione della scena di registrazione 1 Premere MENU per almeno 1 secondo Viene visualizzata la schermata di selezione della scena di registrazione 2 Premere per selezionare la scena quindi premere gt OK per confermare Se si seleziona USER saltare il punto 3 Premere per selezionare LOAD quindi premere gt OK per confermare Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Premendo REC 0 la registrazione viene eseguita con l impostazione di scena di registrazione selezionata Registrazione della scena Applicazione LANG ta Registrazione della propria voce per STUDY gies esercizi di pronuncia ecc KARAOKE dell Registrazione ad alto volume ad esempio karaoke MUSIC i Registrazione ad alta qualita ad esempio PERF Fi per eventi musicali CONVERSATION x m Registrazione delle voci di altre persone i pe
51. appropriate recording environment Recorded sound differs from the actual sound Is Recording EQ gt page 29 or LOW CUT FILTER gt page 26 set ENGLISH f E VQT4J81 q 8 8 VQT4J81 Troubleshooting guide Symptom Checkpoints Recording Sound is recorded in a recording mode other than the set recording mode Did you change the microphone position before recording When the direct scene setting is set to ON changing the microphone position will change the recording mode to the set recording mode page 23 Recorded sound is too loud or too low Is the recording level adjustment set to manual page 27 If so set the proper recording level page 28 or set the recording level adjustment setting to AUTO Switch the microphone sensitivity page 26 The level meter does not move during recording The recorded file produces no sound Is the recording level adjustment set to MANUAL and is the recording level set to 0 Adjust the recording level page 28 Playing No sound from the speaker There is no sound when you have connected earphones 3 page 18 Cannot hear any sound Adjust the sound volume gt page 17 A file in the MIC_A to MIC_D LINE or RECYCLE folder cannot be played The file name was changed Only files named according to the file naming rules can be played in folder MIC_A through MIC_D LINE or RECYCLE
52. auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um VAS auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 4 dr cken um ON auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Werkseinstellung ist OFF F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen REC dr cken um mit der VAS Aufnahme zu beginnen Anpassung des VAS Betriebspegels kea gt gt w hrend der VAS Aufnahme dr cken Die Werkseinstellung ist 3 Fr here Aufnahmefunktion PRE RECORD MENU dr cken 2 dr cken um MIC REC MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 3 dr cken um PRE RECORD auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 4 dr cken um ON auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Werkseinstellung ist OFF F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Zur Aufnahme unter Benutzung der fr heren Aufnahmefunktion REC 0 f r 1 Sekunde oder l nger gedr ckt halten Das Ger t wechselt in den Aufnahme Standby Modus Schaltet auf 1 Sek 2 Sek 3 Sek um und h lt bei 3 Sek an Die Mikrofon Audiodaten werden stets etwa 3 Sekunden vor der Aufnahme aktualisiert und das Ger t befindet sich im Standby REC 6 dr cken Die Aufnahmeanzeigen leuchten und die Aufnahme beginnt direkt nach dem erhaltenen Audio Inhalt Beenden der Aufnahme STOP W RETURN dr cken
53. cambiado seleccione LOAD Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Inicializaci n de los ajustes de situaci n para la grabaci n 1 Pulse MENU durante 1 segundo aproximadamente o m s 2 Pulse para seleccionar la situaci n para la grabaci n y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar INITIALIZE y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar YES y pulse gt OK para confirmar El ajuste de situaci n para la grabaci n seleccionado se devuelve a su ajuste de f brica Para seleccionar la situaci n para grabaci n inicializada seleccione LOAD Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Situaci n directa Esta funci n sirve para cambiar la situaci n para la grabaci n vincul ndola al cambio de posici n del micr fono O Cuando adquiera la unidad MEETING estar asignado a STEREO y LECTURE estar asignado a ZOOM Cambio de configuraci n de la situaci n directa Pulse MENU Pulse para seleccionar MIC REC MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar DIRECT SCENE y pulse gt OK para confirmar 4 Pulse para seleccionar la posici n del micr fono STEREO o ZOOM y pulse gt OK para confirmar O Pulse para seleccionar la situaci n para la grabaci n y pulse gt OK para confirmar Si desea cambiar la sit
54. cours en salles de Le classe etc FAVORITE Vous pouvez enregistrer vos propres r glages Changer les r glages d une sc ne d enregistrement Appuyez au moins une seconde sur MENU 2 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner la scene d enregistrement et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner CHANGE SETTING et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner l element que vous souhaitez modifier et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider 5 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le r glage et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider R p tez les tapes et O pour modifier d autres l ments O Une fois que vous avez termin les r glages appuyez sur pour s lectionner OK et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Pour choisir la sc ne d enregistrement modifi e s lectionnez LOAD Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE Initialiser les r glages d une sc ne d enregistrement Appuyez au moins une seconde sur MENU 2 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner la sc ne d enregistrement que vous souhaitez initialiser et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider O Appuyez sur pour s lectionner INITIALIZE et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner YES et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider La sc ne d enregistrement s lectionn e reprend son r g
55. cui salvare il file registrato Se selezionata la cartella di una scheda SD possibile configurare l indicatore di registrazione su ON oppure inserire la scheda SD su OFF OFF Non si illumina ON Si illumina L impostazione di fabbrica ON ITALIANO i 8 VQT4J81 Eq o e VQT4J81 Eq R Menu comune BATT SETTING Impostare il tipo batterie utilizzate batterie ricaricabili al nichel metallo idruro o batterie alcaline Tipo di batteria RECHARGEABLE ALKALINE L impostazione di fabbrica RECHARGEABLE AUTO POWER OFF Questa funzione spegne l unit automaticamente quando non vengono effettuate operazioni per un certo periodo di tempo ad esempio dopo che la registrazione stata arrestata Questa funzione aiuta ad evitare il consumo della batteria quando ci si dimentica di spegnere l unit AUTO POWER OFF da 0 min OFF a 15 min L impostazione di fabbrica 15min BACKLIGHT Impostare il tempo di retroilluminazione quando si preme il pulsante Tempo di illuminazione OFF non si illumina 5 sec 15 sec sempre illuminato L impostazione di fabbrica 15 sec CONTRAST Questa funzione consente di regolare il contrasto dello schermo possibile scegliere tra 10 livelli di regolazione Regolazione del contrasto da 1 L a 10 H L impostazione di fabbrica 5 RECYCLE BIN Quando si utilizza la funzione cestino i file eliminati vengon
56. de fin en utilisant Id I et d finissez en utilisant O Appuyez sur MENU e Jusqu 12 heures peuvent tre r gl es pour la gt A de p riode depuis l heure de d but l heure de fin 2 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner COMMON REC PLAY PLAY Lit un fichier d fini ou le son d alarme MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider REC Enregistre la source sonore d finie Appuyez sur pour s lectionner l l ment PLAY ALARM Lit le son d alarme r gler et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider FILE Lit un fichier Appuyez sur pour modifier le r glage et La liste des fichiers du dossier s lectionn est appuyez sur gt OK pour valider affich e Appuyer sur A nn 5 o Pour quitter I cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE et appuyez sur Lors de la s lection iR y i de fichiers en changeant de dossier appuyez Pour plus de d tails concernant DATE 8 TIME page 3 sur Hd et vous pourrez vous d placer au et TIMER amp ALARM page 22 voir les pages sein des hi rarchies Pour des d tails relatifs respectivement indiqu es aux m thodes de s lection des fichiers et des dossiers voir la page 4 BEEP SOUND SOURCE MIC Enregistrement au microphone a E LINE Enregistre le son provenant d un dispositif Le son des touches de commandes peut tre r gl externe OFF Pas de bip de commande ON Lebipd de est activ MODE PCM 44 1 kHz MP3 320 ko s MP3 192 ko s Le
57. de s mbolos Este s mbolo puede ser usado en combinaci n con un s mbolo qu mico En este caso el mismo cumple con los requerimientos establecidos por la Directiva para los qu micos involucrados ESPA OL E g VQT4J81 205 ES VQT4J81 206 Este manual descreve fun es e opera es b sicas Acess rios fornecidos 1 Pilha Ni MH recarreg vel AAA O Designada como pilha recarreg vel no texto 1 Saco de transporte da pilha 1 Cabo de extens o USB Certifique se de que compra HHR 4MVE para a Europa ou HHR 4MVT para a sia e Am rica Latina e utilize uma do par quando substituir a pilha recarreg vel A data de Maio de 2012 Introduzir a pilha 1 pilha Ni MH recarreg vel AAA inclu da Verifique se a pilha est voltada nas direcg es correctas Carregar a pilha 1 Puxe a ficha USB para fora Empurre e faca deslizar a patilha at ouvir um clique Guardar a ficha USB 2 Introduza a ficha USB da unidade no computador Se n o for possivel ligar a unidade ao computador directamente utilize o cabo de extens o USB incluido A primeira vez que liga a unidade ao PC Porque ir o aparecer multiplas mensagens de Novo hardware encontrado n o desligue a unidade do PC at que todas essas mensagens tenham desaparecido ONunca desligue a unidade do computador nem retire o cart o SD durante a visualizac o de ACCESS se o f
58. die SD Karte ein wenig hervorsteht die Karte langsam herausziehen Umschalten zwischen dem internen Speicher und der SD Karte durch das Dr cken von F2 FOLDER f r mehr als als 1 Sekunde bei Anzeige des gestoppten Bildschirms ist m glich O Dieses Ger t ist kompatibel mit 2 GB microSD Karten und 4 GB bis 32 GB microSDHC Karten Stand Mai 2012 O Je nach Hersteller oder Typ der Karte arbeitet das Ger t eventuell nicht richtig F r Details bez glich der Karten f r die eine Best tigung vorliegt dass sie gem unseren Herstellungsstandards ordnungsgem funktionieren siehe die unten angegebene Support Webseite http panasonic net support O Wenn eine SD Karte eingesetzt aber microSD nicht auf dem SELECT FOLDER Bildschirm angezeigt wird usw erkennt das Ger t die SD Karte nicht Bewahren Sie die Speicherkarte au erhalb der Reichweite von Kindern auf damit sie nicht von diesen verschluckt werden kann Unter Benutzung der Dateisuchfunktion H Arten von Dateisuche CALENDAR SRCH Gespeicherte Dateien werden nach Datum geordnet und in einer Liste angezeigt DAY OF WEEK Gespeicherte Dateien werden nach Wochentag geordnet und in einer Liste angezeigt RECENT R FILE Die gespeicherten Dateien werden in chronologischer Reihenfolge nach Aufnahmedatum angezeigt beginnend mit dem j ngsten Datum 20 Dateien Dateisuche LIST P etwa 1 Sekunde oder l nger gedr ckt halten
59. durante la registrazione O Attivare la riproduzione sul dispositivo esterno e regolare il livello di ingresso uscita Se l indicatore di livello balza in alto e viene visualizzato Mar il volume del dispositivo esterno troppo alto Regolare il volume del dispositivo esterno sulla gamma anche se il volume al livello massimo Per riconfigurare le impostazioni dell ingresso della linea premere MENU e seguire i punti da O a O Dopo aver terminato la regolazione del livello di ingresso uscita arrestare la sorgente audio dell altro dispositivo nella posizione in cui si desidera iniziare a registrare M Premere REC 6 per iniziare la registrazione Mettere in riproduzione il dispositivo esterno Questa unit dotata della seguente funzione di registrazione sincronizzata Questa funzione rileva il silenzio tra due brani ecc quindi registra ogni brano in diversi file ad esempio un primo brano un secondo brano ecc Se rileva suono dal dispositivo esterno la registrazione si avvia automaticamente Se rileva silenzio per circa 2 secondi o pi la registrazione viene messa in pausa Se viene rilevato nuovamente suono la registrazione continua Impostazione della registrazione sincronizzata Premere MENU Premere per selezionare LINE REC quindi premere gt OK per confermare Premere per selezionare SYNCHRO REC quindi premere gt OK per confermare Premere
60. ecr de paragem A unidade compat vel com cart es microSD de 2 GB e com cart es microSDHC de 4 GB a 32 GB data de Maio de 2012 A unidade pode n o funcionar correctamente dependendo do fabricante ou do tipo de cart o SD Para obter mais informa es sobre os cart es com confirma o de funcionamento correcto segundo as nossas normas de fabrico consulte a p gina de suporte abaixo http panasonic net support O Se estiver inserido um cart o SD mas a indicag o microSD n o aparecer no ecr SELECT FOLDER etc isso significa que a unidade n o reconhece o cart o SD Mantenha o Cart o de Mem ria fora do alcance de crian as para evitar que elas o engulam Utilizar a func o de procura de ficheiros H Tipos de procura de ficheiros CALENDAR SRCH Os ficheiros gravados s o procurados por data e apresentados numa lista DAY OF WEEK Os ficheiros gravados s o procurados por dia da semana e apresentados numa lista RECENT R FILE Os ficheiros gravados s o apresentados por ordem da data de grava o come ando pela data mais recente 20 ficheiros Procura de ficheiros O Pressione LIST P durante cerca de 1 segundo ou mais Avance para o passo 2 se houver um cart o SD inserido e o passo E se n o O Pressione para seleccionar INT MEMORY mem ria interna ou microSD CARD e pressione F1 SEARCH 3 Pressione para seleccionar o tip
61. es para mudar a banda de frequ ncia estiverem completas avance para o passo O 5 Pressione gt OK para confirmar Para sair do ecr de definic o pressione F2 CLOSE Modo de EQ Efeito e aplicag o A fun o de equaliza o do som n o utilizada FLAT ALE Ouve se o som original sem qualquer alterag o BASS Da uma forte nfase a gama baixa CLEAR Da uma forte nfase a gama de agudos HEAVY D uma ligeira nfase s gamas de baixo e agudos SOFT Da Enfase a gama media VOICE Reduz o ru do para tornar a voz humana facilmente aud vel USER Este modo permite o ajuste das bandas de frequ ncia de 150 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 4 kHz e 12 kHz A programac o de f brica amp FLAT PORTUGUES i VQT4J81 N 221 AB VQT4J81 222 Utilizar um cartao SD Introduzir o cart o SD O Desligue o aparelho e abra a tampa da ranhura da pilha cart o SD 2 Introduza o cart o SD e feche a tampa da ranhura da pilha cart o SD Alinhe o cart o SD na direcg o correcta D e introduza o totalmente at ouvir um clique Retirar o cart o SD Desligue o aparelho e abra a tampa da ranhura da pilha cart o SD 2 Empurre cuidadosamente o cart o SD Quando o cart o SD ficar ligeiramente saliente puxe o cart o para fora lentamente O Pode alternar entre a mem ria interna e o cart o SD pressionando F2 FOLDER durante mais de 1 segundo quando aparecer o
62. euolba jsou pue seeje UEN odongui Jofew Ul paje90 aye sequed esas pasuoyiny oluoseued sue Jo uogejjejsui al uogejjejsul ap uonejjejsui Yons 0 pajeje Jo ym pajeioosse Buunp jo uosea Aq Bulunooo sso Jo oBewep Aue apnjpxe pue 0 puajxa jou op pue jo juawssejdal Jo josJay ped Aue Jo jonpoud ay Jo soueinsu Jo uoneyodsuen Bunybiay Suipuey Aenijep senianoe leijtoue ayo Aue pue ueasos Aue jo Bununowa 10 Bununow ap Bununoui eu 0 pajejes sjsoo Buspnjoui Yonpa d e jo UoNejjejsui 81 Jo uonejjejsui ep uOREJIEISUN eu UM pajeroosse s soo Aue epnjoxe pue o puxe JOU Op Pauejuoo Aqasey seguem eyl Z wo go UU Jajesub azis use os skeldsip suoisineje GIT WSEJd SeNUSO eses pesuouyny saJeau ay Jo Seale Buneiedo jeuuou SU 10 eilegsny Jo Seale uepodo euw Jofew ey ui syonpoid Bumojlo ey 104 ejqelleae si eovues lenep dn o1d 10 awoy Jey 8JON no q pafueue aq snu 91Juey 29IA19S pesuoyny Jse1eeu JNO WON JO pue 0 eoueunsul pue JyBieyj yey ajou eseel ajep eseyolnd jo joo d e se dievas aseyaind jo jooud INOA YyM JSLYaBo MUS BIAS PASLIOYINY DJUOSBUE Y E 0 JONPOId au YE JO Puos aquag SONHOS PasHoYny Jseieau eu JO Ssa ppe eweu au 104 102007 USD aS ou esn pue mojeq 0 pallejal al sqem INO JISIA JO 0097 UO Ayu 8189 Jewojsng SolUoseued auoydejal pinoys nof peunbel ueym aoas AUELEM wej OL 9 894A p Jeyjo Aue JO Jeulaju ay 0 L
63. grabaci n O Pulse y mantenga pulsado REC durante 1 segundo o m s La unidad pasar al modo de espera de grabaci n 2 Oriente el micr fono hacia la fuente de sonido que se vaya a grabar Pulse K lt gt gt para ajustar el nivel de grabaci n El margen de ajuste es de 0 a 30 El ajuste de f brica es 15 Al pulsar REC 0 se inicia la grabaci n ESPA OL Di o 5 VQT4J81 amp 5 VQT4J81 o o Configuraci n manual del nivel de grabaci n Ajuste del limitador de picos Pulse MENU 2 Pulse para seleccionar MIC REC MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar 3 Pulse para seleccionar PEAK LIMITER y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar ON y pulse gt OK para confirmar El ajuste de f brica es OFF Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Ajuste de la grabaci n EQ 1 Pulse y mantenga pulsado REC durante 1 segundo o m s La unidad pasar al modo de espera de grabaci n Pulse MENU Pulse para seleccionar REC EQ y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar el modo de grabaci n EQ Si selecciona cualquier otro modo que no sea USER vaya al paso O Ajuste al seleccionar USER Despu s del paso O pulse F1 EDIT Pulse td gt gt para seleccionar la banda de frecuencia que se quiere modificar y pulse para ajustar el nivel d
64. gt OK para voltar ao ecr indicado no passo PORTUGU S E A VQT4J81 225 N VQT4J81 226 Fun o de reciclagem Esvaziar a pasta de reciclagem Pressione ERASE A BC 2 Pressione para seleccionar EMPTY RECYCLE BIN e pressione gt OK para confirmar Quando seleccionar a pasta de reciclagem seleccione EMPTY no passo 2 e pressione gt OK Pressione para seleccionar YES e pressione gt OK para confirmar O indicador de estado pisca e a pasta de reciclagem esvaziada Utilizar o temporizador Pressione MENU Pressione para seleccionar COMMON MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar 3 Pressione para seleccionar TIMER amp ALARM e pressione gt OK para confirmar 4 Configure itens como a data e a hora e a fonte de som O Pressione para seleccionar o item e pressione gt OK para confirmar O Pressione 444 PPI para seleccionar a defini o e pressione gt OK para confirmar Repita os passos e para concluir as definig es Pressione para seleccionar OK e pressione gt OK para confirmar Para sair do ecr de defini o pressione F2 CLOSE Item de definic o Detalhes SETTING OFF O temporizador n o activado ON O temporizador activado REPEAT ONCE A gravac o ou a reprodug o efectuada apenas uma vez DAILY A grava o ou a reprodu o e
65. heard You can use the shadowing function of this unit to alternately repeat the A B repeat section example and a no sound or small volume section practice This is convenient for pronunciation or listening practice for language learning To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE Z am Example 7 Practice Ps di EL 3114 Ca is displayed 771003 122340 No sound or small volume section A B repeat section Repeat Put the unit into the stopped state or playback state Setting shadowing Using shadowing function 1 Press MENU 1 Perform A B repeat playback gt page 39 When playback is in progress go to step O Shadowing is performed using no sound or small 2 Press to select PLAY MENU and volume MB repeat playback press gt OK to enter me Press to select SHADOWING and Blinks during shadowing 123340 MP3 press gt OK to enter Press to select the SHADOWING mu type of shadowing and m press gt OK to enter ONE smal val ume ee 2 If you select ON small volume Adjusting the volume for shadowing the volume will be approximately You can adjust the volume of just the shadowing portion a third of the current volume L CLOSE separately from the A B repeat playback portion during shadowing If A B repeat is canceled or the shadowing setting is The factory setting is OFF changed during playback the volume of the shadowing portio
66. in standby durante la registrazione 2 Direzionare il microfono verso la fonte sonora da registrare Premere H gt gt per regolare il livello di registrazione La gamma di regolazione va da 0 a 30 L impostazione di fabbrica 15 Premere REC per iniziare la registrazione ITALIANO Ri D El VQT4J81 5 VQT4J81 o Impostazione manuale del livello di registrazione Attivazione del limitatore di picchi in registrazione Premere MENU 2 Premere per selezionare MIC REC MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare 3 Premere per selezionare PEAK LIMITER quindi premere gt OK per confermare Premere per selezionare ON quindi premere gt OK per confermare L impostazione di fabbrica OFF Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Impostazione della registrazione EQ Tenere premuto REC per pi di 1 secondo Lunita entra in standby durante la registrazione Premere MENU Premere per selezionare REC EQ quindi premere gt OK per confermare 4 Premere per selezionare la modalit di registrazione EQ In caso di selezione di modalit diverse da USER andare al punto O Impostazione quando si seleziona USER Dopo il punto O premere F1 EDIT Premere k lt Bb per selezionare la banda di frequenza da modificare quindi premere per regolar
67. inizio la ricarica O Durante la ricarica portare l interruttore OPR HOLD in posizione ON pu annullare la ricarica mentre questa in corso 0 Quando l indicatore di stato si spegne la ricarica terminata MScollegamento dell unit Fare doppio clic sull icona Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 nella barra delle applicazioni sul lato inferiore dello schermo del computer e seguire le istruzioni a schermo per rimuovere l unit l icona potrebbe non essere visualizzata a seconda delle impostazioni del sistema operativo Dopo la rimozione dell unit l unit si spegne 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 Se viene utilizzata una batteria ricaricabile usare la batteria ricaricabile fornita in dotazione o la batteria ricaricabile opzionale Non si garantisce il funzionamento in caso di utilizzo di batterie disponibili in commercio diverse da quelle specificate sopra GE inoltre possibile utilizzare una batteria alcalina LR03 AAA non in dotazione Accensione spegnimento Accensione Fare scorrere l interruttore OPR HOLD verso il lato ON per accendere l unit II display si illumina Spegnimento Fare scorrere l interruttore OPR HOLD sul lato OFF mentre l unit arrestata H Spegnimento automatico Lunita si spegne automaticamente una volta trascorso un periodo predefinito l impostazione di fabbrica 15 minuti mentre la registrazione arrestata Se l
68. is not possible Is the recording time for the file too short Use a file with longer recording length A file length of approx 2 seconds or more is necessary for dividing a file Play the file up to the position where you want to divide it and then press STOP W RETURN gt page 51 This unit is not recognised by a computer Connect this unit with the computer properly gt page 63 Disconnect this unit from the computer and connect it again Disconnect all USB devices excluding the mouse and keyboard in normal operation and connect this unit alone If the computer is equipped with multiple USB terminals connect this unit to a different USB terminal Is the unit connected via the USB hub Disconnect the hub once and directly connect this unit to the USB terminal The OS on the computer may not be compliant with this unit gt page 62 Is the network drive assigned If the network drive is assigned the drive letters alphabet letters in the drive name conflict and this unit s drive name may become invisible Change the assignment of the network drive before connection ENGLISH f 8 8 VQT4J81 ES 6 VQT4J81 Troubleshooting guide Symptom Checkpoints Others The file name of the recorded file or recording date and time information differ from the real date and time Date and time are not displayed correctly Set the clock page 11 Has the unit been left for a long period of time after
69. is set the AUTO POWER OFF function does not operate BACKLIGHT Set the backlight lighting time when the button is pressed BACKLIGHT nn Lighting time OFF does not light 5 sec 15 sec always ON The factory setting is 15 sec The backlight may not light when the remaining battery power is low The backlight does not light in the following conditions While a file is being moved copied or combined CONTRAST Use this function to adjust the contrast of the screen You can choose from 10 levels for the adjustment CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 1 L to 10 H The factory setting is 5 ENGLISH 8 g VQT4J81 3 E VQT4J81 Common menu RECYCLE BIN When the recycle bin function is used deleted files are moved to the recycle bin Before the recycle bin is emptied deleted files can be restored so you do not have to worry about deleting files by mistake RECYCLE BIN dm OFF OFF Do not use the recycle bin function ON Use the recycle bin function The factory setting is ON When the recycle bin function is OFF files that are deleted cannot be restored FORMAT All files on the internal memory or SD card are deleted Deleted files cannot be recovered Select INTERNAL MEMORY or microSD CARD and press INTERMAL MEMORY gt OK to enter microsb CARD Select YES and press gt OK to enter Save necessary files to
70. links ausw hlen O dr cken um YES auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken W hrend die Datei geteilt wird blinkt die Statusanzeige Bearbeiten Zusammenf hren von Dateien O COMBINE im Bearbeitungs Einstellungsbildschirm 3 links ausw hlen O dr cken um PREVIOUS FILE auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 3 dr cken um die Datei die zusammengef hrt werden soll auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Wenn die Datei in einem anderen Ordner ausgew hlt wird kann sie durch Dr cken von k lt innerhalb der Ordnerhierarchie verschoben werden Einzelheiten hinsichtlich der Datei und Ordnerauswahlmethoden sind auf Seite 4 zu finden dr cken um NEXT FILE auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 5 dr cken um die Datei auszuw hlen die nach der vorherigen Datei angeh ngt werden soll und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken dr cken um NEXT auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Q dr cken um YES auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken W hrend die Dateien zusammengef hrt werden blinkt die Statusanzeige Wenn F2 CLOSE gedr ckt wird bevor das Zusammenf hren abgeschlossen ist wird der Zusammenf hrungsprozess abgebrochen Bearbeiten Kopieren oder Verschieben von Dateien Kopieren von Dateien 1 COPY im Bearbeitungs Einstellungsbildschirm gt Seite 20 ausw h
71. nicht vom PC abtrennen bis alle Meldungen verschwinden O Das Ger t nie von der Stromversorgung trennen und die SD Karte nicht entfernen w hrend ACCESS angezeigt wird ansonsten kann das Ger t besch digt werden Den OPR HOLD Schalter auf die ON Seite schieben Den OPR HOLD Schalter auf die OFF Seite schieben Die Statusanzeige leuchtet auf und das Aufladen beginnt Wird der OPR HOLD Schalter in Richtung ON Seite geschoben kann das Laden w hrend des Ladevorgangs abgebrochen werden O Wenn die Statusanzeige erlischt ist der Ladevorgang abgeschlossen H Trennen des Ger tes Doppelklicken auf das Bildsymbol Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 amp in der Taskleiste am unteren Rand des Bildschirms und den Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm zum Entfernen des Ger ts folgen Je nach den im Betriebssystem vorgenommenen Einstellungen erscheint dieses Symbol u U nicht in der Taskleiste Nach dem Abtrennen des Ger tes stellt sich das Ger t aus Bei Verwendung eines wiederaufladbaren Akkus den mitgelieferten wiederaufladbaren Akku oder den als optionales Zubeh r erh ltlichen aufladbaren Akku verwenden Bei einer Verwendung von anderen handels blichen Batterien und Akkus ist der Betrieb nicht gew hrleistet Es kann auch eine Alkalibatterie vom Typ AAA LRO3 nicht mitgeliefert verwendet werden Ein und Ausschalten des Ger tes Einschalten des Ger tes Den OPR HOLD Schalter auf die ON
72. premere gt OK per confermare Premere per selezionare DIRECT SCENE quindi premere gt OK per confermare Premere per selezionare SETTING quindi premere gt OK per confermare 5 Premere per selezionare OFF quindi premere gt OK per confermare Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Selezione della modalita di registrazione Premere MENU 2 Premere per selezionare MIC REC MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare 3 Premere per selezionare MIC REC MODE quindi premere gt OK per confermare 4 Premere per selezionare l impostazione frequenza di campionamento PCM bit rate MP3 quindi premere gt OK per confermare L impostazione di fabbrica MP3 192kbps Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE O La qualit del suono e il tempo di registrazione restante differiscono a seconda dell impostazione della modalit di registrazione Formato di registrazione PCM 44 1 kHz Registrazione ad alta qualit MP3 320 kb sec MP3 192 kb sec MP3 128 kb sec MP3 64 kb sec Registrazione MP3 32 kb sec lunga O Quando la modalit di registrazione impostata su MP3 32kbps la registrazione diventa monoaurale Cambiare la sensibilit del microfono Premere MENU 2 Premere per sel
73. pressione gt OK para confirmar reposta a programag o de f brica da definig o do cen rio de gravag o seleccionado Para seleccionar o cen rio de gravac o inicializado seleccione LOAD Para sair do ecr de definic o pressione F2 CLOSE Cen rio directo Esta fun o para mudar a cena de gravac o ligada mudanca da posi o do microfone No momento da compra MEETING atribu da a STEREO e LECTURE atribu da a ZOOM Alterar a definic o de cen rio directo Pressione MENU Pressione para seleccionar MIC REC MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar DIRECT SCENE e pressione gt OK para confirmar 4 Pressione para seleccionar a posic o do microfone STEREO ou ZOOM e pressione gt OK para confirmar O Pressione para seleccionar o cen rio de grava o e pressione gt OK para confirmar Se desejar alterar o cen rio de grava o para a outra posi o do microfone realize os passos e para definir o cen rio de grava o Para sair do ecr de defini o pressione F2 CLOSE PORTUGU S Wi El VQT4J81 211 PI VQT4J81 212 Cen rio directo Definir a definic o de cen rio directo para OFF Pressione MENU Pressione para seleccionar MIC REC MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar DIRE
74. r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE Le nom du mode d galiseur n est plus affich une fois que vous avez quitt l cran de r glage Appuyer sur REC commence l enregistrement Mode d galiseur Effet et application Ce mode basique n accentue pas de ELAT gamme particuli re de son EXTRA BASS Accentue fortement les sons graves BASS Accentue l g rement les sons graves MIDDLE Accentue les sons m diums BASS amp TREBLE Accentue l g rement les sons graves et aigus TREBLE Accentue l g rement les sons aigus EXTRA TREBLE Accentue fortement les sons aigus Ce mode permet l ajustement des bandes de USER fr quence de 150 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 4 kHz et 12 kHz Le r glage d usine est FLAT Retardateur Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner MIC REC MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner SELF TIMER et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le temps et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Le r glage d usine est OFF Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE Eviter les enregistrements inutiles VAS Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner MIC REC MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner VAS et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez
75. r p tition parall le s par ment du segment de lecture r p t e A B Si la lecture r p t e A B est annul e ou si le r glage de r p tition parall le est modifi durant la lecture le volume du segment de r p tition parall le est r tabli au r glage initial Faciliter l coute du son VOICE EMPHASIS Appuyez sur MENU Lors de la lecture passez l tape Appuyez sur pour s lectionner PLAY MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner VOICE EMPHASIS et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner l accentuation vocale puis appuyez sur gt OK Le r glage d usine est NORMAL Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE NORMAL Joue le son comme enregistr NOISE CXL L Effectue une r duction mod r e du bruit NOISE CXL H Effectue une r duction importante du bruit FOCUS FRONT Accentue le son sur l avant FOCUS LEFT Accentue le son sur la gauche FOCUS RIGHT Accentue le son sur la droite R gler l galiseur de lecture SOUND EQ Appuyez sur MENU Lors de la lecture passez l tape 2 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner PLAY MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner SOUND EQ et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider O Appuyez sur pour r gler le mode d galiseur de son
76. se realiza en una sola ocasi n DAILY La grabaci n o reproducci n se realiza a diario SELECT La grabaci n o reproducci n se realiza todas las semanas el mismo d a seleccionado O Pulse para seleccionar el d a y utilice gt OK para agregar una marca de comprobaci n Pulse gt OK de nuevo para eliminar la selecci n 2 Cuando se haya seleccionado el d a seleccione OK y pulse gt OK Ajuste Detalles TIME Establezca la hora de inicio y de finalizaci n Seleccione el ajuste seleccione la hora y los minutos para el inicio y la hora y los minutos para la finalizaci n utilizando 444 Db y establezca los valores utilizando Se puede establecer un periodo de hasta 12 horas desde la hora de inicio a la hora de finalizaci n REC PLAY PLAY Reproduce un archivo establecido o el sonido de la alarma REC Graba la fuente de sonido establecida PLAY ALARM Reproduce el sonido de la alarma FILE Reproduce un archivo Se muestra la lista de archivos de la carpeta seleccionada Pulse para seleccionar el archivo y pulse gt OK Cuando est realizando la selecci n de archivos cambiando de carpetas pulse M44 y podr moverse dentro de las jerarqu as Para detalles sobre la selecci n de archivos y carpetas acuda a la p gina 4 SOURCE MIC Grabaci n a trav s de micr fono LINE Graba sonido desde un dispositivo externo MOD
77. the battery was removed or the battery was exhausted Set the clock DATE amp TIME again gt page 11 File search does not operate properly File search is for searching for files in the recording folder based on the file names assigned at the time of recording gt page 67 Therefore it cannot properly search for any file recorded when the clock was not set correctly renamed using a computer or moved to the MUSIC folder or another folder using a computer File search is executed only for the files in the selected memory Select the memory internal memory or SD card before starting file search Specifications Power USB USB2 0 Hi Speed DC 5 V 500 mA Rechargeable battery DC 1 2 V 1 AAA rechargeable Audio Earphone 19 3 5 mm 160 Ni MH nickel metal hydride Output Max 11 11 mW battery HHR 4AGE i USB charging charging time Speaker do en approx 2 hours upu 90 MW i Audio External 19 3 5 mm Dry cell batter DC 1 5 V 1 AAA LROS batter oe y y alkaline Baer y Input Mieropnone 0 80 mV plug in power Audio Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz PCM 44 1kHz The bracket shows 44 1 kHz MP3 320kbps the recording mode 44 1kHz MP3 192kbps 144 1 kHz MP3 128kbps 122 05 kHz MP3 64kbps 116 kHz MP3 32kbps Monaural Linear PCM 16 bit MP3 116 kbps to 320 kbps MP3 32 kbps to 192 kbps WMA 18 kHz to 48 kHz MP3 122 05 kHz to 48 kHz WM
78. the computer or external devices before formatting When formatted files in the recycle bin are also deleted and cannot be restored Cancelling is not possible while formatting O Do not remove the battery or SD card while formatting O Use this unit to format a new SD card before use INIT MENU If the settings of this unit are initialised settings except for the DATE amp TIME setting are restored to the default state Select YES press gt OK to enter and the settings are initialised VERSION You can check the firmware version of this unit ENGLISH 2 2 VQT4J81 8 l VQT4J81 System requirements As of May 2012 Computer IBM PC AT compatible machines Macintosh e Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Professional and Service Pack 2 Service Pack 3 e Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business os Ultimate and Service Pack 1 Service Pack 2 Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate and Service Pack 1 e Mac OS X 10 2 8 10 7 Pre installed version Interface USB port Operation cannot be guaranteed if you use a USB hub Even if the system requirements mentioned in this document are fulfilled some personal computers cannot be used Macintosh This software operates on the standard driver of OS Operation is guaranteed only on a compliant OS Operation is not guaranteed on an upgraded OS
79. to select SETTING and press gt OK to enter Press to select OFF and press gt OK to enter SETTING OFF ON ann To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE Ni 1114 120920 172040 MP3 O00 seri ES ic os Direct scene setting indication TE ON Nothing is displayed for OFF E MPS e During playback recording or recording standby MA is not displayed even if you set direct scene setting to ON Selecting recording mode You can change the sound quality This allows you to provide the best sound quality for the particular purpose e Press STOP II RETURN to stop the unit Press to MIC REC MODE N i PCM 44 TkHz MENU Press MENU select the setting 0 PCM sampling o I Press to MIC REC MENU ani frequency MP3 MPS 128kbps select MIC REC PENE SE ECT bitrate and press Per Poren Sea OKI te enter to enter F ing is to e PRCA ELLES The factory setting is MP3 192kbps To exit the setting screen press Press to select MIC REC F2 CLOSE MODE and press gt OK to enter 120920 172040 MP3 0 00 4 01 12 E F The selected recording mode MES Mic is displayed Depending on the recording mode setting the sound quality and remaining recording time gt page 86 will differ High quality recording e OO Long recording STOP W RETURN Rec
80. una marca comercial de SD 3C LLC Este producto est protegido por ciertos derechos de propiedad intelectual de Microsoft Corporation y de terceros Est prohibido el uso o distribuci n de dicha tecnolog a fuera de este producto sin una licencia de Microsoft o de una empresa subsidiaria autorizada por Microsoft y de terceros Este producto puede tener interferencias causadas por tel fonos m viles durante su utilizaci n Si tales interferencias resultan evidentes aumente la separaci n entre el producto y el tel fono m vil Mantenga las pilas AAA LRO3 y las pilas recargables fuera del alcance de los ni os peque os para evitar que las ingieran CUIDADO Existe peligro de explosi n si la bater a se reemplaza mal Reempl cela por otra del tipo recomendado por el fabricante Cuando se deshaga de las bater as p ngase en contacto con las autoridades de su localidad o con su concesionario y pregunte por el m todo correcto para deshacerse de ellas No las caliente ni las exponga a las llamas No deje la pila en un veh culo expuestas a la luz solar directa durante un periodo prolongado de tiempo con las puertas y ventanas cerradas Aseg rese de utilizar los auriculares o aud fonos recomendados o suministrados Basado en EN 50332 2 2003 1 M ximo voltaje de salida salida de auriculares 150mV 2 Voltaje caracter stico de banda ancha auriculares 2 75mV ESPA OL M o
81. using the USB port USB cover 4 Firmly insert the USB plug all the way in The USB cover will not impede insertion as it is stored inside the unit Insert the USB plug straight in the same direction as that of the terminal If the unit cannot be connected to the computer directly use the USB extension cable supplied 0 Do not use any other USB extension cables except the supplied one Do not use the supplied cable with other devices with a ferrite core when connecting to computer Caution Use only the supplied USB extension cable The first time you connect the unit to your PC Because multiple Found New Hardware messages will appear do not disconnect the unit from your PC until all messages disappear Screen display during connection with PC During file transfer Mi During connection ACCESS n E O This unit cannot be operated while connected to the computer When the unit is connected to your PC it can operate without the battery because power is supplied by the computer When the unit is connected to the computer the computer may not start restart It is recommended that the unit is removed from the computer when starting restarting the computer ENGLISH M 8 E VQT4J81 2 E VQT4J81 Connecting this unit to a computer Operation is not guaranteed in the following cases When two or more USB devices are connected to one compute
82. zur Eingabe dr cken Das Sprungintervall kann auf 5 Sek 10 Sek 30 Sek 1 Min 5 Min 10 Min oder 15 Min eingestellt werden Die Werkseinstellung ist 5sec F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Shadowing Einstellen des Shadowing MENU dr cken W hrend der Wiedergabe zu Schritt wechseln O dr cken um PLAY MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 3 dr cken um SHADOWING auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um die Art des Shadowing auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Wenn Sie ON small volume w hlen betr gt die Lautst rke beim Shadowing etwa ein Drittel der aktuellen Lautst rke Die Werkseinstellung ist OFF F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen i o par x gt o q 5 VQT4J81 o Shadowing Verwenden der Shadowing Funktion 1 Die A B Wiederholwiedergabe ausfihren gt Seite 13 Das Shadowing erfolgt bei A B Wiederholwiedergabe ohne Ton oder mit leisem Ton Einstellen der Lautstarke zum Shadowing Sie k nnen die Lautstarke des Shadowing Teils getrennt vom A B Wiederholwiedergabeteil einstellen Wenn A B Wiederholwiedergabe abgebrochen wird oder die Shadowing Einstellung w hrend der Wiedergabe ge ndert wird wird die Lautst rke des Shadowing Teils auf die urspr ngliche Einstellung zur ckgese
83. 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000000 A primeira vez que liga a unidade ao PC Porque ir o aparecer multiplas mensagens de Encontrado novo hardware n o desligue a unidade do PC at que todas essas mensagens tenham desaparecido O Esta unidade n o pode funcionar enquanto estiver ligada ao computador O Quando a unidade ligada ao PC a mesma pode funcionar sem a pilha porque a alimenta o fornecida pelo computador O Quando a unidade est ligada ao computador este pode n o iniciar reiniciar aconselh vel remover a unidade do computador quando iniciar reiniciar o computador 09 0 funcionamento n o garantido nos seguintes casos Quando existem dois ou mais dispositivos USB ligados a um computador excluindo o rato e o teclado em funcionamento normal Quando utilizado um hub USB Quando utilizado um cabo de extens o USB que n o o cabo inclu do O Quando a unidade est ligada ao computador se iniciar reiniciar o computador ou este entrar no modo de espera o computador pode n o reconhecer a unidade Desligue a unidade e volte a lig la ao computador ou volte a ligar a unidade depois de reiniciar o computador O Consulte o manual de instru es do computador H Desligar a unidade do computador Clique duas vezes no icone Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 amp s no tabuleiro de tarefas na parte inferior do ecr do computador e siga as instru es que aparecem no ecr para remo
84. 0 00000 Premi re connexion de l appareil votre ordinateur Comme beaucoup de messages tels que nouveau p riph rique d tect vont appara tre ne d branchez pas l appareil de votre ordinateur avant leur compl te disparition O Cet appareil ne peut pas tre command lorsqu il est connect Pordinateur Lorsque l appareil est connect votre PC il peut fonctionner sans pile car il est aliment en lectricit par l ordinateur Lorsque l appareil est connect l ordinateur il se peut que l ordinateur ne puisse pas d marrer ou red marrer Il est recommand de d connecter l appareil de l ordinateur lors du d marrage red marrage de l ordinateur Le fonctionnement n est pas garanti dans les cas suivants Lorsque plusieurs p riph riques USB sont connect s l ordinateur excluant la souris et le clavier en fonctionnement normal e Lorsqu un concentrateur USB est utilis Lorsqu un c ble prolongateur USB diff rent de celui fourni est utilis Lorsque l appareil est raccord l ordinateur il se peut que l ordinateur ne reconnaisse pas l appareil si vous faites d marrer ou red marrer l ordinateur ou s il entre en mode veille D connectez l appareil et reconnectez le l ordinateur ou reconnectez l appareil une fois l ordinateur red amp marre O Veuillez consulter le mode d emploi de l ordinateur H D brancher l appareil Double cliquez sur l ic ne Windows XP 6 Window
85. 0 min MP3 64kbps Stereo approx 67 h 64 kbps MP3 32kbps Monaural approx 38 h approx 21 h 30 min MP3 32kbps Monaural approx 134 h 32 kbps Specifications are subject to change without notice Care and use To reduce risk of radio interference caused by headphone earphone or microphone cables only use adequate accessories with a cable length of less than 3 m E Unit Avoid using or placing this unit near sources of heat e To avoid product damage do not expose this product to rain water or other liquids e The unit s speaker does not have magnetic shielding Do not place the unit near televisions personal computers magnetised cards bank cards commuter passes or other devices easily influenced by a magnet H Batteries e Do not peel off the covering on batteries and do not use the batteries if the covering has been peeled off Align the poles and correctly when inserting the battery e Remove the battery if you do not intend to use the unit for a long time e Do not heat or expose to flame Do not leave the battery ies in a car exposed to direct sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed e Do not attempt to recharge dry cell batteries Battery mishandling can cause electrolyte I leakage which can damage items the fluid N contacts and may cause a fire If electrolyte a leaks from the batteries consult your dealer 9 Wash thoroughly with water if
86. 3 Press REC Recording starts Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit e Select the microphone position gt page 14 e The recording indicator lights on Press F2 FOLDER Press STOP II RETURN to stop recording SELECT FOLDER M to select the E To pause recording recording AZ Press REC during recording destination folder Li E Recording indicator blinks and press OK FT WST Press REC 6 again to resume recording to enter For microphone recording select a folder among folders A B C and D The factory setting is A When you select a folder except for A B C or D recording is automatically saved in A Change the recording mode or microphone sensitivity as necessary pages 25 26 A function is available for simultaneously retrieving all the recording settings recommended for the recording scene page 20 If the file size exceeds 2 GB during recording the recording stops tentatively at the point when the data reaches 2 GB Then the recording resumes with a new file Recording is not available during the interval approx 2 seconds from when the recording stops to when the recording resumes Note if your finger or an object touches this unit during recording the noise will be recorded through the microphone ENGLISH a E VQT4J81 4481 Recording Screen display during recor
87. 31 Time skip gt page 42 Index setting page 38 Inserting the battery Charging Upon purchasing charge once before initial use Use your computer for charging If the battery has completely run out it takes approx 2 hours for a full recharge Inserting the rechargeable battery supplied 1 AAA rechargeable Ni MH battery Make sure the battery faces the right direction Charging the batter Start the computer beforehand e Turn the unit off beforehand gt page 9 Take out the USB plug Push and slide until a click Storing the USB plug 2 Insert the unit s USB plug into the computer USB cover Firmly insert the USB plug all the way in The USB cover will not impede insertion as it is stored inside the unit If the unit cannot be connected to the computer directly use the USB extension cable supplied Insert the USB plug straight in the same direction as that of the terminal An Ea SLIDE POWER KEY TO OFF TO CHARGE A message is displayed on the screen The first time you connect the unit to your PC Because multiple Found New Hardware messages will appear do not disconnect the unit from your PC until all messages disappear Never disconnect the unit or remove the SD card while ACCESS is displayed otherwise this unit may be damaged ENGLISH El VQT4J81 Inserting the battery Charging 3 Slide the OPR HO
88. A Recording format Playable bit rate Playable sampling frequency Frequency characteristic 120 Hz to 21 000 Hz PCM 44 1kHz 10 dB during recording 20 Hz to 21 000 Hz MP3 320kbps playback 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz MP3 192kbps The bracket shows 20 Hz to 17 000 Hz MP3 128kbps the recording mode 20 Hz to 7 500 Hz MP3 64kbps 20 Hz to 6 700 Hz MP3 32kbps Built in microphone S N 145 dB PCM 44 1 kHz Filter JIS A For MUSIC M folder and OTHER FOLDER Ed Max Dimensions W x H x D 40 8 mm x 103 1 mm x 16 2 mm Cabinet Dimensions W x H x D 38 5 mm x 102 5 mm x 14 8 mm Mass Approx 54 g with battery Approx 43 g without battery Operating 10 C to 40 C Temperature 120 RH to 80 RH No condensation Operating Humidity Rechargeable 15 C to 35 C temperature range Internal Memory 14 GB RR XS450 2 GB RR XS420 2 Usable capacity will be less ENGLISH a amp 8 VQT4J81 8 6 VQT4J81 Specifications Battery life may be less depending on the operating conditions When the supplied rechargeable battery HHR 4AGE is used Standard recordable time may be less depending on the operating conditions RR XS450 When using the internal memory 4 GB 1 Without recording monitor Recording indicator OFF recording level adjustment sett
89. Aufnahme mit einem extern angeschlossenen Mikrofon Den Mic Line Schalter auf MIC schieben Das externe Mikrofon anschlie en Externes Mikrofon nicht mitgeliefert Stecker fest a anschlie en Steckerausf hrung 9 3 5 mm Stereo Klinkenstecker REC 6 zum Starten der Aufnahme dr cken DEUTSCH gt VQT4J81 o 5 VQT4J81 o E Aufnahme von anderen Ger ten Den Mic Line Schalter auf LINE schieben MENU dr cken O dr cken um LINE REC auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken dr cken um LINE INPUT auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um die Einstellung auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Beim Anschluss an den Kopfh rer Anschluss eines externen Ger tes oder den Line Ausgang eines tragbaren Ger tes HIGH beziehungsweise LOW w hlen Die Werkseinstellung ist HIGH Dr cken von F2 CLOSE Anschlie en des externen Ger tes An das externe Ger t anschlie en und den Mic Line Schalter auf LINE schieben Dann erscheint die ausgew hlte Line Eingangs Einstellung und der Line Aufnahme Modus 8 REC f r 1 Sekunde oder l nger gedr ckt halten Das Ger t geht in den Aufnahme Bereitschaftszustand ber Wiedergabe des externen Ger ts und Einstellung des Input Output Levels Wenn das Level Meter schwankt und Id angezeigt wird ist die Lautst rke des externen Ger te
90. Betrieb ist in den folgenden F llen nicht garantiert Wenn zwei oder mehr USB Ger te an einem Computer angeschlossen sind mit Ausnahme der Maus und der Tastatur bei normalem Betrieb Wenn ein USB Verteiler USB Hub benutzt wird Wenn als USB Verl ngerungskabel ein anderes als das mitgelieferte benutzt wird O Wenn das Ger t an den Computer angeschlossen ist und der Computer gestartet bzw neu gestartet wird oder in den Bereitschaftszustand umschaltet kann es vorkommen dass der Computer dieses Ger t nicht erkennt Das Ger t einmal vom Computer trennen und dann erneut anschlie en oder das Ger t nach einem System Neustart erneut an den Computer anschlie en Bitte auch im Benutzerhandbuch des Computers nachschlagen H Trennen des Ger tes Doppelklicken auf das Bildsymbol Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 amp s in der Taskleiste am unteren Rand des Bildschirms und den Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm zum Entfernen des Ger ts folgen Je nach den im Betriebssystem vorgenommenen Einstellungen erscheint dieses Symbol u U nicht in der Taskleiste Nach dem Abtrennen des Ger tes stellt sich das Ger t aus Wenn das Ger t nach dem L schen usw von Dateien auf diesem Ger t mithilfe des Computers eingeschaltet wird erscheint die Anzeige UPDATING FILE NAME Es kann mehrere Minuten dauern bis die Aktualisierung abgeschlossen ist E USB Massenspeicherfunktion Dieses Ger t arbeitet als ein USB Spei
91. C folder or OTHER FOLDER J repeat step E to select the target folder Press to select the file and press gt OK to enter File playback starts Kb MIC_E I Mic C mam M LE Lp 120925 090540 bb 191009 199240 nn When MUSIC or OTHER FOLDER is selected in step PLAYLIST folders only for MUSIC and folders or files transferred from the computer are displayed For details of PLAYLIST see page 49 If a folder exists on the second hierarchy under the folder e g Artist A select Artist A and press gt OK Then the folder under Artist A is displayed For details of folder hierarchy see page 69 ENGLISH ii Im FLAT LM LS MUSIC Ee Symphony Nog m ley PLAYLIST marti Pressing l several times on the screen in step will switch the screen to screens in steps or 6 Also it is possible to move among folder hierarchies to select folders and files amp When there is no file in the selected folder NO FILE is displayed O The A B C D L M IT recycle bin and ey folders are displayed as MIC A MIC A SD MIC B MIC B SD MIC C MIC C SD MIC D MIC D SD LINE LINE SD MUSIC RECYCLE and OTHER FOLDER respectively on the list screen The indications in the brackets are displayed when using the SD card O Pressing LIST while the unit is stopped or during playback will directly d
92. CT SCENE e pressione gt OK para confirmar 4 Pressione para seleccionar SETTING e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar OFF e pressione gt OK para confirmar Para sair do ecr de definic o pressione F2 CLOSE Seleccionar o modo de gravacao Pressione MENU 2 Pressione para seleccionar MIC REC MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar MIC REC MODE e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar a defini o frequ ncia de amostragem PCM taxa de bits MP3 e pressione gt OK para confirmar A programac o de f brica MP3 192kbps Para sair do ecr de defini o pressione F2 CLOSE O Dependendo da definig o do modo de gravag o a qualidade sonora e o tempo restante de gravac o ir o variar Formato de grava o Gravag o de EGM 44 1 KHz alta qualidade MP3 320 kbps MP3 192 kbps MP3 128 kbps MP3 64 kbps MP3 32 kbps Gravag o longa O Quando o modo de grava o est definido para MP3 32kbps a gravac o fica mono Alterar a sensibilidade do microfone Pressione MENU 2 Pressione para seleccionar MIC REC MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar MIC SENS e pressione gt OK para confirmar 4 Pressione para
93. E PCM 44 1 kHz MP3 320 kbps MP3 192 kbps MP3 128 kbps MP3 64 kbps MP3 32 kbps RECTO Seleccione la carpeta en la que va a guardar el archivo grabado Si selecciona una carpeta de tarjeta SD introduzca la tarjeta SD Men com n Operaci n de ajustes comunes Pulse MENU 2 Pulse para seleccionar COMMON MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar el ajuste y pulse gt OK para confirmar 4 Pulse para cambiar el ajuste y pulse gt OK para confirmar Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Para m s detalles sobre DATE amp TIME pagina 3 y TIMER 8 ALARM gt p gina 22 acuda a las p ginas respectivas BEEP SOUND Pitido de operaci n Se puede ajustar el sonido de operaci n del bot n OFF Sin pitido de operaci n ON Pitido de operaci n activado El ajuste de f brica es ON REC LED Indicador de grabaci n Puede elegir establecer la luz indicadora de grabaci n en ON u OFF OFF Sin luz ON Con luz El ajuste de f brica es ON ESPA OL DI 8 VQT4J81 o e VQT4J81 200 Menu comun BATT SETTING Tipo de Bateria Establezca el tipo de pilas a utilizar pilas de hidruro met lico de niquel recargables o pilas alcalinas Tipo de pila RECHARGEABLE ALKALINE El ajuste de f brica es RECHARGEABLE AUTO POWER OFF Apagado Autom tico Esta fu
94. FOLDER k are deleted immediately irrespective of the recycle bin settings O The file numbers displayed on this unit are moved forward after deleting files page 67 Read only WMA MP3 music files transferred from the computer files that cannot be played by the unit subfolders pages 69 and 71 in the MUSIC folder created on the computer or subfolders in the OTHER FOLDER cannot be deleted using this unit Delete them on the computer page 66 o 2 x gt 19 co 2 t e gt B S Selecting the recording scene STOP IN RETURN This unit offers recommended recording settings for each recording scene Selecting the recording scene enables easy recording with the most appropriate settings Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit O Press to select LOAD and press gt OK to enter Press MENU for ee m approx 1 second MEETING To exit the setting screen press or more 202 F2 CLOSE The screen to select A the recording scene is 2 displayed O Press to select the scene and The selected recording press gt OK to enter scene is displayed If you select USER skip the step O When REC 0 is pressed recording is performed with the selected recording scene setting If you select USER in step O the state immediately before the recording scene was set is restored and the recording scene indication disappear
95. Folder dt File 7 Internal memory SD card Ex The MUSIC folder is used when transferring WMA MP3 music files etc from the computer MIC_A MIC A SD You can create subfolders in the MUSIC folder The structure example is shown as below fo 001 120920 1720A0 MP3 First hierarchy Second hierarchy Third hierarchy af 002_120925_0905A0 MP3 MUSIC HC MIC_B MIC_B_SD a Music 01 MP3 1 MIC_C MIC_C_SD PLAYLIST f HEI MIC_D MIC_D_SD Li Playlist files CE LINE NEED j ee i 9 page 49 Playback is available to H MUSIC x Artist A the second hierarchy RECYCLE Music AMP3 Files on the third p ssssnseonessecssesezessasaee as i Album A1 hierarchy and after OTHER FOLDER page 70 D Must Ai 1 MP3 cannot be played DATA da uo i Album A2 oe ae i Album A2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e e e e e e e Ss e e e e e Ss e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 0 e e e e e e 0 e e 0 0 0 0 06 In MUSIC folder and OTHER FOLDER up to 199 files per one folder can be recognised and played back If subfolders are created number of files playable is reduced by the equivalent number of subfolders created ENGLISH u 3 g VQT4J81 l 3 o VQT4J81 Folder structure on this unit E OTHER FOLDER CD Folders creating using a device other than this unit and the DATA folder are displayed in OTHER FOLDER OTHER FOLDER is displayed on this unit but the folders are directly displaye
96. Grabaci n larga Si el modo de grabaci n est ajustado a MP3 32kbps la grabaci n ser monoaural Modificaci n de la sensibilidad del micr fono Pulse MENU 2 Pulse para seleccionar MIC REC MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar MIC SENS y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar HIGH ALTO o LOW BAJO y pulse gt OK para confirmar El ajuste de f brica es HIGH Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Reducci n del ruido de baja frecuencia durante la grabacion Pulse MENU 2 Pulse para seleccionar MIC REC MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar LOW CUT FILTER y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar ON y pulse gt OK para confirmar El ajuste de fabrica es OFF Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Configuraci n manual del nivel de grabaci n Establecimiento del ajuste de nivel de grabaci n en MANUAL Pulse MENU Pulse para seleccionar MIC REC MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar 3 Pulse para seleccionar REC LEVEL ADJ y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar MANUAL y pulse gt OK para confirmar Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Ajuste manual del nivel de
97. INE Die Werkseinstellung ist RECHARGEABLE AUTO POWER OFF Diese Funktion schaltet das Ger t automatisch aus wenn f r eine gewisse Zeit keine Bedienvorg nge vorgenommen werden wie zum Beispiel wenn die Aufnahme gestoppt wird Diese Funktion hilft dabei die Batterie zu schonen wenn vergessen wurde das Ger t auszuschalten AUTO POWER OFF 0 Min OFF bis 15 Min Die Werkseinstellung ist 15min BACKLIGHT Die Beleuchtungszeit der Hintergrundbeleuchtung kann vorgenommen werden wenn die Taste gedr ckt wird Beleuchtungszeit OFF leuchtet nicht 5 Sek 15 Sek immer ON Die Werkseinstellung ist 15 sec CONTRAST Diese Funktion kann verwendet werden um den Kontrast des Bildschirmes anzupassen F r die Anpassung kann aus 10 Stufen gew hlt werden Kontrastanpassung 1 L bis 10 H Die Werkseinstellung ist 5 RECYCLE BIN Wenn die Papierkorbfunktion benutzt wird werden gel schte Dateien in den Papierkorb verschoben Bevor der Papierkorb geleert wird k nnen gel schte Dateien wiederhergestellt werden so dass Sie sich keine Sorgen ber versehentliches L schen von Dateien machen m ssen OFF Die Papierkorbfunktion wird nicht benutzt ON Benutzen der Papierkorbfunktion Die Werkseinstellung ist ON FORMAT Alle Dateien im internen Speicher oder auf der SD Karte werden gel scht Gel schte Dateien k nnen nicht wiederhergestellt werden INTERNAL ME
98. If the file contains track information ID3 tag etc track name artist name and album name are displayed If there is no track name the file name is displayed If there is no artist name or album name UNKNOWN ARTIST or UNKNOWN ALBUM is displayed If they are not fitted in the screen the scroll display will appear See page 17 for playback operations Only WMA MP3 files and PCM WAV files recorded on this unit can be played 5 B VQT4J8 O In MUSIC folder up to 199 files per one folder can be recognised and played back If subfolders are created number of files FI playable is reduced by the equivalent number Fo of subfolders created Folder structure on bao this unit page 69 CS A O Copyright protected WMA MP3 music files DE cannot be played E WMA MP3 music files with variable bit rate may be played but the playback elapsed time display or bit rate display may differ from the actuality or the repeat positions during A B repeat may differ from the set positions O If the ID3 tag of the file contains data that this unit cannot read the track name artist name etc may not be displayed properly O A file of 2 GB or more in size cannot be played back O If playback of a file of 100 hours or more playback time has exceeded 100 hours the hour indication in hour minute second blinks ID3 tag track name and other information stored in M
99. LD switch to the ON side O Slide the OPR HOLD switch to the OFF side 3A EH H OPR HOLD 6 El switch o v Status indicator The status indicator lights and recharging starts Also CHARGING is shown in the unit s display and the battery indicator changes as shown below dh 2 gt 1 gt 01 gt m Oia ei While charging sliding the OPR HOLD switch to the ON side can cancel charging halfway When the status indicator goes out charging is complete E Disconnecting the unit Double click the icon Windows XP Windows Vista 3 Windows 7 3 on the task tray at the bottom of the 5 computer screen and follow the on screen instructions gt to remove the unit The icon may not be displayed depending on the OS settings After the unit is removed this unit turns off 8 If BATT SETTING in the common menu is set to ALKALINE the battery cannot be charged When using a rechargeable battery use the supplied rechargeable battery or the optional rechargeable battery page 2 If commercially sold batteries other than the above are used operation is not guaranteed Do not charge a dry cell battery O If charging does not start slide tte OPR HOLD switch to the ON side once and then to the OFF again If the temperature of this unit has risen an undesignated rechargeable battery has been inserted or BATT SETTING has been set to ALKALINE 4 i
100. MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner TIME SKIP et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider O Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le temps et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Vous pouvez r gler l intervalle de saut 5 s 10 s 30 s 1 min 5 min 10 min ou 15 min Le r glage d usine est 5sec Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE R p tition parallele R gler la r p tition parall le Appuyez sur MENU Lors de la lecture passez l tape 2 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner PLAY MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider 3 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner SHADOWING et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider 4 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le type de r p tition puis appuyez sur gt OK Si vous s lectionnez ON small volume le volume sera approximativement un tiers du volume actuel pendant la r p tition parall le Le r glage d usine est OFF Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE FRAN AIS M a VQT4J81 a d 5 VQT4J81 o E R p tition parall le Utiliser la r p tition parall le Effectuez la lecture r p t e A B page 13 La r p tition est effectu e sans son ou faible volume apr s la lecture r p t e A B Ajuster le volume pour la r p tition parall le Vous pouvez ajuster le volume du segment de
101. MIC REC MENU and press gt OK to enter O Press to select PEAK LIMITER and press gt OK to enter Press to select ON PEAK LIMITER qm and press gt OK to enter m CAN BE USED WHEN The factory setting is OFF REC LEVEL ADJ 15 SET TO MANUAL cc To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE When the recording level adjustment is AUTO the recording peak limiter function will be activated regardless of the above setting O If the level meter swings WER is displayed regardless of the recording peak limiter setting Setting the recording EQ Using the recording EQ enables you to set bass middle and treble range of recording level according to your preferred settings for recording The recording EQ includes 7 types of fixed mode and the USER mode with which you can set the recording level according to each frequency band Set the recording level adjustment to MANUAL beforehand gt page 27 When the recording level adjustment is AUTO the unit does not enter the recording standby O Press and hold REC 0 for 1 second or more The unit enters the recording standby Press MENU Press to select REC EQ and press gt OK to enter O Press to select the recording EQ mode Press F1 CONFIRM to confirm the details Press F1 again to return to the previous screen When you select modes other than USER go to
102. MORY oder microSD CARD ausw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken YES ausw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken INIT MENU Wenn die Einstellungen dieses Ger tes initialisiert werden werden alle Einstellungen au er f r die Einstellung DATE amp TIME auf den Standardstatus wiederhergestellt YES w hlen gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken und die Einstellungen werden initialisiert VERSION berpr fen der Firmware Version dieses Ger tes kann berpr ft werden Systemanforderungen Stand Mai 2012 Computer IBM PC AT kompatible Personal Computer Macintosh Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Professional und Service Pack 2 Service Pack 3 e Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business Ultimate und Vorinstallierte Version Betriebssystem Service Pack 1 Service Pack 2 Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate und Service Pack 1 e Mac OS X 10 2 8 10 7 Schnittstelle USB Anschluss bei Verwendung eines USB Hub ist der Betrieb nicht gew hrleistet Bestimmte PCs k nnen m glicherweise auch dann nicht verwendet werden wenn sie die obigen Systemanforderungen erf llen Macintosh Diese Software l uft auf dem Standardtreiber von OS Ein einwandfreier Betrieb ist nur unter einem kompatiblen Betriebssystem gew hrleistet Bei Einsatz mit einem Betriebssystem Upgrade ist kein einwandfreier Betrieb gew
103. MP3 Playing recorded files on the computer Select the recorded file in this unit right click and select Play Delete unnecessary files using the a BM BE O Using drag and drop you can import the files to the computer as well Never disconnect the unit or remove the SD card while ACCESS is displayed otherwise this unit may be damaged O Do not format this unit or the SD card using a computer File extensions displayed on the computer are MP3 for MP3 recording files and WAV for PCM recording files O Use the DATA folder to save data files from the computer O If you change the names of folders such as MIC_A MIC_A_SD MIC_B MIC_B_SD MIC_C MIC_C_SD MIC_D MIC_D_SD LINE LINE_ SD MUSIC etc of this unit on the computer new folders of the original names will be generated next time the unit is turned on The indications in the brackets are displayed when using the SD card The folders with changed names are shown in the OTHER FOLDER g on this unit gt page 70 computer Select the recorded file in this unit right click select g Delete and Yes to enter 66 File name File naming rules when recording on this unit Example Recording information September 20 2012 17 20 folder A MP3 001 _120920_ 1720A0 mp3 File number 001 to 199 _ 1 byte T Recording information 1 byte number 6 characters o 206
104. N Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press MENU 2 Press to select MIC REC MENU and press gt OK to enter Press to select FMIC REC MENU dm PRE RECORD and LO press gt OK to enter E SELF TIMER CRT Press to select ON FRE RECORD uri OFF and press OK to enter The factory setting is OFF CAN BE USED WHEN MIC REC MODE IS To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE To record using the past recording function When recording mode is PCM the past recording function does not operate e Set the recording mode to MP3 page 25 Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit The unit enters the past recording standby mode Changes to 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec and stops at 3 sec The microphone audio data approx 3 seconds before recording are always updated and the unit is on standby Press REC 0 The recording indicator lights and recording is started continuing directly after the preserved audio data To stop Press STOP W RETURN The sound that occurs when the recording button is pressed is also recorded When the built in microphone is used etc D When the recording level adjustment page 27 is set to MANUAL the unit enters the past recording standby and recording standby at the same time When the unit enters the standby state again after the microphone position is switched page 14 the past recording s
105. ONDBULOO SII oJempuey eu JO SSNSIUA JO asn Peuloau SU YUM paeposse s s09 enuenbesuoo Jo Joaulpul Auy P pue jenuew suonesedo Jonpo d ayy ul payeindys Ajjeoyloads jou esempos Jo a emyos e quedwosui jo esn y 2 UONISULOS auau Joy pauNoU sabeyo Jo pue sea sseooy q swe qoud pajejes dnjes uondauuos YN 10 10 pue jausajul e 49 00 JOU JM pue AJUELIEM ay aleMmpiey UONDSUUOO Joey Um pelddns aq few sjonpoid awos y 20 e9 eue AL Aq posneo sonss uopdeoe ALA y seuspeg elgesoe das Josn P sjonpoud yons uo peyuu sheyoos em Bi peo GS JO ONS GSN SALA JASIA PIEH UO palojs uoneuuoyu 6 ssolnep GSN Jo SpJeo as 9 SSN jeULIOU Ul 188 PUE JeAM WOJ SPESH PNY CAPIA 4 sede olpny 10 oapia q S9siQ qep109 4 Jo Ae n g GA e sjuea jeuige9 reseyound jo Gu eu Je pojsixe 99JOP 10 1IN8 y ssejun sue BUIMO O Y 19h09 jou SBOP AULUEM SUL y yonpoid ey pesejue Buiney Joyew 10 Yos go uBleioy Aue JO suonipuoo SAJSOLOO Alleuouge 0 einsodxe Yonpaud ey jo esn Jejus Jo ssa pesuoyneun Bulpnpul suosied pesuouneun q sedas 10 Buyedwe uituon Jo sydesul Aq uone soju Uuoyssepunuy swe qoid A ddns sujew S 01jU09 J8WOJSNI jo Juawjsnipejew asnge snp Jo yIp jo dn oejbeu asnsiw juapiooe ur 2ySu paou sagon j98J09u1 JO asn Wo Buns enje JO uon sBeuep J8Aco jou seop pue juo ASN onseuop jewlou sienco Aueuem y oluoseueg jo uoluido eu
106. Operation is not guaranteed on home made computers When using Windows Media Player your computer must fulfill the system requirements of Windows Media Player Please consult Microsoft Corporation for details of Windows Media Player Microsoft Windows Windows Media and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation of the U S and other countries MPEG Layer 3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson IBM and PC AT are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation of the U S Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc Other system names and product names appearing in this document are in general the registered trademarks or trademarks of the respective developer companies Note that the mark and mark do not appear in this document Depending on the computer environment malfunctions may occur e g Audio data recorded on this unit cannot be used etc Panasonic and Panasonic dealers cannot be held liable for any lost audio data or other direct or indirect damage except in cases of intentional of gross negligence Connecting this unit to a computer You can copy files recorded on this unit to the computer Start the computer beforehand e Turn the unit off beforehand Take out the unit s USB plug Push and slide until a click sound is heard Storing the USB plug 2 Connect the unit to a computer
107. P3 files STOP W RETURN Folder cue function This function enables you to switch subfolders within the MUSIC M folder easily while playing back files in the MUSIC folder Folder cue cannot be performed while playing a PLAYLIST O Press F2 C1 CUE during playback FOLDER SKIP is displayed puma which changes to the folder cue EI display fe Ac 12 Symphony Mo 9 A Beethoven m Reethoven s Sum Press H gt gt when ET is displayed The first track in the previous or following folder is cued While folder cue is being displayed the playback speed cannot be changed Also Fast forward Fast backward operations are not available Also the MENU or LIST button cannot be operated Cancelling folder cue The setting can be cancelled using any of the following methods When this is cancelled files can be skipped using 144 DPI e Press F2 CO CUE again Press gt OK Press STOP W RETURN Playback is completed Using the playlist col You can register tracks in the MUSIC M folder to a playlist and play them in the i on Registering your favourite tracks to a playlist Select the MUSIC M folder on the list screen gt page 13 You can also select OTHER FOLDER kg Press to select the file am or the folder and press SE RUES HAUTE F1 PLAYLIST to enter ke Sakura MP3 When selecting folders or hp Symphony Nov M selecting files by switching folders pr
108. PCM 44 1kHz MPS 320kbps MPS 1 ps MPS 128kbps MP3 Bakbps CC WEI To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE is oo par x gt w q 8 l VQT4J81 Index function By adding Index position information on the file to the file playback position jumps to the specified position by skip operation page 17 during playback Files within the MUSIC M folder OTHER FOLDER ED and recycle bin ll folder cannot be indexed Also indexes cannot be added during timer recording or playback Adding index 1 During recording or playback or while recording is paused press F2 INDEX at the position where you want to add an index gt blinking and e mi Eos E ADDING INDEX are ADDING INDEX displayed lighting is displayed for the file to which indexes are added 121201 170040 MP3 Up to 36 indexes per 1 file can be added O Indexes are deleted when the file is deleted or divided When the battery indicator shows blinking indexes cannot be added Also adding the index may be impossible on the border of If and 4 blinking O During playback even if you press Mid at the position within approx 2 seconds after the index point playback does not stop at the point nn PO 15 15 0 00 55 Deleting index e Select a file which has Index to be deleted gt page 17 Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press ERASE A B Pre
109. Panasonic Operating Instructions Bedienungsanleitun dieci Istruzioni per l uso Mode d emploi Instrucciones de funcionamiento Manual de Instru es Kia IC Recorder Digitales Diktierger t pes Registratore IC BIER Magn tophone puce Grabadora IC Gravador de IC micro la Model No RR XS450 RR XS420 VQT4J81 E M0512KZ0 n VQT4J81 Dear customer Thank you for purchasing this product For optimum performance and safety please read these instructions carefully Before connecting operating or adjusting this product please read the instructions completely Please keep this manual for future reference Supplied accessories Please check and identify the supplied A accessories Use numbers indicated in parentheses when asking for replacement parts Product numbers correct as of May 2012 These may be subject to change 1 AAA rechargeable Ni MH battery HHR 4AGE O Indicated as rechargeable battery in the text 1 Battery carrying bag RFC0156 Q 1 USB extension cable K2ZZ04Y00005 Make sure to buy HHR 4MVE for Europe or HHR 4MVT for Asia and Latin America and use one of the pair when replacing the rechargeable battery E For the United Kingdom and Ireland customers Sales and Support Information Customer Communications Centre For customers within the UK 0844 844 3899 For customers within Ireland 01 289 8333 For further support on yo
110. Press to select type of Repeat play and press gt OK to enter The factory setting is OFF FOLDER REPEAT FOLDER RANDOM ALL REPEAT To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE Repeat indication A ONE TT FOLDER REPEAT ER FOLDER RANDOM Mr ALL REPEAT MES ALL RANDOM Nothing is displayed for OFF OFF Playback is performed in succession from the selected file to the last file in one folder and then playback stops ONE Plays one file repeatedly FOLDER REPEAT Plays all files in the folder repeatedly FOLDER RANDOM Plays all files within the folder repeatedly in random order ALL REPEAT For the MUSIC M or OTHER FOLDER E all files within the folder are played repeatedly For other folders the operation is the same as that for FOLDER REPEAT ALL RANDOM For the MUSIC M or OTHER FOLDER E all files within the folder are played repeatedly in random order For other folders the operation is the same as that for FOLDER RANDOM The maximum number of recognised files is 3 000 O When FOLDER RANDOM or ALL RANDOM is selected in Repeat play it is not possible to skip to the previous file during playback ENGLISH Hi H VQT4J81 o 2 t e gt Skip at regular intervals TIME SKIP This function skips the set time using skip operation gt page 17 during playback This allows you to qu
111. SD card using the computer If they are formatted using the computer the optimum performance of this unit may not be achieved Format it on this unit gt page 60 This unit may not operate correctly depending on the SD card manufacturer or type of SD card For details on cards that are confirmed to operate correctly according to our manufacturing standards see the support site below http panasonic net support VAS is functioning page 31 Noise is heard from the recorded voice If you brush this unit with your hand or an object touches this unit during recording noise will be recorded through the microphone Avoid contact of object during recording Recorded sound is distorted There is a noise at the beginning of sound Set the microphone sensitivity to LOW or keep the microphone distance farther away from the recording source gt page 26 If the sound is still distorted set the Low Cut filter setting to ON gt page 26 set the recording level adjustment to Manual and adjust the recording level before recording gt page 27 Recorded sounds contain noise that make it difficult to hear sounds Move a mobile telephone away from this unit when you use the two in the same area Set the LOW CUT FILTER to ON Noise is reduced and listening may become easier page 26 Perform test recording switching the recording mode page 25 or microphone sensitivity page 26 and set the most
112. SOUND EQ gt page 45 etc which have already been set when the timer playback setting was made When MIC or LINE is assigned as recording source the recording is made at the scheduled time with the recording settings microphone sensitivity gt page 26 the line input setting page 35 etc which have already been set when the timer recording setting was made excluding the recording mode gt page 25 O If the clock setting DATE amp TIME is returned to the factory setting the timer operation setting SETTING is automatically turned OFF 1 minute before the timer recording start time the recording indicator blinks and the mode switches to recording standby ENGLISH ii E VQT4J81 a N amp E VQT4J81 Common menu The following are the settings used for both recording and playback Common settings operation BEEP SOUND CCI 3 MENU Press STOP l RETURN to stop the unit The button operation sound can be set Press MENU BEEF SOUND di F2 OFF Press to select COMMON MENU and press gt OK to enter OFF No operation beep Press to E COMMON MENU dum On Operation beep is ON select the setting amp PEE EUND The factory setting is ON item and press s DATE amp TIME e When ON is selected press to select gt OK to enter TIMER amp ALARM your preferred volume and press gt OK to BATT SETTING enter The factory setting is MIDDLE
113. Se detectar essas interfer ncias afaste o telefone m vel do produto Guarde as pilhas AAA LROS e as pilhas recarreg veis longe do alcance das crian as para evitar que as possam engolir CUIDADO H perigo de explos o se a bateria for substitu da incorrectamente Substitua a bateria apenas por uma do tipo recomendado pelo fabricante Quando deitar fora as baterias contacte as autoridades locais ou o distribuidor para saber qual o m todo de elimina o correcto N o aquecer ou expor a chamas N o deixe a s bateria no interior de um autom vel que esteja exposto directamente luz do sol durante um per odo longo de tempo com as portas e janelas fechadas Certifique se de que utiliza os auscultadores internos ou externos recomendados Baseado na norma EN 50332 2 2003 1 Tens o m xima de sa da sa da de auriculares 150mV 2 Tens o de caracter stica de banda larga auriculares 2 75mV PORTUGU S ni o far x gt lt Manuseio de baterias usadas gt E e BRASIL Informacao Ap s o uso as pilhas e ou baterias poder o ZZZ Atenc o ao Cliente ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assist ncia t cnica autorizada Diret rio de Ateng o ao Cliente Cobrir os terminais positivo e negativo com uma Obtenha informa es de produtos e assit ncia operacional encontre o distribuidor ou fita isolante adesiva antes de depositar num
114. a caixa MED REC Amenta Ne ee ombre pe as p acossiios alfaves Ca roses paghe destinada para o recolhimento O contato entre partes htto l as D Jar p i met licas pode causar vazamentos gerar calor romper WWw iar panasonic com a blindagem e produzir fogo E tamb m diretamente com o nosso Contact Center Panam 800 PANA 800 7262 5 5 j Colombia 01 8000 94PANA 01 8000 947262 N o desmonte n o remova O inv lucro nem amasse a 1800 PANASONIC 1800 726276 a bateria O g s liberado pela bateria pode irritar a Costa Rica 800 PANA737 800 7262737 si fi El Salvador 800 PANA 800 7262 garganta danificar o lacre do inv lucro ou o vazamento Guatemala 1 801 811 PANA 1 801 811 7262 i j Chile 800 390 602 provocar calor ruptura da blindagem produzir fogo Desde D or oan devido ao curto circuito dos terminais N o incinere nem Venezuela 800 PANA 800 800 7262 800 E E E Uruguay 0 800 PANA 0 800 7262 aque a as baterias elas n o podem ficar expostas a Peru 0800 00726 a o o Argentina 0800 333 PANA 0800 333 7262 temperaturas superiores a 100 C 212 F 0810 321 PANA 0810 321 7262 O g s liberado pela bateria pode irritar a garganta danificar o lacre do inv lucro ou o vazamento provocar calor ruptura da blindagem e produzir fogo devido ao Servi o no Mexico curto circuito dos terminais provocado internamente Evite o contato com o liquido que vazar das baterias Para obter informa o na Rep blica do M
115. a reproducci n el volumen del fragmento para la imitaci n volver a su ajuste original C mo hacer que el sonido se oiga mejor VOICE EMPHASIS Pulse MENU Cuando la reproducci n est en curso acuda al paso 2 Pulse para seleccionar PLAY MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar VOICE EMPHASIS y pulse gt OK para confirmar 4 Pulse para seleccionar el tipo de voz resaltada y pulse gt OK para confirmar El ajuste de f brica es NORMAL Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE NORMAL El sonido se reproduce tal como se grab NOISE CXL L Se lleva a cabo una pequefia reducci n de ruido NOISE CXL H Se lleva a cabo una gran reducci n de ruido FOCUS FRONT Se resalta el sonido situado al frente FOCUS LEFT Se resalta el sonido situado a la izquierda FOCUS RIGHT Se resalta el sonido situado a la derecha Ajuste de la ecualizaci n de reproducci n SOUND EQ Pulse MENU Cuando la reproducci n est en curso acuda al paso Pulse para seleccionar PLAY MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar SOUND EQ y pulse gt OK para confirmar O Pulse para seleccionar el modo EQ Si selecciona cualquier otro modo que no sea USER vaya al paso Ajuste al seleccionar USER Despu s del paso 4 pulse F1 EDIT Pulse Htd bi para seleccio
116. ack repeats between the start point A and finish point B if those points are set Press ERASE A B a while playing The start point A is set and EE EX lighting and E blinking are displayed Press ERASE A BC at the finish point B The display changes to ERES lighting and repeat play starts nn 3414 121003 123340 MP3 GENS M 3114 121003123340 MP3 De 1 24 Cancelling A B Repeat Press ERASE A BO 4 Db or STOP M RETURN You cannot set A B Repeat when the time between the start point A and finish point B is approx 2 seconds or less When only the start point A is set and playback continues until the end of the file the end becomes the finish point B and A B Repeat begins A B Repeat by setting the range using 2 files is not possible ENGLISH ii 8 g VQT4J81 Playback from a specified position TIME SEARCH Playback is possible from the time specified position Put the unit into the stopped state or playback state Press MENU When playback is in progress go to step O Press to select PLAY MENU and press gt OK to enter 3 Press to select TIME SEARCH and press gt OK to enter Set the playback start position Change the value for TIME to set the start position TIME SEARCH mM TIME 00 00 98 TTL 00 01 24 AR MOVE SELECT OK SET A Press l lt gt P to select 00 00 00
117. ad en el ordenador Si la unidad no puede conectarse directamente al ordenador utilice el cable alargador de USB incluido La primera vez que conecte la unidad a su PC Aparecer n varios mensajes Nuevo dispositivo encontrado no desconecte la unidad del ordenador hasta que todos los mensajes desaparezcan O No desconecte nunca la unidad ni retire la tarjeta SD mientras se est mostrando ACCESS en la pantalla si lo hiciera la unidad podr a resultar da ada Coloque el interruptor OPR HOLD en la opci n ON Coloque el interruptor OPR HOLD en la opci n OFF Se encender el indicador de estado y se iniciar la recarga O Mientras se est efectuando la carga si se cambia el interruptor OPR HOLD a la posici n ON la carga se puede cancelar antes de que concluya O Cuando el indicador de estado se apaga la carga se ha completado M Desconexi n de la unidad Haga doble clic en el icono Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 ta en la bandeja de tareas en la parte inferior de la pantalla del ordenador y siga las instrucciones en pantalla sobre c mo retirar la unidad Es posible que el icono no se muestre dependiendo de la configuraci n del sistema operativo La unidad se apaga despu s de retirarla 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00000000 O Cuando utilice una pila recargable use la que se suministra o la pila recargable opcional Si se utilizan otras bater as o pilas recargabl
118. ado pisca e ERASING apresentado Podem ser necess rios v rios minutos at a eliminag o estar terminada Ao seleccionar FOLDER no passo O passar para o ecr para eliminar todos os ficheiros na pasta seleccionada Para sair do ecr de eliminac o pressione F2 CLOSE Eliminar ficheiros do ecr de lista Seleccione ficheiros no ecr de lista p gina 4 e pressione ERASE A BC Em seguida aparece o ecr para eliminar o ficheiro Seleccione a pasta e pressione ERASE A BC Em seguida aparece o ecr para eliminar todos os ficheiros contidos na pasta Seleccionar o cen rio de gravac o 1 Pressione MENU durante cerca de 1 segundo ou mais E apresentado o ecr para seleccionar o cen rio de gravac o 2 Pressione para seleccionar o cen rio e pressione gt OK para confirmar Se seleccionar USER salte o passo 3 Pressione para seleccionar LOAD e pressione gt OK para confirmar Para sair do ecr de defini o pressione F2 CLOSE Ao pressionar REC 0 a grava o efectuada com a definig o de cen rio de gravac o seleccionada Cen rio de grava o Aplica o LANG ta Grava o da pr pria voz para praticar a STUDY QUE pronuncia etc KARAOKE dell Gravag o de volume alto como karaoke MUSIC i Grava o de alta qualidade como PERF Tel espectaculos musicais CONVERSATION m Gravag o das
119. alider O Appuyez sur pour s lectionner NEXT et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner YES et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Pendant la combinaison des fichiers le voyant d tat clignote Si vous appuyez sur F2 CLOSE avant la fin de la combinaison le processus de combinaison est annul Modifier Copier ou d placer des fichiers Copier des fichiers S lectionnez COPY l cran de r glage des modifications page 20 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le fichier copier et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Si vous s lectionnez le fichier dans un autre dossier vous pouvez naviguer l arborescence des dossiers en appuyant sur M lt Pour des d tails relatifs aux m thodes de s lection des fichiers et des dossiers voir la page 4 Lors de la copie de fichiers dans le dossier LINE LINE SD rendez vous l tape 6 3 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner la destination de la copie INTERNAL MEMORY ou microSD CARD et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider O Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le dossier de destination de la copie et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider O Appuyez sur pour s lectionner YES et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Pendant la copie du fichier le voyant d etat clignote D placer des fichiers S lectionnez MOVE l tape O gauche pour d placer des fichi
120. aney noA a nsua aseayd ur Buuoyd y 009 Z uo euoud Aq ejuoo Jo NB UOI DUOSPUEA MMM asqan eeajsny Sluoseueg eu SIA aseaid sauinbua Jayjo Aue Jo suonipuoo Auenem Bulpiebas sauejsisse au nba no y SWIL TIV LV HINOLSNI JHL AS CINIVILIY 38 QTNOHS ASVHOUNd JO JOOYUd UVIINIS YO LINIOA ISVHIANA FHL GNV GYV ALNVENVM SIHL no woy esyou Bujas woy aun Jo poned jqeuose e u os op M pue Jonpo d au eoe das 10 edas 0 asooyo eu ojuoseue y UAL UNE Jofew e jou s pnpoid y ul SINE au y eue eJeo IAWOASNI ojuoseueg eu Bugoejuoo Aq poned ejqeuoseel e uym sn Ajjou Jsnw no uay pelpawal aq jouueo yo ym PnpoJsd eu 0 plebas ul einjey Jofew e si 3194 J eunjle Jofew e 0 junoue jou seop aunjle ayy pue Aylenb jqedave jo aq 0 sitez JONPOJd eu y paoe des 10 pestedos Jonpo d ay aney O pejijua osje ale no spoob y jo anjea ul doup ay 10 pajesuadwioo aq pue spoo6 ay desy 0 pee Aew no ysim NOA 3 Jo paoejda jonpold ay aney 0 JO punjas e BABY 0 joaja pue jonpoJd el joefes ueo noA onpoid au ym eine Jofew E s 81e y Me Jelunsuog UelleNsny ay Jepun papnjoxe eq OUUE9 Jey SOOJUEJENS Jeu nsuoo YIM WOO sjonpaud oluoseueg UELEM su Jepun SYBL INOA 0 UORIPPE u 10 8007 BUD sones eu esn pue ajisqam ino 40 009Z UO aUSD 8129 Jeuwojsny Jno auoydaja aseajd YanpoJd noA 10 suoe90 anueg SOIS pastoyny joexa UO aolape 104 yonpold uo juepuedep Auen jim ebejanoo sanomoy Eejensny JO sagua
121. ar x gt eueyjodogay ea1y 4 Q 09IX9IN 0021 0008 55 40119 u 79ZZ 278 0081L0 VNVd dIA 008L0 SO9 UQJ9 9 SOJSUINU SAJUSINBIS So SP sone e O WO9 JIUuoSsEuEd XWIBD Sa USaIJ2 UOI U9JP IBIS 9P SINE E SOUS IE UOI 09IXA SP VINAY e ua UOWEULNOJUI Jaua qo ed 091x9 ERI RIII EIS Z9Z2 1Z 0180 VNVd LZ 0L80 Z921 22E 0080 VNVd 0080 eunueBiy 92200 0080 ned Z9Z2 008 0 VNVd 008 0 fenBnun 008 2922 008 008 WNWd 008 ejonzousa 0005 267 e n a9 0U049 13 apsaq Z09 06 008 aud Z9ZZ LL8 L08 L VNVA LL8 108 1 ejewajeng 2921 008 VNVd 008 JOPEAIES 13 LELZIZL 008 LELVNVd 008 21H e soy 922922 008L SINOSWNWd 0081 Jopen gt 3 Z92176 0008 L0 VNVdP6 0008 L0 e qwojo 2922 008 VNVd 008 eweued 18 U89 JORJUOD O1SenU ap Sane e SJULEWEWANP SOUIEJIEJUO9 apand sewepy uos sjuoseued IE mmm dy eune esueuy ered gan ols 0 sanu ap sane e SOU0S299e A so jsandal audios OU9189 SEU OIDIAIAS ap oJusg O JOpINquIsIp 8 2911290 en yesedo eloua sise A sojonpoid ep ugIOeWUOyU eBuago ajual D 2 UOIDU9 Y ap 011039941 ajualj9 e ugioualy INN U9IDEUNOJUL eune7 eousuuy ep sasied so esed ojos I8r7LOA Informaci n para Usuarios sobre la recolecci n y eliminaci n de aparatos viejos y baterias usadas A A Estos simbolos en los productos embalajes y o documentos adjuntos significan que los aparatos el ctricos y electr nicos y la
122. ara alterar a defini o pressione Mid gt gt para se mover entre os itens e pressione depois novamente para confirmar a defini o Pressione gt OK para confirmar A data e hora s o definidas e o rel gio come a a funcionar Para sair do ecr de defini o pressione F2 CLOSE PORTUGU S i el VQT4J81 207 A VQT4J81 208 Seleccionar a pasta Pressione F2 FOLDER Pressione M lt gt gt para seleccionar a pasta e pressione gt OK para confirmar Gey OTHER FOLDER para a reprodu o de ficheiros gravados por um dispositivo diferente desta unidade Esta unidade pode tamb m reproduzir ficheiros de m sica gravados com ou transferidos por alguns dispositivos com o Sistema Est reo Panasonic equipados com a fun o de grava o USB Alternar entre a mem ria interna e o cart o SD Se o cart o SD estiver inserido os itens contidos no cart o SD aparecem no ecr no passo O Pressione F1 MEMORY para seleccionar a mem ria Neste manual o cart o microSD microSDHC designado como cart o SD Seleccionar a pasta ou o ficheiro no ecr de lista 1 Pressione LIST P durante cerca de 1 segundo ou mais Avance para o passo 2 se houver um cart o SD inserido pagina 18 e o passo se nao 2 Pressione para seleccionar INT MEMORY mem ria interna ou microSD CARD e pressione gt OK para confirmar 3 Pressione
123. aragem H Desligar autom tico O aparelho desliga se automaticamente depois de passar um per odo de tempo predefinido a programa o de f brica de 15 minutos enquanto a grava o est parada Se a alimenta o for desligada por meio da fun o de desligar autom tico fa a deslizar o interruptor OPR HOLD para o lado desligado OFF antes de ligar a alimenta o pagina 24 Fun o de bloqueio Quando a fun o de Bloqueio activada as opera es do bot o s o ignoradas Activar a fun o de Bloqueio Fa a deslizar o interruptor OPR HOLD para o lado HOLD durante a grava o ou reprodu o Desactivar a fun o de Bloqueio Fa a deslizar o interruptor OPR HOLD na direc o oposta de HOLD Acertar o rel gio Pressione MENU Pressione para seleccionar COMMON MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar 3 Pressione para seleccionar DATE amp TIME e pressione gt OK para confirmar 4 Pressione para seleccionar o ano e pressione gt gt Pressione para seleccionar o m s e pressione gt gt 16 Pressione para definir a data e pressione gt Pressione para definir o m todo de indica o do rel gio e pressione PPI ETT e EMA s o apresentados para a exibi o de 24 horas e para a exibi o de 12 horas respectivamente O Pressione para definir a hora e pressione PP Pressione para definir o minuto P
124. audio during playback comes from the speaker Listening may be difficult in noisy places due to the speaker output In that case connect stereo earphones not supplied The built in speaker is turned off when earphones are connected Deleting files STOP W RETURN ERASE A BO e Select a file to delete beforehand page 17 Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press ERASE A BOD Press to ERASE MENU mm select FILE and MIE FOLDER press gt OK to INDEX enter EMPTY RECYCLE BIN Press to select YES and press gt OK to enter While deleting the status indicator blinks and ERASING is displayed It may take several minutes until the deletion is complete Selecting FOLDER in step will move to the screen to delete all files in the selected folder To exit the deletion screen press F2 CLOSE Deleting files from the list screen Select files on the list screen page 13 and press ERASE A BOD Then the screen to delete the file appears Select the folder and press ERASE A BOD Then the screen to delete all files in the folder appears see When the recycle bin function is ON files are moved to the recycle bin ff folder When the recycle bin function is OFF files are deleted immediately without being moved to the recycle bin MM folder gt pages 54 and 60 O Files in the MUSIC M or OTHER
125. cador de estado parpadea y el archivo seleccionado vuelve al final de la carpeta original Pulse gt OK para volver a la pantalla en el paso ESPANOL E E VQT4J81 o q N VQT4J81 o o Funci n de papelera de reciclaje Vaciado de la carpeta de la papelera de reciclaje Pulse ERASE A BC Pulse para seleccionar EMPTY RECYCLE BIN y pulse gt OK para confirmar Cuando se selecciona la carpeta de la papelera de reciclaje seleccione EMPTY en paso 2 y pulse gt OK Pulse para seleccionar YES y pulse gt OK para confirmar El indicador de estado parpadea y la papelera de reciclaje se vacia Uso del temporizador Pulse MENU Pulse para seleccionar COMMON MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar 3 Pulse para seleccionar TIMER amp ALARM y pulse gt OK para confirmar 4 Establezca los valores de los ajustes como fecha y hora y fuente de sonido O Pulse para seleccionar el elemento y pulse gt OK para confirmar O Pulse kK gt gt para seleccionar el ajuste y pulse gt OK para confirmar Repita los pasos O y para completar los ajustes Pulse para seleccionar OK y pulse gt OK para confirmar Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Ajuste Detalles SETTING OFF El temporizador no funciona ON El temporizador funciona REPEAT ONCE La grabaci n o reproducci n
126. cause there are no files registered in the selected playlist PLAYLIST1 to 5 M3U gt page 49 ENGLISH fl El VQT4J81 q a VQT4J81 q o Error messages Error message Checkpoints sk USE ONLY ALPHANUMERICS Some of the character strings in the file name or folder name are not supported characters other than Japanese and English Such files and folders cannot be added to the playlist INSERT microSD CARD FOR TIMER RECORDING e This is displayed when the SD card is not inserted at the completion of the timer recording setting CAN T START TIMER OPERATION This is displayed when the timer has failed such as when the SD card is not inserted or the recording is in progress during timer recording setting CAN T xx FILE IS OUTSIDE PLAY RANGE OF ALL SONG MODE MAX 3 000 SONGS This is displayed when you attempt to select files beyond the playback range max 3 000 files for all repeat random of MUSIC or OTHER FOLDER or when you attempt to set all repeat random while selecting files beyond the playback range max 3 000 files gt page 41 kk indication differs depending on the operations Troubleshooting guide Before requesting service make the following checks If you are in doubt about some of the check points or if the remedies indicated in the chart do not solve the problem consult your dealer for instructions Symptom Checkpoints Battery Cann
127. cerca di file CALENDAR SRCH file registrati sono ordinati in base alla data e visualizzati sotto forma di elenco DAY OF WEEK file registrati sono ordinati in base al giorno della settimana e visualizzati sotto forma di elenco RECENT R FILE I file registrati sono visualizzati in base alla data di registrazione a partire dalla data pi recente 20 file Ricerca di file O Premere LIST P per almeno 1 secondo Andare al punto 2 se inserita una scheda SD altrimenti al punto O 2 Premere per selezionare INT MEMORY memoria interna o microSD CARD quindi premere F1 SEARCH 3 Premere per selezionare il tipo di ricerca file e premere gt OK per confermare ip memoria interna o Gif scheda SD viene visualizzato come obiettivo di ricerca Quando selezionato CALENDAR SRCH Premere 144 PPI per selezionare la data di registrazione quindi premere OK per confermare Quando selezionato DAY OF WEEK Premere per selezionare il giorno della settimana quindi premere gt OK per confermare E possibile selezionare solo un giorno della settimana Premere per selezionare il file quindi premere gt OK per confermare Ascolto della musica con questa unit file musicali WMA MP3 Selezione di un file dalla cartella M Selezionare il file quindi premere gt OK Funzione di attacco cartella
128. chalten zwischen dem internen Speicher und einer SD Karte kommt Wenn die SD Karte eingesetzt ist werden die Punkte f r die SD Karte im Gleichschritt mit angezeigt Zur Auswahl des Speichers F1 MEMORY dr cken e In diesem Handbuch wird eine microSD microSDHC Karte als SD Karte bezeichnet Auswahl des Ordners oder der Datei im Listen Bildschirm LIST P etwa 1 Sekunde oder l nger gedr ckt halten Zu Schritt gehen wenn eine SD Karte Seite 18 eingesetzt ist und zu falls dies nicht der Fall ist 2 dr cken um INT MEMORY interner Speicher oder microSD CARD auszuw hlen und zur Eingabe OK dr cken O dr cken um den Ordner auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Wenn Ordner im Ordner MUSIC oder OTHER FOLDER G erstellt worden sind Schritt zur Auswahl des Zielordners wiederholen O dr cken um die Datei auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Wiedergabe der Datei beginnt Aufnahme Dr cken von F2 FOLDER O 44 PP dr cken um den Aufnahme Zielordner auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken F r die Mikrofonaufnahme einen Ordner aus den Ordnern A B C und D w hlen Die Werkseinstellung ist A REC 0 dr cken Aufnahme startet STOP W RETURN dr cken um die Aufnahme zu stoppen Zum Pausieren der Aufnahme REC 6 w hrend der Aufnahme dr cken Auf
129. cherger t und wird als das externe Speicherger t eines Computers erkannt Datendateien k nnen vom Computer bertragen und in diesem Ger t abgespeichert werden Pflege und Instandhaltung Die Au enfl chen des Ger tes mit einem trockenen weichen Tuch reinigen Bei starker Verschmutzung des Ger tes ein Tuch mit Wasser anfeuchten gr ndlich auswringen die Schmutzflecken damit abwischen und anschlie end mit einem trockenen Tuch nachreiben Keine L sungsmittel wie etwa Benzin Verd nner Alkohol Sp lmittel chemikaliengetr nkte Wischt cher etc verwenden Dies k nnte zur Verformung des u eren Geh uses oder Abl sung der Beschichtung f hren DEUTSCH E o bar RE e gt 5 VQT4J81 N S microSDHC Logo ist ein Markenzeichen von SD 3C LLC F r dieses Produkt gelten bestimmte geistige Eigentumsrechte der Microsoft Corporation und von Dritten Die Verwendung oder Verbreitung derartiger Technologie au erhalb dieses Produkts ist ohne Lizenz von Microsoft oder einem autorisierten Microsoft Tochterunternehmen bzw von Dritten untersagt Dieses Ger t kann beim Betrieb Hochfrequenzst rungen auffangen die von einem in der N he verwendeten Handy verursacht werden Falls eine solche St rbeeinflussung festgestellt wird sollte das Handy in gr erer Entfernung von diesem Ger t betrieben werden Die AAA LR03 Batterien und die Akkus au erhalb der Reichweite von Kindern aufbewa
130. d for REC PLAY E Checking the timer condition or execution state Timer indication 120920 172040 MP3 EIN Eg iT Timer is set The display flashes when the timer is executed x When the repeat settings are ONCE this is dis played if the timer recording fails To clear the display change the settings to OFF or set the timer again When the repeat setting is DAILY or SELECT this is displayed if the timer recording fails If the next timer operates normally the ay indication is redisplayed O If the power is off at the specified time the power turns on and the timer recording starts and then the power turns off at the end time When the power is off at timer playback time the file playback starts a little behind the scheduled time O During timer recording playback only stop operation and volume adjustment can be performed Switch the Hold function to off before operation if it is on O To stop an alarm press one of the buttons on this unit You can stop an alarm even if the Hold function is on O After setting the file to be played for timer playback if the set file is deleted the alarm sounds at the timer start time O If a file shorter than the period from the start to end is specified for timer playback that file is played repeatedly When the file playback is assigned as playback source the files are played back at the scheduled time with the playback settings
131. d without displaying OTHER FOLDER on a computer Playing files in OTHER FOLDER You can select and play files in the same way as with the MUSIC M folder page 48 The folder cue function gt page 49 can also be used in the same way Example of folder structure First hierarchy FI OTHER FOLDER Third hierarchy Second hierarchy I Playback is available to the second hierarchy Files on the third hierarchy and after cannot be played 1 DATA TIMER TI Meeting1 MP3 T2 tee orl VOICE i Hol Lecture1 MP3 The types of files that can be played number of files that can be recognised and other conditions are the same as for the MUSIC M folder gt page 48 When there are subfolders in OTHER FOLDER files up to the second level can be played Files transferred directly to the internal memory or an SD card cannot be played with this unit Transfer files to the MUSIC M folder or insert them in a folder and then transfer them E RECYCLE folder This is the recycle bin When the recycle bin function is ON deleted recording files are moved to the RECYCLE folder recycle bin Files in the MUSIC M folder or OTHER FOLDER E are not moved to the recycle bin and are completely deleted from the unit irrespective of the recycle bin function settings Numbers such as 001_ are attached to the s
132. da Uso de la funci n de lista de reproducci n Registro de sus pistas favoritas en una lista de reproducci n Seleccione la carpeta MUSIC M en la pantalla de lista gt p gina 4 Tambi n se puede seleccionar OTHER FOLDER ED 2 Pulse para seleccionar el archivo o la carpeta y pulse F1 PLAYLIST para confirmar Cuando est realizando una selecci n de carpetas o de archivos cambiando de carpetas pulse tl y podr moverse dentro de las jerarqu as Para detalles sobre la selecci n de archivos y carpetas acuda a la p gina 4 3 Pulse Hd bb para seleccionar la lista de reproducci n y pulse gt OK para confirmar Seleccione en PLAYLIST 1 a 5 El archivo o todos los archivos dentro de la carpeta se registran en la lista de reproducci n seleccionada Reproducci n de pistas registradas en la lista de reproducci n Seleccione la lista de reproducci n de P1 a P5 3 p gina 4 O Pulse 4 gt gt para seleccionar el archivo y luego pulse gt OK ESPA OL E Cambio del orden de las pistas de una lista de reproducci n Seleccione la lista de reproducci n desde P1 a P5 en la pantalla de lista gt p gina 4 2 Pulse para seleccionar el archivo que desee cambiar y pulse F1 EDIT Pulse para seleccionar CHANGE ORDER y pulse gt OK para confirmar np se afiade a la izquierda del nombre del archivo seleccionado 4 Pulse para mover el archivo
133. der eliminar equipamentos el ctricos e electr nicos por favor contacte o seu Distribuidor ou Produtor para obter mais informag es Informac o sobre a eliminac o noutros pa ses fora da Uni o Europeia Estes s mbolos s o v lidos apenas na Uni o Europeia Se pretender eliminar este produto contacte por favor as autoridades locais respons veis pela recolha de res duos ou o ponto de venda onde o produto foi adquirido e solicite informa o sobre o m todo de eliminag o correcto Nota para os s mbolos de baterias dois exemplos de s mbolos Este s mbolo pode ser utilizado em conjugac o com um s mbolo qu mico Neste caso ter de proceder em conformidade com o estabelecido na Directiva referente aos produtos qu micos utilizados PORTUGU S E 8 8 VQT4J81 ao AZOOM STEREOW E LISTP ERASE A B EU EU Pursuant to at the directive 2004 108 EC article 9 2 Panasonic Testing Centre Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH Winsbergring 15 22525 Hamburg Germany Panasonic Corporation Em Ge Cit En E En Web Site http panasonic net O Panasonic Corporation 2012 VQT4J81
134. diante la conexi n de un micr fono externo Deslice el interruptor Mic Line a la posici n MIC Conecte el micr fono externo Micr fono externo no incluido Inserte firmemente a Tipo de clavija mini clavija est reo de o 3 5 mm Pulse REC 0 para iniciar la grabaci n ESPA OL DI o VQT4J81 g B VQT4J81 o o Grabaci n desde otros dispositivos Deslice el interruptor Mic Line a la posici n LINE Pulse MENU Pulse para seleccionar LINE REC y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar LINE INPUT y pulse gt OK para confirmar 5 Pulse para seleccionar el ajuste y pulse gt OK para confirmar Cuando realice la conexi n con la terminal de auriculares de un dispositivo externo o con la terminal de salida de linea de un dispositivo portatil seleccione HIGH o LOW alto y bajo respectivamente El ajuste de f brica es HIGH Pulse F2 CLOSE O Conecte el dispositivo externo Conecte con el dispositivo externo y deslice el interruptor Mic Line a la posici n LINE Aparecer entonces el ajuste de entrada de l nea seleccionado y el modo de grabaci n de l nea 8 Pulse y mantenga pulsado REC 0 durante 1 segundo o m s La unidad pasar al modo de espera de grabaci n 9 Inicie la reproducci n del dispositivo externo y ajuste el nivel de entrada salida O Si el indicador de nivel se muev
135. dificaci n de la velocidad de reproducci n Pulse F1 SPEED durante la reproducci n Pulse F1 SLOW o F2 FAST para seleccionar la velocidad y pulse gt OK para confirmar Velocidad de reproducci n La velocidad de reproducci n puede ajustarse en pasos de 10 para velocidades m s r pidas que la normal 100 y en pasos de 5 en velocidades m s lentas que la normal Indicaci n del estado durante la grabaci n La reproducci n a velocidad normal reproducci n r pida y reproducci n lenta se muestran como gt Dy respectivamente Reproduccion de repetici n A B Pulse ERASE A BC durante la reproducci n Se establece el punto de inicio A y se muestran Fa Ea iluminado y E parpadeando Pulse ERASE A BC en el punto final B La pantalla cambia a EEx iluminado y comienza la reproducci n de repetici n ESPA OL E Cancelaci n de la repetici n A B Pulse ERASE A BC 44 gt gt 0 STOP M RETURN g VQT4J81 o O o 190 7 Reproducci n desde una posici n especifica TIME SEARCH Pulse MENU Cuando la reproducci n est en curso acuda al paso O 2 Pulse para seleccionar PLAY MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar TIME SEARCH y pulse gt OK para confirmar Establezca la posici n de inicio de la reproducci n Para ajustar la posici n de inicio cambie el valor de TIME
136. ding oe m O Edo ME i O 3 MT RS n DI ago cs La IE O Status indication During recording Il During recording pause recording standby past recording standby Folder name gt page 12 File number Level meter Displays the volume input into this unit Stereo L R L and R volumes are displayed respectively during monaural recording gt page 25 as well Note that the monaural recording data are synthesised from L and R Recording mode gt page 25 OVER indication If the input volume is excessive and the level meter swings Wa is displayed Possible remaining recording time Displays the remaining recording time possible recording time in the selected recording mode Microphone sensitivity page 26 See page 6 for other screen displays Note when recording This unit is equipped with a high sensitivity microphone Accordingly if a breath or wind directly hits the microphone during recording the wind cutting sound may be recorded or voice may be difficult to hear 1 This can be prevented by blocking the LG wind with your Ge body so that the wind does not directly hit the unit 2 During dictation recording slightly move this unit from front of your mouth or keep distance Turning the LOW CUT FILTER page 26 to ON reduces the sound of low frequency range This may help the reduction of the wind cutting sound Keep distanc
137. ding mode as necessary 3 page 37 The L folder will be automatically selected for recording when line input sound is recorded This unit has the following synchro recording function This function detects the silence between tracks etc and then records each track into different files such as a first track second track etc If detecting sound from the external device recording starts automatically If detecting silence for approx 2 seconds or more recording is paused Detecting sound again will resume recording Synchro recording setting e Press STOP IN RETURN to stop the unit Press MENU Press to select LINE REC and press gt OK to enter 3 Press to select SYNCHRO REC and press gt OK to enter Press to select ON Auto Stop or ON Manual Stop and press gt OK to enter AUTO STOP IF NO SOUND FOR 15 SEC Auto The recording pauses if approx 2 seconds or more of silence is detected and stops if silence continues approx 15 seconds or more Manual Even if silence continues the recording continues to be paused standby until STOP W RETURN is pressed The factory setting is OFF SYNCHRO REC M ON CAL pi ON Manual Stop To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE Connect the device slide the Mic Line switch to LINE and ERR is shown on the display Automatic stop is useful when recording CD
138. e Sound may jump during recording especially PCM recording depending on use conditions of the internal memory and SD card Formatting them on this unit page 60 before recording is recommended Playing STOP W RETURN e Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit e Select a folder page 12 e Select a file gt right Press gt OK Playback starts Adjusting the volume Turn up the volume Press Turn down the volume Press Volume range is 0 to 20 The factory setting is 10 If you turn the unit off with the volume set to 17 or more the volume will be set to 16 next time the unit is turned on Operations during playback Jump Skip Press 44 bb Press ld amp midway while playing a file and the playback jumps to the beginning of the file To return to the previous file press kd within approx 1 second from the beginning of the file Fast backward Fast forward Search Press and hold t4 gt gt To stop Press STOP W RETURN r Select a file Press Htd gt P to select Each time you press the file number changes File number Total number of files in the folder Folder name 121231192940 MPS a 2 3a Remaining Memory E recording time usage Mi x indication EE FOLDER 3 page 12 Screen display example while stopped No You can also select the file on the list screen gt page 13 O T
139. e Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE ITALIANO fi i VQT4J81 N w A VQT4J81 Selezione della cartella Premere F2 FOLDER Premere K lt gt gt per selezionare la cartella quindi premere gt OK per confermare y OTHER FOLDER per la riproduzione di file registrati con un dispositivo diverso dalla presente unit Su questa unit inoltre possibile riprodurre file musicali registrati con o trasferiti da alcuni dispositivi Panasonic Stereo System dotati della funzione di registrazione USB Passare dalla memoria interna alla scheda SD e viceversa Se la scheda SD inserita le voci della scheda SD sono visualizzate sullo schermo nel punto Premere F1 MEMORY per selezionare la memoria Nel presente manuale la scheda microSD microSDHC viene indicata come Scheda SD Selezione della cartella o del file nella schermata di elenco 1 Premere LIST P per almeno 1 secondo Andare al punto se inserita una scheda SD pagina 18 altrimenti al punto E 2 Premere per selezionare INT MEMORY memoria interna o microSD CARD quindi premere gt OK per confermare Premere per selezionare la cartella quindi premere gt OK per confermare Se sono state create delle cartelle nella cartella MUSIC o OTHER FOLDER Ed ripetere il punto E per selezionare la cartella di destinazione Premere per selezionare
140. e chiedere il modo corretto di rottamazione Non scaldare e non esporre a fiamme libere e Non lasciare le pile in un automobile esposta alla luce diretta del sole per un periodo di tempo prolungato con porte e finestrini chiusi Assicurarsi di utilizzare cuffie e auricolari che siano raccomandati o forniti in dotazione In base allo standard EN 50332 2 2003 1 Tensione di uscita massima uscita auricolare 150mV 2 Tensione caratteristica ampia banda auricolari 2 75mV Informazioni per gli utenti sulla raccolta e l eliminazione di vecchie apparecchiature e batterie usate A A Questi simboli sui prodotti sull imballaggio e o sulle documentazioni o manuali accompagnanti i prodotti indicano che i prodotti elettrici elettronici e le batterie usate non devono essere buttati nei rifiuti domestici generici Per un trattamento adeguato recupero e riciclaggio di vecchi prodotti e batterie usate vi preghiamo di portarli negli appositi punti di raccolta secondo la legislazione vigente nel vostro Paese e le Direttive 2002 96 EC e 2006 66 EC Smaltendo correttamente questi prodotti e le batterie contribuirete a salvare importanti risorse e ad evitare i potenziali effetti negativi sulla salute umana e sull ambiente che altrimenti potrebbero verificarsi in seguito ad un trattamento inappropriato dei rifiuti Per ulteriori informazioni sulla raccolta e sul riciclaggio di vecchi prodotti e batterie vi preghiamo di contattar
141. e file search function Listening to music on this unit WMA MP3 music files Using the playlist function Editing Dividing files Editing Combining files Editing Copying or moving files Recycle bin function Using the timer Common menu BEEP SOUND REC LED BATT SETTING AUTO POWER OFF BACKLIGHT CONTRAST RECYCLE BIN FORMAT INIT MENU VERSION Using with a computer System requirements Connecting this unit to a computer Opening folders of this unit Importing files to a computer Organising files File name Folder structure on this unit Transferring music files to this unit Q amp A Frequently Asked Questions Error messages Troubleshooting guide Specifications Care and use Maintenance Part names O O Built in microphone O Zoom stereo switch LCD display F1 F2 The F1 and F2 buttons operate the function shown in the display MENU Volume up D Fast backward OP OK LIST Volume down OPP Fast forward External microphone Line in jack OPR HOLD switch OPR Operation STOP W RETURN GRECO Recording indicator Status indicator ERASE A B O Built in speaker Headphone earphone jack 0 Mic Line switch Battery SD card slot cover USB plug lever Strap eyelet SD card slot When is open USB cover It is stored inside the unit when the unit is con
142. e grabaci n 12 dB Una vez que los ajustes para la banda de frecuencia a cambiar se hayan completado vaya al paso O Pulse gt OK para confirmar Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE El nombre del modo EQ no se visualiza despu s de salir de la pantalla de ajustes Al pulsar REC se inicia la grabaci n Modo EQ Efectos y aplicaciones Este modo basico no enfatiza un rango de ECAT sonido espec fico EXTRA BASS Enfatiza fuertemente el rango de los graves BASS Enfatiza ligeramente el rango de los graves MIDDLE Enfatiza el rango medio BASS amp TREBLE nn el rango de los agudos TREBLE Enfatiza ligeramente el rango de los agudos EXTRA TREBLE Enfatiza fuertemente el rango de los agudos USER Este modo habilita el ajuste de las bandas de frecuencia de 150 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 4 kHz y 12 kHz El ajuste de fabrica es FLAT Temporizador Pulse MENU Pulse para seleccionar MIC REC MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar 3 Pulse para seleccionar SELF TIMER y pulse gt OK para confirmar 4 Pulse para seleccionar la hora y pulse gt OK para confirmar El ajuste de fabrica es OFF Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Prevenci n de una grabacion innecesaria VAS Pulse MENU 2 Pulse para seleccionar MIC REC MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse
143. e il vostro comune i vostri operatori per lo smaltimento dei rifiuti o il punto vendita dove avete acquistato gli articoli Sono previste e potrebbero essere applicate sanzioni qualora questi rifiuti non siano stati smaltiti in modo corretto ed in accordo con la legislazione nazionale Per utenti commerciali nell Unione Europea Se desiderate eliminare apparecchiature elettriche ed elettroniche vi preghiamo di contattare il vostro commerciante od il fornitore per maggiori informazioni Informazioni sullo smaltimento rifiuti in altri Paesi fuori dall Unione Europea Questi simboli sono validi solo all interno dell Unione Europea Se desiderate smaltire questi articoli vi preghiamo di contattare le autorit locali od il rivenditore ed informarvi sulle modalit per un corretto smaltimento Nota per il simbolo delle batterie Esempio con simbolo chimico riportato sotto il simbolo principale Questo simbolo pu essere usato in combinazione con un simbolo chimico in questo caso conforme ai requisiti indicati dalla Direttiva per il prodotto chimico in questione ITALIANO E R 8 VQT4J81 o Ga VQT4J81 a Ce mode d emploi d crit les op rations et les fonctions de base de l appareil Accessoires fournis 1 Pile rechargeable Ni MH AAA OD sign e par pile rechargeable dans le texte 1 Etui de transport de la pile 1 Cable prolongateur USB Veillez acheter HHR 4MVE pour Europe ou HHR 4MVT
144. e il livello di registrazione 12 dB Quando sono state completate tutte le impostazioni per la banda di frequenza da modificare andare al punto O 5 Premere gt OK per confermare Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Il nome della modalita EQ non viene visualizzato una volta usciti dalla schermata di impostazione Premere REC 0 per iniziare la registrazione Modalit EQ Effetti e applicazioni Questa modalit di base non enfatizza alcuna FRAD frequenza audio specifica EXTRA BASS Enfatizza molto le basse frequenze BASS Enfatizza leggermente le basse frequenze MIDDLE Enfatizza le medie frequenze BASS amp TREBLE Enfatizza leggermente le basse e le alte frequenze TREBLE Enfatizza leggermente le alte frequenze EXTRA TREBLE Enfatizza molto le alte frequenze Questa modalit consente la regolazione di USER bande di frequenza di 150 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 4 kHz e 12 kHz L impostazione di fabbrica FLAT Auto timer Premere MENU 2 Premere per selezionare MIC REC MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare 3 Premere per selezionare SELF TIMER quindi premere gt OK per confermare Premere per selezionare l ora quindi premere gt OK per confermare L impostazione di fabbrica OFF Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Prevenzione delle regist
145. e internal memory or SD card on this unit gt page 60 e If the error persists even after formatting check if compatibility of your SD card has been verified according to our manufacturing standards gt page 46 If you repeat writing or deleting files the file alignment becomes discontinuous in the internal memory and continuous space area may be reduced called fragmentation If the fragmentation advances file writing speed becomes slow and writing may not be performed properly CAN T DIVIDE REC TIME IS TOO SHORT This is displayed when you attempt to divide a file of a short recording time approx less than 2 seconds CAN T DIVIDE FILE AT THIS POSITION This is displayed when you attempt to divide a file at the position where file division is impossible around the start or the end of the file CAN T COMBINE TOTAL SIZE EXCEEDS 2GB This is displayed when the total size of files to be combined exceeds 2 GB CAN T COMBINE DIFFERENT FILE FORMATS REC QUALITY This is displayed when you attempt to combine files whose recording modes differ from each other LOW BATTERY CHARGE BATTERY BEFORE ise FILES LOW BATTERY REPLACE BATTERY BEFORE att FILES e This is displayed when you attempt to copy combine or move files while the battery indicator shows blinking or ALI gt page 10 Error message Checkpoints COPY MOVE DESTINATION FOLDER FULL The file can
146. e lecture de P1 P5 dans P cran de liste gt page 4 O Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le fichier que vous souhaitez modifier et appuyez sur F1 EDIT Appuyez sur pour s lectionner CHANGE ORDER et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider mp est ajout gauche du nom du fichier s lectionn Appuyez sur pour d placer le fichier s lectionn la position souhait e et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Lordre des pistes est modifi FRANCAIS Ni gt g VQT4J81 9 2 3 VQT4J81 Utiliser la fonction de liste de lecture Annuler des pistes enregistr es dans la liste de lecture S lectionnez la liste de lecture de P1 P5 dans l cran de liste gt page 4 2 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le fichier que vous souhaitez supprimer et appuyez sur F1 EDIT Appuyez sur pour s lectionner ERASE FILE et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Lors de l annulation de toutes les pistes enregistr es Appuyez sur pour s lectionner ERASE ALL et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner YES et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Modifier Diviser des fichiers Afficher l cran de r glage des modifications Appuyez sur MENU 2 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner EDIT MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner l l ment m
147. e y se muestra MMAR quiere decir que el volumen del dispositivo externo es demasiado alto Ajuste el volumen del dispositivo externo en el margen IN incluso si el volumen esta colocado en el maximo Para volver a configurar los ajustes de entrada de linea pulse MENU y siga los pasos a O Una vez que haya terminado de ajustar el nivel de entrada salida detenga la fuente de sonido del otro dispositivo en la posici n en la que desee iniciar la grabaci n Pulse REC 6 para iniciar la grabaci n D Inicie la reproducci n en el dispositivo externo Esta unidad tiene la siguiente funci n de grabaci n de sincronizaci n Esta funci n detecta el silencio entre las pistas y luego graba cada pista en un archivo diferente como por ejemplo la primera pista la segunda pista etc Si se detecta sonido proveniente del dispositivo externo la grabaci n se inicia de forma autom tica Igualmente si se detecta un silencio durante aproximadamente 2 segundos o m s la grabaci n se pone en pausa La grabaci n se reanuda cuando se vuelve a detectar sonido Ajuste de grabaci n sinconizada Pulse MENU Pulse para seleccionar LINE REC y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar SYNCHRO REC y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar ON Auto Stop o ON Manual Stop y pulse gt OK para confirmar Auto La grabaci n se pone en pausa si
148. ebbero essere inutilizzabili ecc Panasonic e i rivenditori Panasonic non possono essere ritenuti responsabili per perdita dei dati audio o altri danni diretti o indiretti eccetto nei casi di negligenza intenzionale o grave Memoria interna 4 GB RR XS450 2 GB RR XS420 La capacit utilizzabile inferiore ITALIANO A El VQT4J81 Eq a Collegamento di questa unit a un computer Estrarre la spina USB dell unit 2 Collegare l unit a un computer mediante la porta USB Se l unit non pu essere collegata direttamente al computer utilizzare il cavo di prolunga USB in dotazione Non utilizzare un cavo di prolunga USB diverso da quello in dotazione Il cavo in dotazione non deve essere usato con altri dispositivi Precauzione per il collegamento al computer usare soltanto il cavo di prolunga USB con nucleo in ferrite in dotazione 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000000 La prima volta che si collega l unit al PC Poich appariranno diversi messaggi Trovato nuovo hardware non disconnettere l unit dal PC prima che tutti i messaggi siano scomparsi O Non possibile utilizzare l unit quando collegata al computer O Quando l unit collegata al PC pu funzionare senza la batteria poich l alimentazione fornita dal computer O Quando l unit viene collegata al computer il computer potrebbe non avviarsi riavvi
149. ecr de definic o pressione F2 CLOSE Para iniciar a grava o VAS pressione REC 0 Ajustar o nivel de funcionamento VAS Pressione dd gt gt durante a grava o VAS A programac o de f brica 3 Func o de gravac o anterior PRE RECORD Pressione MENU Pressione para seleccionar MIC REC MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar PRE RECORD e pressione gt OK para confirmar 4 Pressione para seleccionar ON e pressione gt OK para confirmar A programac o de f brica OFF Para sair do ecr de definic o pressione F2 CLOSE Gravar utilizando a fung o de gravac o anterior O Pressione e mantenha pressionado REC 0 durante 1 ou mais segundos A unidade entra no modo de espera da gravac o anterior Muda como 1 seg 2 seg 3 seg e p ra em 3 seg Os dados de udio do microfone cerca de 3 segundos antes da gravac o s o sempre actualizados e a unidade fica em espera Pressione REC 6 O indicador de gravag o acende e a grava o continua directamente ap s os dados de udio guardados Parar Pressione STOP W RETURN Gravar ligando um microfone externo Fa a deslizar o interruptor Mic Line para MIC Ligue o microfone externo Microfone externo n o inclu do Introduza firmemente Tipo de ficha Minificha est reo com um g de 3 5 mm 3 Pressione REC 0 para inic
150. edr ckt halten Das Ger t geht in den Aufnahme Bereitschaftszustand ber 2 Das Mikrofon zur Aufnahme auf die Tonquelle richten 4 PPI dr cken um den Aufnahmepegel anzupassen Anpassungsbereich liegt bei 0 bis 30 Die Werkseinstellung ist 15 Dr cken von REC 0 startet Aufnahme DEUTSCH u 2 A VQT4J81 VQT4J81 102 Manuelle Einstellung des Aufnahmepegels Einstellung des Aufnahme Peak Limiters Aufnahme Spitzenwertbegrenzer auf ON MENU dr cken O dr cken um MIC REC MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken dr cken um PEAK LIMITER auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um ON auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Werkseinstellung ist OFF F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Einstellung des Aufnahme EQ REC 0 f r 1 Sekunde oder l nger gedr ckt halten Das Ger t geht in den Aufnahme Bereitschaftszustand ber MENU dr cken dr cken um REC EQ auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken dr cken um den Aufnahme EQ Modus zu w hlen Bei der Wahl eines anderen Modus als USER fortfahren mit Schritt O Einstellung bei Auswahl von USER Nach Schritt O F1 EDIT dr cken Ht4 PP dr cken um das zu ndernde Frequenzband zu w hlen und dr cken um den Aufnahmepegel 12 dB anzupas
151. egislation and the Directives 2002 96 EC and 2006 66 EC By disposing of these products and batteries correctly you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries please contact your local municipality your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste in accordance with national legislation For business users in the European Union If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment please contact your dealer or supplier for further information Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union These symbols are only valid in the European Union If you wish to discard these items please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal Note for the battery symbol bottom two symbol examples This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved ENGLISH Ri 2 g VQT4J81 LLOZ LO LO 0 enss LLI LEO OUd ELLZ MSN ed euenboen PEOY uogenouuj 481 269 100 8 NOW 481 Z6S L00 NOV payw 7 Ad eijeijsny S uoseueg ejgejiene suononu sui Bunesado noA
152. eihenfolge der Titel ist nun ge ndert worden DEUTSCH g VQT4J81 VQT4J81 112 Verwendung der Playlist Funktion L schen von in einer Playlist registrierten Tracks Titeln 1 Die Playlist von P1 bis P5 im Listenbildschirm ausw hlen gt Seite 4 2 dr cken um die Datei auszuw hlen die gel scht werden soll und F1 EDIT dr cken O dr cken um ERASE FILE auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Beim Abbrechen aller registrieren Tracks Titel dr cken um ERASE ALL auszuw hlen und OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um YES auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Bearbeiten Teilen von Dateien Anzeigen des Einstellbildschirms f r das Bearbeiten MENU dr cken dr cken um EDIT MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken dr cken um den zu bearbeitenden Punkt auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken F1 TAB dr cken um zu anderen Einstellungsbildschirmen umzuschalten n Die Einstellungsdetails und Anderungsmethoden sind f r verschiedene Einstellpunkte unterschiedlich F r n here Informationen siehe die entsprechende Seite F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Teilen von Dateien W hrend der Wiedergabe STOP W RETURN an dem Punkt dr cken an dem die Datei geteilt werden soll 2 DIVIDE im Bearbeitungs Einstellungsbildschirm 3
153. electrolyte comes Lu in contact with any part of your body e Keep the AAA LRO3 batteries and the rechargeable batteries out of reach of children to prevent swallowing Accidental swallowing of batteries can result in stomach and intestinal damage e When carrying batteries in a pocket or bag ensure no metal objects such as necklaces are placed together with them Contact with metal may cause short circuiting which can cause a fire For safety carry the batteries in the battery carrying case E Rechargeable battery e To store or carry the rechargeable battery put the removed battery into the battery case supplied avoiding metallic objects clip etc 2 VQT4J81 N co S 88 8 6 VOT4 Care and use E SD card compatibility microSD card and microSDHC card can be used on devices that support each card microSD card can also be used on devices that support microSDHC card Using on devices that do not support those cards may format the SD cards or erase the recorded contents Also computers or devices that do not support microSDHC card may display a message that encourages you to format the SD card If you format the SD card the data will be erased Erased data cannot be recovered Do not format the SD card E Notice for when transferring to another party or disposing of the SD card or the unit If the internal memory and SD card are formatted or the data on them are deleted such data cannot be played back howev
154. elezionare YES quindi premere gt OK per confermare La scena di registrazione selezionata viene ripristinata sull impostazione di fabbrica Per selezionare la scena di registrazione inizializzata selezionare LOAD Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Scena diretta Questa funzione consente di cambiare la scena di registrazione in base alle variazioni della posizione del microfono GAI momento dell acquisto MEETING assegnata a STEREO e LECTURE assegnata a ZOOM Modifica dell impostazione di scena diretta Premere MENU 2 Premere per selezionare MIC REC MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare DIRECT SCENE quindi premere gt OK per confermare 4 Premere per selezionare la posizione del microfono STEREO o ZOOM quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare la scena di registrazione quindi premere gt OK per confermare Se si desidera modificare la scena di registrazione per l altra posizione del microfono eseguire i punti e per impostare la scena di registrazione Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE ITALIANO u Bi VQT4J81 127 IC VQT4J81 D o Scena diretta Impostazione della scena diretta su OFF Premere MENU 2 Premere per selezionare MIC REC MENU quindi
155. emere gt OK per confermare Q Premere per selezionare YES quindi premere gt OK per confermare Mentre l unit esegue la combinazione dei file l indicatore di stato lampeggia Premendo F2 CLOSE prima che la combinazione sia terminata la combinazione viene annullata Modifica copia o spostamento di file Copia di file Selezionare COPY nella schermata di modifica delle impostazioni pagina 20 O Premere per selezionare il file da copiare quindi premere gt OK per confermare Quando si seleziona il file in un altra cartella possibile Spostarsi tra i livelli gerarchici della cartella premendo k d Per dettagli sui metodi di selezione di file e cartelle si veda pagina 4 Per copiare i file nella cartella LINE LINE_SD andare al passo O Premere per selezionare la destinazione della copia INTERNAL MEMORY o microSD CARD quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare la cartella di destinazione della copia quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare YES quindi premere gt OK per confermare Mentre l unit esegue la copia del file l indicatore di stato lampeggia Spostamento di file Selezionare MOVE al passo 0 a sinistra per spostare i file Loperazione identica alla copia dei file Funzione cestino Ripristino dei file nel cestino nella cartella ori
156. emoria esterna del computer file di dati sul computer possono essere trasferiti e salvati su questa unit Manutenzione Pulire l unit con un panno morbido e asciutto Se l unit molto sporca strizzare un panno inumidito con acqua togliere lo sporco e terminare la pulizia con un panno asciutto e Non usare solventi compresi benzolo diluenti alcol detersivi da cucina detergenti chimici ecc Tali prodotti potrebbero deformare l involucro o rovinare la vernice ITALIANO m S VQT4J81 a I 5 VQT4J81 D do Il logo microSDHC un marchio di SD 3C LLC Durante l uso questo prodotto potrebbe essere soggetto Il prodotto protetto dai diritti sulla propriet intellettuale di all interferenza radio causata dal cellulare Se si dovesse Microsoft Corporation e terze parti L utilizzo o la distribuzione verificare tale interferenza aumentare la distanza tra questo di tale tecnologia al di fuori di questo prodotto vietato senza prodotto e il cellulare una licenza concessa da Microsoft o sussidiaria o terza parte autorizzata da Microsoft Tenere le batterie AAA LRO3 e le batterie ricaricabili fuori della portata dei bambini per evitare che possano ingoiarle Precauzione Pericolo di esplosione se la batteria viene sostituita scorrettamente Sostituirla soltanto con il tipo consigliato dal produttore Per disfarsi delle batterie rivolgersi alle autorit locali o al rivenditore
157. en Verwendung der Playlist Funktion Ihre Lieblingstitel in einer Playlist registrieren Den Ordner MUSIC M im Listenbildschirm w hlen Seite 4 Sie k nnen auch OTHER FOLDER ED w hlen 2 dr cken um die Datei oder den Ordner auszuw hlen und F1 PLAYLIST zur Eingabe dr cken Bei der Auswahl von Ordnern K dr cken um sich innerhalb der Rangfolge der Hierarchieebenen zu bewegen Einzelheiten hinsichtlich der Datei und Ordnerauswahlmethoden sind auf Seite 4 zu finden 44 gt gt dr cken um die Playlist auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Aus der PLAYLIST 1 bis 5 w hlen Die Datei oder alle Dateien in dem Order werden in der ausgew hlten Playlist registriert Wiedergabe von in einer Playlist registrierten Titeln O Die Playlist ausw hlen von P1 bis P5 gt Seite 4 O 44 P gt dr cken um die Datei die wiedergegeben werden soll auszuw hlen Dann gt OK dr cken ndern der Reihenfolge der Playlist Titel O Die Playlist von P1 bis P5 im Listenbildschirm ausw hlen gt Seite 4 2 dr cken um die Datei auszuw hlen die ge ndert werden soll und F1 EDIT dr cken O dr cken um CHANGE ORDER auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken je wird auf der linken Seite zum ausgew hlten Dateinamen hinzugef gt O dr cken um die ausgew hlte Datei zur gew nschten Position zu bewegen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die R
158. eno3 Z92176 0008 L0 VNWdy6 0008 L0 eIquio og 7922 008 VNVd 008 eweued 149 u99 J9E juo9 Ino Aq Ajoasip sn joejuoo Aew noA osy uos siuoseued Je mmm AU sUeOLOWY UNE 0 aus q m Ino Aq s oss vse pue sped aJeds Ang Jajuay aoinas JO JonqL ISIP 18S0 9 SU SZI EIO JueIsIsse an Jelsdo pue uopewoyzu sjonpoud uleIqO IE 8911198 49UI0 SND 991M19S J9UOJSNI EEE EE EP UO BULIOJU INJOSN JUO S9 UNos UBILSUY UNE 104 ES a VQT4J81 Dieses Handbuch beschreibt die grundlegenden Arbeitsvorgange und Funktionen des Ger ts Mitgeliefertes Zubehor 1 AAA Ni MH Akku 0 Im Text als Akku angegeben 1 Batterietransporttasche 1 USB Verlangerungskabel Den wiederaufladbaren Akku durch einem Akku vom Typ HHR 4MVE f r Europa oder HHR 4MVT f r Asien und Lateinamerika ersetzen Stand Mai 2012 Einlegen der Batterie 1 AAA Ni MH Akku mitgeliefert Auf korrekte Ausrichtung der Batterie achten Aufladen der Batterie Herausnehmen des USB Steckers Dr cken und gleichzeitig schieben bis ein Klick Laut zu h ren ist Aufbewahren des USB Steckers USB Stecker des Ger ts in den Computer stecken Wenn das Ger t nicht direkt mit dem Computer verbunden werden kann das USB Verl ngerungskabel mitgeliefert benutzen Erstmaliger Anschluss des Ger tes an den PC Da mehrere Neue Hardware gefunden Meldungen erscheinen werden das Ger t
159. ento non garantito se si utilizza un hub USB Anche qualora i requisiti di sistema menzionati in questo documento siano soddisfatti alcuni personal computer non possono essere utilizzati Macintosh Questo programma funziona con il driver standard di OS Il funzionamento garantito soltanto con i sistemi operativi compatibili Il funzionamento non garantito con un sistema operativo aggiornato Il funzionamento non garantito con i computer assemblati Se si usa Windows Media Player il computer deve soddisfare i requisiti di sistema di Windows Media Player Rivolgersi a Microsoft Corporation per i dettagli su Windows Media Player Microsoft Windows Windows Media e Windows Vista sono marchi o marchi registrati di Microsoft Corporation negli Stati Uniti d America e in altri Paesi Tecnologia di codifica audio MPEG Layer 3 su licenza da Fraunhofer IIS e Thomson IBM e PC AT sono marchi o marchi registrati di International Business Machines Corporation degli Stati Uniti d America Macintosh e Mac OS sono marchi depositati di Apple Inc Altri nomi di sistemi e nomi di prodotti che appaiono in questo documento sono generalmente marchi o marchi registrati delle rispettive imprese di sviluppo Tenere presente che il marchio e il marchio non appaiono in questo documento A seconda dell ambiente del computer potrebbero verificarsi malfunzionamenti ad esempio i dati audio registrati in questa unit potr
160. er the data are not erased completely If you want to erase the data completely for security use a commercially sold data erasing software for computer Or format the internal memory or SD card and then record up to the end to clear off the data E Allergies Discontinue use if you experience discomfort with the earphones or any other parts that directly contact your skin e Continued use may cause rashes or other allergic reactions microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD 3C LLC This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and third parties Precautions for listening with the Headphones or Earphones I Do not play your headphones or earphones at a high volume Hearing experts advise against YN continuous extended play a e If you experience a ringing in your ears reduce volume or discontinue use g Do not use while operating a motorized vehicle It may create a traffic hazard and is illegal in many areas Lu You should use extreme caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations e Even if your headphones or earphones are the open air type designed to let you hear outside sounds don t turn up the volume so high that you can t hear what s around you This u
161. ere is less free memory space than the size of the NEXT FILE If the recording mode of the two files is different Editing Copying or moving files Recorded files can be copied or moved between the internal memory and SD card Microphone recording files can be copied or Moved among folders A B C and D Copying file Press to select the copy destination fold d 9 Select COPY in the editing setting screen oi Srana Riess gt Displaying the editing setting screen page 51 Press to select YES and press 2 Press to select the file to be copied gt OK to enter and press gt OK to enter While the file is being copied the status indicator When selecting the file in another folder you can flashes move within folder hierarchies by pressing td For details of file and folder selection methods Moving files see page 13 e When copying files in the LINE LINE SD folder Select MOVE in step O on the left to move files The go to step O operation is the same as that for file copy 3 Press to select the copy destination INTERNAL T MEMORY or microSD MicroSD CARD CARD and press gt OK to enter O If you press F2 CLOSE before copying or moving is complete the process is cancelled O Files in the MUSIC M folder OTHER FOLDER E or recycle bin ll folder cannot be copied or moved When the battery indicator displays CT blinking
162. ernal device I a al Z m o x gt 35 Audio Cable without resistor not supplied a N Insert q securely CT Audio device To audio output To LINE OUT headphone audio out terminal terminal L R Plug type E u 9 3 5 mm stereo v mini plug er Connect with the external device and slide the Mic Line switch to LINE Then the selected line input setting and the line recording mode will appear 3 page 37 Line input setting LINE Qi HIGH LINE DI LOW Line recording mode S t o gt 36 Recording from other devices Press and hold REC 6 for 1 second or more The unit enters the recording standby Blinks 9 Play back the external device and adjust the input output level O If the level meter swings and ME is displayed the volume of the external device is too high Adjust the volume of the external device to the g3 range even if the volume is turned to the maximum To reconfigure the line input settings press MENU and follow steps to O After you finish adjusting the input output level stop the sound source of the other device at the position where you want to start recording Press REC to start recording Play the external device Read the operating instructions for the connected device Disconnecting the audio cord during recording will stop recording O Change the line recor
163. ers Lop ration est identique a la copie d un fichier Fonction corbeille Restaurer des fichiers se trouvant dans la corbeille vers leur dossier d origine Appuyez sur F2 FOLDER O Appuyez sur td PP pour s lectionner TT et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider La corbeille existe dans la m moire interne et dans la carte SD Utilisez K lt gt gt pour s lectionner le fichier que vous souhaitez restaurer et appuyez sur ERASE A BC pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner RESTORE FILE et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider O Appuyez sur pour s lectionner YES et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Le voyant d affichage clignote et le fichier s lectionn est restaur la fin du dossier d origine Appuyez sur gt OK pour retourner l cran de l tape FRAN AIS E A VQT4J81 a N VQT4J81 3 o Fonction corbeille Vider la corbeille Appuyez sur ERASE A BOD Appuyez sur pour s lectionner EMPTY RECYCLE BIN et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Avec la corbeille s lectionn e choisissez EMPTY l tape et appuyez sur gt OK Appuyez sur pour s lectionner YES et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Le voyant d affichage clignote et la corbeille est vid e Utiliser le retardateur Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner COMMON MENU et appuyez sur gt OK p
164. es pulse F2 CLOSE Cuando se pulsa REC se realiza una grabaci n con el ajuste seleccionado Situaci n para la grabaci n Aplicaci n LANG Grabaci n de su propia voz para practicar STUDY gia pronunciaci n etc KARAOKE dell Grabaci n de volumen alto como para un karaoke MUSIC Grabaci n de alta calidad como para una PERF tll actuaci n musical Dx CONVERSATION m Grabaci n de las voces de otras personas Mi para entrevistas reuniones etc MEETING 44 Grabaci n de una banda de sonido amplia mim Para la grabaci n de reuniones etc LECTURE Gel Grabaci n de sonidos como en el caso de una lecci n en una clase etc FAVORITE Puede registrar sus propios ajustes Cambio de los ajustes de situaci n para la grabaci n 1 Pulse MENU durante 1 segundo aproximadamente o m s Pulse para seleccionar la situaci n para la grabaci n y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar CHANGE SETTING y pulse gt OK para confirmar O Pulse para seleccionar el elemento que desea cambiar y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar el ajuste y pulse gt OK para confirmar Repita los pasos 4 y 0 para cambiar otros elementos O Una vez que haya terminado con los ajustes pulse para seleccionar OK y pulse gt OK para confirmar Para seleccionar la situaci n para grabaci n que se ha
165. es de edici n gt izquierda Pulse para seleccionar YES y pulse gt OK para confirmar Mientras el archivo est siendo dividido el indicador de estado parpadear Edici n Combinaci n de archivos Seleccione COMBINE en la pantalla de ajustes de edici n gt izquierda Pulse para seleccionar PREVIOUS FILE y pulse gt OK para confirmar 3 Pulse para seleccionar el archivo que se va a combinar y pulse gt OK para confirmar Cuando seleccione un archivo de otra carpeta puede moverse dentro de las jerarqu as pulsando Mid Para detalles sobre la selecci n de archivos y carpetas acuda a la p gina 4 4 Pulse para seleccionar NEXT FILE y pulse gt OK para confirmar 5 Pulse para seleccionar el archivo que se va a combinar en la parte posterior del archivo anterior y pulse gt OK para confirmar 6 Pulse para seleccionar NEXT y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar YES y pulse gt OK para confirmar Mientras los archivos est n siendo combinados el indicador de estado parpadear Si pulsa F2 CLOSE antes de que haya concluido la combinaci n el proceso de combinaci n se cancela Edici n Copia o movimiento de archivos Copia de archivo Seleccione COPY en la pantalla de ajustes de edici n gt p gina 20 2 Pulse para seleccionar el archivo que se va a co
166. es que se encuentran disponibles en el mercado pero que sean distintas a las anteriores no se garantiza el correcto funcionamiento O Se puede utilizar tambi n una pila alcalina AAA LRO3 no incluida Encendido y apagado de la unidad Encendido de la unidad Deslice el interruptor OPR HOLD hacia ON para activar la alimentaci n A continuaci n se encender el visualizador Apagado de la unidad Deslice el interruptor OPR HOLD en la posici n OFF mientras la unidad est detenida M Desconexi n autom tica La grabadora se apaga autom ticamente una vez transcurrido el tiempo predefinido mientras la grabaci n est detenida el ajuste de f brica es de 15 minutos Si la alimentaci n se apaga por medio de la funci n de apagado autom tico coloque el interruptor OPR HOLD en la posici n OFF antes de encender la alimentaci n p gina 24 Funci n de Bloqueo Las funciones de los botones se ignoran cuando la funci n de bloqueo est activada Para encender la funci n de bloqueo Deslice el interruptor OPR HOLD a la posici n HOLD durante la grabaci n o la reproducci n Para apagar la funci n de bloqueo Deslice el interruptor OPR HOLD a la posici n contraria a HOLD Ajuste del reloj Pulse MENU Pulse para seleccionar COMMON MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar 3 Pulse para seleccionar DATE amp TIME y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para establece
167. ess kK and you can move within hierarchies For details of file and folder selection methods see page 13 Press K lt gt gt to select the playlist and press gt OK to enter Select from PLAYLIST 1 to 5 The file or all files within the folder are registered to the selected playlist ke Symphony Nog m CLOSE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e nn 0 0 e e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 O Playlist files are displayed as PLAYLIST1 M3U to PLAYLIST5 M3U in PLAYLIST folder within MUSIC folder O Do not edit PLAYLIST 1 to 5 M3U on a computer O A maximum of 99 files can be registered to 1 playlist ENGLISH g VQT4J81 Using the playlist function Playing tracks registered to the playlist O Select the playlist from P1 to P5 gt page 12 Press lt gt gt to select the file to play and press gt OK Changing the order of playlist tracks O Select the playlist from P1 to P5 on the list screen gt page 13 Press to select the file ita mM that you want to change EE FLATLISTI MU and press F1 EDIT 3 Press to select CHANGE ORDER and press gt OK to enter ah is added to the left side of the selected file name Press to move CHANGE ORDER dmm the selected file to the ES PLAYLIST Ma desired position and press gt OK to enter The track order is changed HE a MP3 Lp Bluebird MP3 oa MP3 ra MPS 8 E VQT4J81 Cancelling tracks re
168. exico contactar nos atrav s de Caso isto ocorra lave bem a parte afetada com bastante email atencion clientes mx panasonic com agua Caso haja irritac o consulte um m dico Ou atrav s dos telefones 01800 VIP PANA 01800 847 7262 Interior 55 5000 1200 Mexico D F e Area Metropolitana Informac es para Utilizadores referentes a Recolha e Eliminac o de Equipamentos Velhos e Baterias A A Estes simbolos nos produtos embalagens e documentos significam que os produtos el ctricos e electr nicos usados nao podem ser misturados com os residuos urbanos Para o tratamento apropriado recuperac o e reciclagem de produtos velhos e baterias usadas solicitamos que os coloque em pontos de recolha pr prios de acordo com a Legislacao Nacional e com as Directivas Europeias 2002 96 EC e 2006 66 EC A eliminac o correcta deste produto ajudar a poupar recursos valioso e evitar quaisquer potenciais efeitos negativos na sa de humana e no ambiente os quais poderiam resultar de um tratamento incorrecto de Res duos Para mais informacoes sobre a recolha e reciclagem de produtos velhos e baterias por favor contacte as autoridades locais respons veis pela recolha de res duos ou o ponto de venda onde o produto foi adquirido De acordo com a legislacao nacional podem ser apclicadas multas caso seja feita a eliminac o incorrecta destes res duos Para Uitlizadores Nao Particulares da Uni o Europeia Se preten
169. ezionare MIC REC MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare Premere per selezionare MIC SENS quindi premere gt OK per confermare 4 Premere per selezionare HIGH o LOW quindi premere gt OK per confermare L impostazione di fabbrica HIGH Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Riduzione del rumore a bassa frequenza durante la registrazione Premere MENU 2 Premere per selezionare MIC REC MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare LOW CUT FILTER quindi premere gt OK per confermare 4 Premere per selezionare ON quindi premere gt OK per confermare L impostazione di fabbrica OFF Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Impostazione manuale del livello di registrazione Impostazione della regolazione del livello di registrazione su MANUAL Premere MENU 2 Premere per selezionare MIC REC MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare 3 Premere per selezionare REC LEVEL ADJ quindi premere gt OK per confermare 4 Premere per selezionare MANUAL quindi premere gt OK per confermare Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Regolazione manuale del livello di registrazione Tenere premuto REC 6 per pi di 1 secondo Lunita entra
170. fectuada diariamente SELECT A gravag o ou a reprodu o efectuada todas as semanas no dia seleccionado O Pressione para seleccionar o dia e utilize gt OK para adicionar uma marca de verifica o Pressione gt OK novamente para desmarcar a selecc o Q Depois de seleccionar o dia seleccione OK e pressione gt OK jente Detalhes Menu comum defini o Ining TIME Definir a hora de in cio e a hora de fim Funcionamento de defini es comuns Seleccione o item seleccione hora minutos de in cio e O Pressione MENU hora minutos de fim com Hea DI e defina com E possivel definir um periodo de at 12 horas 2 Pressione para seleccionar COMMON MENU entre a hora de inicio e a hora de fim e pressione gt OK para confirmar REC PLAY PLAY Reproduz um ficheiro definido ou o som 3 Pressione para seleccionar o item de ge aame es ai definig o e pressione gt OK para confirmar aay ALARM re 2 eca ai Pressione para alterar a definic o e pressione Reproduz o som de alarme i FILE Reproduz um ficheiro gt OK para confirmar E apresentada a lista de ficheiros da pasta Para sair do ecr de defini o pressione F2 CLOSE seleccionada Pressione para seleccionar o ficheiro e pressione gt OK Quando seleccionar ficheiros alternando entre pastas pressione k e pode deslocar se entre hierarquias Para
171. files on this unit In this case the returned files may not be played back on this unit When playing back after returning files that were once imported to the computer to this unit playback by transferring those files to the MUSIC folder is recommended pages 48 71 File name in the MUSIC folder and order of playback If numbers are added at the beginning of file names in the MUSIC folder playback is performed from the file with the smallest number in priority Up to 3 digits of number can be identified If additional methods differ such as 1 01 001 then 001 to 999 takes the first priority 01 to 99 takes the second and 1 to 9 takes the third priority You can change the order of playback according to your preference by adding numbers at the beginning of file names such as 001musicA MP3 002musicB MP3 The displayed order will also be the same as the playback order For transferring files to the MUSIC folder see page 71 For playback of such files see page 48 Folder structure on this unit Folders A B C D L and M are displayed as MIC_A MIC_B MIC_C MIC_D LINE and MUSIC for the internal memory respectively on the computer or the list screen of this unit The DATA folder is used to store data files Folder hierarchy of this unit DI
172. fnahmeorts Einstellung gew hlt Ort der Aufnahme Anwendung LANG 8 Aufnahme der eigenen Stimme f r STUDY ais Aussprache bungen usw KARAOKE deb Aufnahme bei groBer Lautst rke z B f r am Karaoke MUSIC Aufnahmen von hoher Qualit t wie etwa PERF tll bei Musikauff hrungen CONVERSATION Aufnehmen der Stimmen anderer E Personen f r Interviews oder bei Meetings usw MEETING Wi Nimmt eine gro e Tonbandbreite auf Zum mim Aufnehmen von Meetings usw LECTURE Gel Nimmt Laute wie etwa bei Vortragen in einem H rsaal usw auf FAVORITE Ihre eigenen Einstellungen k nnen Dx festgelegt werden ndern der Einstellungen f r den Aufnahme Ort 1 MENU etwa 1 Sekunde oder l nger gedr ckt halten 2 dr cken um den Aufnahme Ort auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um CHANGE SETTING auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken dr cken um den Punkt der ge ndert werden soll auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 5 dr cken um die Einstellung auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Schritte und zur nderung anderer Punkte wiederholen O Nach Fertigstellung der Einstellungen dr cken um OK auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Zur Auswahl des ge nderten Aufnahmeorts LOAD ausw hlen F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Initiali
173. ginale Premere F2 FOLDER O Premere 44 gt P per selezionare TI quindi premere gt OK per confermare Le cartelle del cestino si trovano rispettivamente nella memoria interna e sulla scheda SD Usare Ht4 gt gt per selezionare il file che si desidera ripristinare quindi premere ERASE A BC per confermare 4 Premere per selezionare RESTORE FILE quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare YES quindi premere gt OK per confermare indicatore di stato lampeggia e il file selezionato viene ripristinato alla fine della cartella originale Premere gt OK per tornare alla schermata del punto e ITALIAN E VQT4J81 N VQT4J81 FS N Funzione cestino Svuotamento della cartella cestino Premere ERASE A B 2 Premere per selezionare EMPTY RECYCLE BIN quindi premere gt OK per confermare Quando selezionata la cartella del cestino selezionare EMPTY al passo 2 e premere gt OK 3 Premere per selezionare YES quindi premere gt OK per confermare Lindicatore di stato lampeggia e la cartella cestino viene svuotata Uso del timer Premere MENU 2 Premere per selezionare COMMON MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare 3 Premere per selezionare TIMER amp ALARM quindi premere gt OK per confermare 4 Impostare voci quali
174. gistered to the playlist Select the playlist from P1 to P5 on the list screen gt page 13 2 Press to select the file that you want to erase and press F1 EDIT Press to select ERASE FILE and press gt OK to enter EDIT PLAYLIST M CHANGE ORDER ER When cancelling all registered tracks Press to select FRASE ALL and press gt OK to enter Press to select YES and press gt OK to enter Even if files are erased from the playlist the original file is not deleted from the unit O If the original file is deleted the playback elapsed time and file total playback time are displayed as is played playback skips to the next file after approx 2 seconds If you have deleted an original file also cancel the track registered to the playlist If this file Editing Dividing files Using the editing settings you can edit files recorded on this unit in a variety of methods Displaying the editing setting screen Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press MENU O Press to select EDIT MENU and press gt OK to enter Press to select the item to edit and press gt OK EDIT MENU im VIDE Press F1 TAB to switch to other setting screens The setting details and change methods differ according to the item For details see the corresponding page To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE
175. glage d usine est 5 RECYCLE BIN Lorsque la fonction corbeille est utilis e les fichiers supprim s sont d plac s vers la corbeille Avant que la corbeille ne soit vid e les fichiers supprim s peuvent tre restaur s de sorte que vous n ayez pas vous inqui ter de supprimer des fichiers par erreur OFF Ne pas utiliser la fonction corbeille ON Utiliser la fonction corbeille Le r glage d usine est ON FORMAT Tous les fichiers de la m moire interne ou de la carte SD sont supprim s Il n est pas possible de r cup rer les fichiers supprim s O S lectionnez INTERNAL MEMORY ou microSD CARD et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider S lectionnez YES et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider INIT MENU Si les param tres de l appareil sont r initialis s tous les r glages except s DATE amp TIME sont restaur s aux valeurs par d faut S lectionnez YES appuyez sur gt OK pour valider et les param tres seront r initialis s VERSION Vous pouvez contr ler la version du microprogramme de cet appareil Configuration syst me requise partir de mai 2012 Ordinateur Ordinateurs compatibles IBM PC AT Macintosh e Microsoft Windows XP Edition Familiale Professionnel et Service Pack 2 Service Pack 3 Microsoft Windows Vista Edition Familiale Basique Edition Familiale Premium Syst me Professionnel dition Int
176. he unit remembers the last file played and the stop position for each folder ENGLISH SA voT 4381 N VQT4J81 18 Playing Checking information You can check the file information or current time e Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit 1 Press STOP W RETURN The information screen a CUR DATE amp TIME appears 712 127 1 16 00 20 REMAIN REC TIME dda 2 Move the information screen up or down using or The following contents can be confirmed on the information screen Current time Current time Remaining recording time Possible remaining Possible recording time recording time in the recording mode currently being set Recording date and time Date and time when the selected file was recorded Total playback time Length of the selected file File format Format of the selected file This is not displayed for the M MUSIC folder or OTHER FOLDER J To exit the information screen Press STOP W RETURN Listening to the audio using earphones Connect stereo earphones not supplied Plug type 9 3 5 mm stereo mini plug Recommended additional earphones Panasonic RP HV154 RP HJE120 the product number is correct as of May 2012 Monitoring the recording in progress Adjusting the volume You can adjust the volume by pressing but the recording level gt page 27 is not affected Built in speaker Listening to the audio during playback The
177. heiten SETTING OFF Timer ist nicht aktiviert ON Timer ist aktiviert REPEAT ONCE Aufnahme oder Wiedergabe wird nur einmal durchgef hrt DAILY Aufnahme oder Wiedergabe wird t glich durchgef hrt SELECT Aufnahme oder Wiedergabe wird w chentlich am ausgew hlten Tag durchgef hrt O dr cken um den Tag auszuw hlen und gt OK benutzen um eine Markierung hinzuzuf gen I gt OK zur Aufhebung der Auswahl dr cken Wenn der Tag ausgew hlt ist OK w hlen und gt OK dr cken Einstellpunkt Einzelheiten Al l ge me i nes M en TIME Start und Endzeit einstellen A Auswahl des Punktes Auswahl der Startstunde Gemeinsame Einstellungsbetriebe minuten die Endstunde minuten unter LI Benutzung von H gt gt und Einstellung unter 11 MENU dr cken Benutzung von dr cken um COMMON MENU auszuw hlen e F r den Zeitraum zwischen Anfang und Ende I k nnen bis zu 12 Stunden festgelegt werden o a zur an al hl 2 REC PLAY PLAY Spielt eine eingestellte Datei oder spielt dr cken um den Einstellpunkt auszuw hlen F den Alarmton und OK zur Eingabe dr cken gt REC Nimmt die eingestellte Tonquelle auf dr cken um die Einstellung zu ndern und LU PLAY ALARM Spielt den Alarmton gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken a FILE Sorgt f r das Abspielen einer Datei x a x Die Dateiliste des ausgewahl
178. hour minute second and press to change the values Press gt OK Playback starts from the specified position Press F2 CLOSE to stop the setting 5 process midway Se 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e e 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 000 O Time search playback applies only to the currently selected file B Slight return playback This function returns a short amount of time during playback to enable you to listen again It is a useful function for language learning or if you miss hearing something O Press gt OK during playback Each time the button is pressed playback rewinds by approx 3 seconds factory setting Setting the return time Put the unit into the stopped state or playback state Press MENU When playback is in progress go to step Press to select PLAY MENU and press gt OK to enter 3 Press to select SLIGHT RETURN and press gt OK to enter Press to select the number of seconds 1 to 5 and press gt OK to enter Esec The factory setting is 3 sec o cc To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE SLIGHT RETURN M Repeat play REPEAT Put the unit into the stopped state or playback state Press MENU When playback is in progress go to step O O Press to select PLAY MENU and press gt OK to enter Press to select REPEAT and press gt OK to enter
179. hren um versehentliches Verschlucken zu verhindern ACHTUNG Bei Austausch gegen einen ungeeigneten Ersatzakku besteht Explosionsgefahr Den Originalakku ausschlie lich gegen einen Akku des vom Hersteller vorgeschriebenen Typs austauschen Beim Entsorgen verbrauchter Akkus die einschl gigen Umweltschutzbestimmungen einhalten ber die Ausk nfte von der zust ndigen Beh rde oder dem Fachh ndler erh ltlich sind Keiner Hitze aussetzen oder in die N he von offenen Flammen bringen Lassen Sie die Batterien niemals f r l ngere Zeit in einem Fahrzeug liegen das direktem Sonnenlicht ausgesetzt ist und dessen T ren und Fenster geschlossen sind Kopfh rer oder Ohrh rer zu verwenden Gem EN 50332 2 2003 1 Maximale Ausgangsspannung Kopfh rerausgang s 150mV 2 Charakteristische Breitbandspannung Kopfh rer 2 75mV Benutzerinformation zur Sammlung und Entsorgung von veralteten Ger ten und benutzten Batterien A A Diese Symbole auf den Produkten Verpackungen und oder Begleitdokumenten bedeuten dass benutzte elektrische und elektronische Produkte und Batterien nicht in den allgemeinen Hausmull gegeben werden sollen Bitte bringen Sie diese alten Produkte und Batterien zur Behandlung Aufarbeitung bzw zum Recycling gem Ihrer Landesgesetzgebung und den Richtlinien 2002 96 EG und 2006 66 EG zu Ihren zust ndigen Sammelpunkten Indem Sie diese Produkte und Batterien ordnungsgem entsorgen helfen
180. iar a gravac o PORTUGUES VQT4J81 a 5 VQT4J81 216 Gravar a partir de outros dispositivos 1 Faga deslizar o interruptor Mic Line para LINE O Pressione MENU 3 Pressione para seleccionar LINE REC e pressione gt OK para confirmar 4 Pressione para seleccionar LINE INPUT e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar a defini o e pressione gt OK para confirmar Quando ligar a unidade ao terminal de auscultadores de um dispositivo externo ou ao terminal de saida de linha de um dispositivo port til seleccione HIGH ou LOW respectivamente A programag o de f brica HIGH Q Pressione F2 CLOSE Q Ligue o dispositivo externo Ligue a unidade ao dispositivo externo e fa a deslizar o interruptor Mic Line para LINE Em seguida aparecem a defini o de entrada de linha seleccionada e o modo de grava o de linha 8 Pressione e mantenha pressionado REC durante 1 ou mais segundos A unidade entra em espera da gravac o 9 Coloque em reprodu o o dispositivo externo e ajuste o n vel de entrada sa da Se o medidor de nivel oscilar e aparecer a indica o isso significa que o volume do dispositivo externo est demasiado alto Ajuste o volume do dispositivo externo para a gama HH mesmo que o volume seja regulado para o m ximo Para configurar novamente as defini es de entrada de linha
181. ich Annuler le rep re d un dossier Le r glage peut tre annul en utilisant l une des m thodes suivantes e Appuyez nouveau sur F2 C CUE Dans ce cas les fichiers peuvent tre ignor s avec Kd PPI Appuyez sur gt OK Appuyez sur STOP li RETURN La lecture est termin e Utiliser la fonction de liste de lecture Enregistrer vos piste favorites dans une liste de lecture S lectionnez le dossier MUSIC M dans l cran de liste gt page 4 Vous pouvez aussi s lectionner OTHER FOLDER CD 2 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le fichier ou le dossier et appuyez sur F1 PLAYLIST pour valider Lors de la s lection de dossiers ou de fichiers en changeant de dossier appuyez sur 44 et vous pourrez vous d placer au sein des hi rarchies Pour des d tails relatifs aux m thodes de s lection des fichiers et des dossiers voir la page 4 Appuyez sur 44 gt gt pour s lectionner la liste de lecture et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider S lectionnez entre PLAYLIST 1 5 Le fichier ou tous les fichiers contenus dans le dossier sont enregistr s dans la liste de lecture s lectionn e Lire des pistes enregistr es dans la liste de lecture S lectionnez la liste de lecture de P1 a P5 page 4 O Appuyez sur H gt gt pour s lectionner le fichier lire et appuyez sur gt OK Modifier l ordre des pistes d une liste de lecture S lectionnez la liste d
182. ickly move to a position for playback or repeat playback of the same portion in a file Skip at regular intervals O Press gt OK for approx 1 second or more during playback The mode switches to time skip mode and WB is displayed The skip mode switches each time the st button is pressed 121003 123340 MP3 124 E Press i lt gt gt Each time the button is pressed 5 seconds are skipped factory setting When playback is stopped the mode returns to the file skip mode NO To change the skip interval e Put the unit into the stopped state or playback state Press MENU When playback is in progress go to step O 2 Press to select PLAY MENU and press gt OK to enter 3 Press to select TIME SKIP and press gt OK to enter Press to TIME SKIP select the time EE and press gt OK to enter o You can set the skip interval to 5 sec 10 sec 30 sec 1 min 5 min 10 min or 15 min The factory setting is 5sec To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e 0 e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 0 0 e e 0 0 0 0 0 06 If the beginning of a file or the index point is present at the position closer than the set skip interval the playback skips to such a position MENU Shadowing Shadowing is a learning method to repeat an example immediately after it is
183. idade normal 100 e em varia es de 5 para velocidades inferiores velocidade normal Indicac o de estado durante a reproduc o A velocidade de reprodu o normal a reproduc o mais r pida e a reproduc o mais lenta s o apresentadas como gt D ep respectivamente Reproduc o com repetic o de A B Pressione ERASE A BC durante a reprodu o O ponto de inicio A fica definido e aparecem as indicag es EX EX com luz fixa e E a piscar Pressione ERASE A BC no ponto de fim B O visor muda para FIST aceso e a reprodu o repetitiva comeca Cancelar a repetic o de A B Pressione ERASE A B D 44 gt gt ou STOP II RETURNI PORTUGUES E N g VQT4J81 q S t o gt 218 Reprodu o a partir de uma posi o especificada TIME SEARCH Pressione MENU Quando a reproduc o estiver a decorrer avance para o passo Pressione para seleccionar PLAY MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar TIME SEARCH e pressione gt OK para confirmar Ajuste a posic o inicial de reprodug o Mude o valor de TIME para ajustar a posi o inicial Pressione k lt gt gt para seleccionar 00 00 00 horas minutos segundos e pressione para alterar os valores GB Pressione gt OK A reprodu o come a a partir da posi o especificada Pressione F2 CLOSE para parar o processo de defi
184. ide the OPR HOLD switch in the opposite direction of HOLD Ho CED When the Hold function is on operation is ignored even if the buttons are pressed while the power is on HOLD ON is displayed enabling you to prevent unintended operations such as the stopping of recording or playback When recording or playback finishes while the Hold function is on the power turns off automatically Setting the clock The clock has not been set at the time of purchase The clock is used as a file name gt page 67 or to preserve recording date and time information Set the correct date and time If the power is turned on when the clock is not set the screen shown in step is displayed Turn the power on page 9 Press MENU O Press to select COMMON MENU and press gt OK to enter 3 Press to select DATE amp TIME and press gt OK to enter Press to set o the year and press at MOUEYSELECT OK SET o cc The above illustration is a display example O Press to set the month and press PPI O Press to set the date and press gt gt Press to set the clock indication method and press PPI F and WET are displayed for the 24 hour display and the 12 hour display respectively 8 Press to set the hour and press Press to set the minute To change the setting press td PP to move between the items and then pres
185. igar o dispositivo AUTO POWER OFF 0 min OFF a 15 min A programac o de f brica 15min BACKLIGHT Defina o tempo de retroiluminac o quando pressiona o bot o Tempo de iluminag o OFF n o acende 5 seg 15 seg sempre acesa ON A programac o de f brica 15 sec CONTRAST Utilize esta fun o para ajustar o contraste do ecr Pode escolher entre 10 n veis para o ajuste Ajuste de contraste 1 L a 10 H A programa o de f brica 5 RECYCLE BIN Quando a fung o de reciclagem utilizada os ficheiros eliminados s o movidos para a reciclagem Antes de esvaziar a reciclagem poss vel repor ficheiros eliminados para n o ter de se preocupar com ficheiros eliminados por engano OFF N o utilizar a fung o de reciclagem ON Utilizar a fung o de reciclagem A programac o de f brica ON FORMAT Todos os ficheiros guardados na mem ria interna ou no cart o s o apagados Os ficheiros apagados n o podem ser recuperados O Seleccione INTERNAL MEMORY ou microSD CARD e pressione OK para confirmar Seleccione YES e pressione gt OK para confirmar INIT MENU Se as defini es desta unidade forem inicializadas todas as definicdes com excepc o da definic o DATE amp TIME sao restauradas para o estado padr o Seleccione YES pressione gt OK para confirmar e as defini es s o inicializadas
186. il file quindi premere gt OK per confermare Ha inizio la riproduzione del file Cambiamento della posizione del microfono Posizione del microfono Utilizzi raccomandati STEREO Funziona come un normale microfono stereo Adatto per registrare eventi come riunioni o esibizioni con un gran numero di persone ZOOM Consente di registrare con una resa ottimale dell audio frontale Adatto per registrare eventi come una lezione o un intervista dove l audio proviene da una specifica direzione Registrazione Controllo delle informazioni Premere F2 FOLDER Premere STOP W RETURN Viene visualizzata la schermata delle informazioni Premere I44 gt gt per selezionare la cartella di Spostare in alto o in basso la schermata delle destinazione della registrazione quindi premere informazioni premendo il tasto o gt OK per confermare Per la registrazione microfonica selezionare una delle cartelle Per uscire dalla schermata informativa A B C e D L impostazione di fabbrica A premere STOP W RETURN O Premere REC inizia la registrazione Premere STOP W RETURN per arrestare la H ali an Ascolto dell audio utilizzando Per mettere in pausa la registrazione le cuffie Premere REC 6 durante la registrazione Collegare gli auricolari stereo non in dotazione Lindicatore di registrazione lampeggia Tipo di spina
187. imadamente o m s Vaya al paso si ha introducido una tarjeta SD o al paso en caso conatrario Pulse para seleccionar INT MEMORY memoria interna o microSD CARD y pulse F1 SEARCH 3 Pulse para seleccionar el tipo de b squeda de archivo y pulse gt OK para confirmar in memoria interna o ir tarjeta SD se muestran como destino para la b squeda Cuando se selecciona CALENDAR SRCH Pulse d P gt para seleccionar la fecha de grabaci n y pulse gt OK para confirmar Cuando se selecciona DAY OF WEEK Pulse para seleccionar el dia de la semana y pulse gt OK para confirmar Solo se puede seleccionar un dia de la semana 4 Pulse para seleccionar el archivo y pulse gt OK para confirmar Escuchar musica en esta unidad archivos de musica WMA MP3 Seleccionar un archivo de la carpeta M Seleccione el archivo y pulse gt OK Funcion de referencia de carpeta Pulse F2 C1 CUE durante la reproducci n Se muestra FOLDER SKIP que cambia a la pantalla de referencia de carpeta rl O Pulse t4 gt gt cuando se muestre EI Cancelaci n de la referencia de carpeta El ajuste puede cancelarse utilizando cualquiera de los siguientes m todos Pulse F2 CT CUE de nuevo Cuando esto se cancela los archivos se pueden omitir utilizando Hd PP Pulse gt OK Pulse STOP W RETURN Reproducci n termina
188. ing AUTO When using the internal memory 2 When audio is output from speaker Volume 11 Playback speed control 100 Recording mode Rec Play Recording mode Recording time Bit rate PCM 44 1kHz Stereo approx 17 h 30 min approx 10 h PCM 44 1kHz Stereo approx 6h 1411 kbps MP3 320kbps Stereo approx 20 h 30 min approx 10 h 30 min MP3 320kbps Stereo approx 27 h 320 kbps MP3 192kbps Stereo approx 20 h 30 min approx 10 h 30 min MP3 192kbps Stereo approx 45 h 192 kbps MP3 128kbps Stereo approx 21 h approx 10 h 30 min MP3 128kbps Stereo approx 68 h 128 kbps MP3 64kbps Stereo approx 25 h approx 11 h MP3 64kbps Stereo approx 136 h 64 kbps MP3 32kbps Monaural approx 27 h 30 min approx 11 h MP3 32kbps Monaural approx 272 h 32 kbps When the Panasonic alkaline AAA LR03 battery is used RR XS420 When using the internal memory 2 GB Recording mode Rec Play Recording mode Recording time Bit rate PCM 44 1kHz Stereo approx 25 h approx 19 h PCM 44 1kHz Stereo approx 3h 1411 kbps MP3 320kbps Stereo approx 30 h approx 20 h 30 min MP3 320kbps Stereo approx 13h 320 kbps MP3 192kbps Stereo approx 30 h approx 20 h 30 min MP3 192kbps Stereo approx 22h 192 kbps MP3 128kbps Stereo approx 31 h approx 20 h 30 min MP3 128kbps Stereo approx 33h 30min 128 kbps MP3 64kbps Stereo approx 36 h 30 min approx 21 h 3
189. isplay the screen current folder shown in step o g VQT4J81 Switching microphone position You can switch the microphone position to ZOOM to record with the sound in front of you emphasised Switch the microphone position depending on the use STEREO Microphone position Recommended uses STEREO 27 Ne Suitable for recording events such as a meeting or ai A performance by a large number of people Operates as an ordinary stereo microphone ZOOM x Suitable for recording events such as a lecture or A interview where sound is emitted from a specific z direction Records with the sound in front of you emphasised le The indication changes depending on the microphone position 3 0 This unit has recording scenes gt page 20 for which the recommended recording settings are registered for each use and switching the microphone position also changes the recording scene Direct scene page 23 Do not switch the microphone position during recording The intended recording characteristics will not be obtained The microphone position function operates when the built in microphone is used It does not operate when an external microphone is connected for recording gt page 33 or when a different device is connected for recording to this unit gt page 35 vaT4 Recording STOP W RETURN F2 REC O Press Ht4 PP e Turn the power on gt page 9
190. istribution de cette technologie en dehors de ce produit est interdite sans licence de Microsoft ou d un affili de Microsoft et de tiers Ce produit peut tre perturb par les ondes des t l phones mobiles pendant Putilisation Si vous constatez une telle interf rence loignez le t l phone mobile du produit Conservez les piles AAA LRO3 et les piles rechargeables hors de la port e des enfants afin qu ils ne puissent pas les avaler ATTENTION Danger d explosion si la batterie est remplac e de mani re incorrecte Remplacez la uniquement par le type recommand par le fabricant Avant de jeter les batteries veuillez contacter l autorit locale comp tente ou le revendeur pour conna tre la m thode ad quate de le faire Ne placez pas les batteries pr s d une source de chaleur ou dans un feu Ne laissez pas la ou les batterie dans un v hicule expos aux rayons du soleil pendant une p riode prolong e avec les portes et vitres ferm es Veillez a utiliser le casque ou les couteurs fournis avec l appareil ou recommand s Selon EN 50332 2 2003 1 Tension de sortie maximum sortie oreillette 150mV 2 Tension caract ristique de la bande large oreillettes 75mV Avis aux utilisateurs concernant la collecte et limination des piles et des appareils lectriques et lectroniques usag s A A Appos sur le produit lui m me sur son emballage ou figuran
191. izer a unidade pode ficar danificada Faca deslizar o interruptor OPR HOLD para o lado ON Fa a deslizar o interruptor OPR HOLD para o lado OFF O indicador de estado acende e o carregamento iniciado O Durante o carregamento fazer deslizar o interruptor OPR HOLD para o lado ligado ON pode cancelar o carregamento a meio Quando o indicador de estado se apagar o carregamento est conclu do H Desligar a unidade do computador Clique duas vezes no icone Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 no tabuleiro de tarefas na parte inferior do ecr do computador e siga as instru es que aparecem no ecr para remover a unidade Dependendo das defini es do SO o cone pode n o aparecer Depois de ser removida a unidade desliga se 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e e e 0 0 0 e e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 O Quando pretender utilizar uma pilha recarreg vel utilize a pilha recarreg vel inclu da ou a pilha recarreg vel opcional Se forem utilizadas pilhas disponiveis no mercado que n o sejam as mencionadas acima o funcionamento n o garantido O Tamb m poss vel utilizar uma pilha alcalina AAA LRO3 n o inclu da Ligar desligar o aparelho Ligar o aparelho Faca deslizar o interruptor OPR HOLD para o lado ON para ligar o aparelho Depois acender se o visor Desligar o aparelho Faca deslizar o interruptor OPR HOLD para o lado desligado OFF enquanto a unidade estiver no estado de p
192. la data e l ora e la fonte sonora Premere per selezionare la voce quindi premere gt OK per confermare Q Premere d bi per selezionare l impostazione quindi premere gt OK per confermare Ripetere i punti e Q per completare le impostazioni Premere per selezionare OK quindi premere gt OK per confermare Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE voce ci Dettagli impostazione SETTING OFF Timer non in funzione ON Timer in funzione REPEAT ONCE La registrazione o la riproduzione viene eseguita solo una volta DAILY La registrazione o la riproduzione viene eseguita giornalmente SELECT La registrazione o la riproduzione viene eseguita ogni settimana nel giorno selezionato Premere per selezionare il giorno quindi premere gt OK per aggiungere un segno di spunta Premere nuovamente gt OK per deselezionare la selezione Dopo aver selezionato il giorno selezionare OK e premere gt OK Voce di Dettagli Menu comune impostazione TR i oo TIME Imposta Pora di inizio e di fine Operazioni sulle impostazioni comuni Selezionare la voce selezionare l ora e i minuti Premere MEN di inizio e lora e i minuti di fine tramite Ht4 bb O ul quindi impostare premendo f 2 Premere per selezionare COMMON MENU E possibile impostare fino a 12 ore per l intervallo quindi premere gt
193. lage d usine Pour choisir la sc ne d enregistrement initiale s lectionnez LOAD Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE Sc ne en direct Cette fonction permet de changer la sc ne d enregistrement d finie selon la position du microphone O Lors de l achat MEETING est r gl sur STEREO et LECTURE est r gl sur ZOOM Changer le r glage de sc ne en direct Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner MIC REC MENU puis appuyez sur gt OK Appuyez sur pour s lectionner DIRECT SCENE puis appuyez sur gt OK 4 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner la position du microphone STEREO ou ZOOM puis appuyez sur gt OK O Appuyez sur pour s lectionner la sc ne d enregistrement puis appuyez sur gt OK Si vous voulez changer la sc ne d enregistrement pour l autre position du microphone effectuez les tapes 4 et 6 pour r gler la sc ne d enregistrement Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE FRAN AIS M VQT4J81 155 3 a VQT4J81 Sc ne en direct Fonction sc ne en direct sur OFF Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner MIC REC MENU puis appuyez sur gt OK Appuyez sur pour s lectionner DIRECT SCENE puis appuyez sur gt OK Appuyez sur pour s lectionner SETTING puis appuyez sur gt OK
194. le a cui sono stati aggiunti indici Eliminazione di indici Premere ERASE A BC 2 Premere per selezionare INDEX quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare YES quindi premere gt OK per confermare Variazione della velocit di riproduzione 1 Premere F1 SPEED durante la riproduzione Premere F1 SLOW o F2 FAST per selezionare la velocit quindi premere gt OK per confermare Velocit di riproduzione La velocit di riproduzione pu essere regolata in incrementi del 10 per le velocit superiori a quella normale 100 e in decrementi del 5 per le velocit inferiori a quella normale Indicazione di stato durante la riproduzione Le velocit di riproduzione normale pi veloce e pi lenta sono visualizzate rispettivamente come gt yy e Ripetizione A B Premere ERASE A BC durante la riproduzione Viene impostato il punto d inizio A e vengono visualizzati ER EX illuminati e E lampeggiante O Premere ERASE A BC nel punto finale B L indicazione cambia in EEx illuminato e viene avviata la ripetizione della riproduzione Cancellazione della ripetizione A B Premere ERASE A BOD 4 bi 0 STOP IV RETURN ITALIANO E a g VQT4J81 o Riproduzione a partire da un posizione specifica TIME SEARCH Premere MENU mentre in corso la riproduzione andare al punto 2 Pre
195. len 2 dr cken um die Datei die kopiert werden soll auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken e Wenn die Datei in einem anderen Ordner ausgew hlt wird kann sie durch Dr cken von 4 innerhalb der Ordnerhierarchie verschoben werden Einzelheiten hinsichtlich der Datei und Ordnerauswahlmethoden sind auf Seite 4 zu finden Beim Kopieren von Dateien in den LINE LINE_SD Ordner zu Schritt E gehen dr cken um den Kopie Zielspeicher INTERNAL MEMORY oder microSD CARD auszuw hlen und zur Eingabe OK dr cken dr cken um den Kopier Zielordner auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um YES auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken W hrend die Datei kopiert wird blinkt die Statusanzeige Verschieben von Dateien MOVE unter Schritt 0 links ausw hlen um die Daten zu verschieben Das Vorgehen ist das gleiche wie beim Kopieren einer Datei Papierkorbfunktion Zur ckbewegen von Dateien aus dem Papierkorb zum urspr nglichen Ordner O Dr cken von F2 FOLDER O Ht4 PA dr cken um II auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Der Papierkorb Ordner ist im internen Speicher bzw der SD Karte vorhanden M gt P benutzen um die Datei die zur ckgef hrt werden soll auszuw hlen und ERASE A BC zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um RESTORE FILE auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken
196. lic Pour retirer la carte SD teignez l appareil et ouvrez le couvercle de la pile carte SD 2 Appuyez doucement sur la carte SD Lorsque la carte SD d passe l g rement tirez la doucement hors de la fente 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0000000 O Vous pouvez passer de la m moire interne la carte SD et inversement en maintenant F2 FOLDER en appuy pendant au moins 1 seconde lorsque l cran d arr t est affich O Cet appareil est compatible avec les cartes microSD de 2 Go et les cartes microSDHC de 4 Go 32 Go partir de mai 2012 Cet appareil peut ne pas fonctionner correctement selon le fabricant ou le type de carte SD Pour avoir des d tails sur les cartes SD dont le bon fonctionnement a t confirm conform ment nos standards de fabrication consultez la page d assistance ci dessous http panasonic net support Si une carte SD est ins r e mais que microSD n est pas affich l cran SELECT FOLDER etc la carte SD n est pas reconnue par cet appareil Conservez la carte m moire hors de port e des enfants afin qu ils ne puissent pas l avaler Utiliser la fonction de recherche de fichier H Types de recherche de fichier CALENDAR SRCH Les fichiers enregistr s sont tri s par date et affich s sous forme de liste DAY OF WEEK Les fichiers enregistr s sont tri s par jour de la semaine et affich s sous forme de liste RECENT R
197. limiter 28 Self timer recording OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 30 VAS setting OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 31 Past Recording OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Preset an appropriate recording level to enable recordings with superior sound For details see Setting the recording level manually pages 27 and 28 ENGLISH fi N A VQT4J81 8 N VQT4J81 Selecting the recording scene Changing recording scene settings The setting details of each recording scene can be changed according to preference Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit O Press MENU for approx 1 second or more Press to select the recording scene and press gt OK to enter Press to select CHANGE SETTING and press gt OK to enter SCENE SELECT mM MEETING esa Assat SCENE SELECT dini EMEETING 2 D INITIALIZE 4 Press to select the item you want to change and press gt OK to enter Press to select the setting and press gt OK to enter Repeat steps and to change other items When you have completed the settings press to select OK and press gt OK to enter MEETING ami i REC MODE 192kbps MIC SENS HIGH REC LEVEL AUTO LOW CUT FILT 0N To select the changed recording scene select LOAD page 20 To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE Initialising recording scene settings Returns indi
198. lizar a func o de lista de reproduc o Cancelar faixas registadas na lista de reproduc o Seleccione a lista de reprodu o de P1 a P5 no ecr de lista gt p gina 4 2 Pressione para seleccionar o ficheiro que pretende apagar e pressione F1 EDIT 3 Pressione para seleccionar ERASE FILE e pressione gt OK para confirmar Quando pretender cancelar todas as faixas registadas Pressione para seleccionar ERASE ALL e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar YES e pressione gt OK para confirmar Editar Dividir ficheiros Aceder ao ecr de definic es de edic o Pressione MENU 2 Pressione para seleccionar EDIT MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar o item que pretende editar e pressione gt OK Pressione F1 TAB para mudar para outros ecr s de definic o Os detalhes de definig o e os m todos de alterac o variam consoante o item Para mais informa es consulte a p gina correspondente Para sair do ecr de definic o pressione F2 CLOSE Dividir ficheiros Durante a reprodu o pressione STOP WRETURN no ponto onde pretende dividir o ficheiro Seleccione DIVIDE no ecr de defini es de edic o esquerda 3 Pressione para seleccionar YES e pressione gt OK para confirmar Enquanto o ficheiro est a ser dividido
199. ll auf dr cken um die Lautst rke einzustellen 6 dB Wenn die Einstellungen f r das zu ndernde Frequenzband abgeschlossen sind fortfahren mit Schritt O P OK zur Eingabe dr cken F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen EQ Modus Wirkung und Anwendung FLAT Die Tonequalizer Funktion wird nicht verwendet Der Originalton ohne Ver nderung wird geh rt BASS Verst rkt den Bassbereich sehr stark CLEAR Verst rkt den Hochtonbereich sehr stark HEAVY Verst rkt den Bass und den Hochtonbereich leicht SOFT Verst rkt den Mittelbereich Reduziert Ger usche um menschliche Stimmen VOICE as besser h rbar zu machen USER Dieser Modus erm glicht die Anpassung der Frequenzb nder von 150 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 4 kHz und 12 kHz Die Werkseinstellung ist FLAT DEUTSCH f VQT4J81 N 109 AB VQT4J81 o Benutzung einer SD Karte Einsetzen der SD Karte Das Ger t ausschalten und die Abdeckung des Batteriefachs SD Kartensteckplatzes ffnen 2 Die SD Karte einstecken und die Abdeckung des Batteriefachs SD Kartensteckplatzes schlieBen Die Karte in die korrekte Richtung 4 ausrichten und sie vollst ndig einsetzen bis ein Klick Ton zu h ren ist Zum Entfernen der SD Karte Das Ger t ausschalten und die Abdeckung des Batteriefachs SD Kartensteckplatzes ffnen Die SD Karte vorsichtig schieben Wenn
200. m seleccionar OTHER FOLDER k 2 Pressione para seleccionar o ficheiro ou a pasta e pressione F1 PLAYLIST para confirmar Quando seleccionar pastas ou seleccionar ficheiros alternando entre pastas pressione K e pode deslocar se entre hierarquias Para mais informag es sobre m todos de selec o de ficheiros e pastas consulte a p gina 4 Pressione 4 lt gt gt para seleccionar a lista de reproduc o e pressione gt OK para confirmar Seleccione uma op o de PLAYLIST 1 a 5 O ficheiro ou todos os ficheiros contidos na pasta s o registados na lista de reprodu o seleccionada Reproduzir faixas registadas na lista de reproduc o Seleccione a lista de reproduc o de P1 a P5 p gina 4 E 2 Pressione Ht4 gt gt para seleccionar o ficheiro que O pretende reproduzir e pressione gt OK Alterar a ordem das faixas incluidas numa lista de reproduc o 5 Seleccione a lista de reprodug o de P1 a P5 no ecra de lista pagina 4 2 Pressione para seleccionar o ficheiro que pretende alterar e pressione F1 EDIT Pressione para seleccionar CHANGE ORDER e pressione gt OK para confirmar np acrescentado no lado esquerdo do nome de ficheiro seleccionado O Pressione para mover o ficheiro seleccionado para a posic o pretendida e pressione gt OK para confirmar A ordem das faixas alterada N g VQT4J81 ao 5 VQT4J81 224 Uti
201. mais informa es sobre m todos de selec o de ficheiros e pastas consulte a p gina 4 BEEP SOUND Para mais informa es sobre DATE amp TIME gt pagina 3 e TIMER 8 ALARM gt pagina 22 consulte as respectivas p ginas SOURCE MIC Gravag o de microfone LINE Grava som proveniente de um dispositivo Pode definir se o som do funcionamento dos bot es OFF Sem som de funcionamento PORTUGU S F externo ON Som de funcionamento activado ON MODE PCM 44 1 kHz MP3 320 kbps MP3 192 kbps A programa o de f brica ON MP3 128 kbps MP3 64 kbps MP3 32 kbps E A RECTO Seleccione a pasta na qual pretende guardar o REC LED Indicador de gravac o ficheiro gravado Pode seleccionar se pretende acender ON ou apagar OFF a Se seleccionar uma pasta no cart o SD luz do indicador de gravac o introduza o cart o SD OFF Apagado ON Aceso A programac o de f brica ON 8 VQT4J81 227 e VQT4J81 228 Menu comum BATT SETTING Defina 0 tipo de pilhas utilizadas pilhas de niquel metal hidrico recarregaveis ou pilhas alcalinas Tipo de pilha RECHARGEABLE ALKALINE A programac o de f brica RECHARGEABLE AUTO POWER OFF Esta fun o desliga automaticamente a alimentac o se nao houver funcionamento durante um determinado per odo de tempo como quando a gravac o parada Esta fun o ajuda na poupanga de energia quando se esquecer de desl
202. mere per selezionare PLAY MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare Premere per selezionare TIME SEARCH quindi premere gt OK per confermare Impostare la posizione di avvio riproduzione Modificare il valore di TIME per impostare la posizione di avvio Premere H PP per selezionare 00 00 00 ora minuti secondi quindi premere per modificare i valori O Premere gt OK La riproduzione parte dalla posizione specificata Premere F2 CLOSE per arrestare l impostazione in corso Riproduzione leggermente all indietro Premere gt OK durante la riproduzione Ogni volta che si preme il tasto la riproduzione viene riavvolta di circa 3 secondi impostazione di fabbrica Impostazione del tempo di ritorno Premere MENU mentre in corso la riproduzione andare al punto O 2 Premere per selezionare PLAY MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare 3 Premere per selezionare SLIGHT RETURN quindi premere gt OK per confermare 4 Premere per selezionare il numero di secondi da 1 a 5 quindi premere gt OK per confermare L impostazione di fabbrica 3 sec Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Riproduzione con ripetizione REPEAT Premere MENU mentre in corso la riproduzione andare al punto 2 Premere per selezionare PLAY MENU
203. minuir o volume Pressione Opera es durante a reprodu o Saltar Omitir Pressione 44 bb Avango Retrocesso rapido Procura Mantenha pressionado 44 Db Parar Pressione STOP W RETURN Verificar a informa o Pressione STOP WRETURN Aparece o ecr de informa o 2 Desloque o ecr de informac o para cima ou para baixo com ou Sair do ecr de informac o Pressione STOP W RETURN Ouvir o som utilizando auriculares Ligue os auriculares est reo n o incluidos Tipo de ficha Minificha est reo com um de 3 5 mm Auriculares adicionais recomendados Panasonic RP HV154 RP HJE120 data de Maio de 2012 Controlar a evolu o da gravac o Regular o volume Pode regular o volume pressionando mas o nivel de som da gravac o n o afectado Ouvir o som durante a reproduc o Altifalante incorporado Durante a reproduc o o som emitido pelo altifalante Em locais barulhentos a audi o pode ser dif cil devido saida do altifalante Se isso acontecer ligue uns auriculares est reo n o inclu dos Introduza firmemente PORTUGU S E VQT4J81 209 A VQT4J81 210 Eliminar ficheiros Pressione ERASE A BC Pressione para seleccionar FILE e pressione gt OK para confirmar 3 Pressione para seleccionar YES e pressione gt OK para confirmar Durante a eliminag o o indicador de est
204. n es realizada en sucesi n desde el archivo seleccionado hasta el ltimo archivo de la carpeta y luego se detiene ONE Reproduce un archivo repetidamente FOLDER REPEAT Reproduce todos los archivos de la carpeta repetidamente FOLDER RANDOM Reproduce todos los archivos de la carpeta en orden aleatorio ALL REPEAT Para la carpeta MUSIC M o la carpeta OTHER FOLDER E se reproducir n repetidamente todos los archivos de la carpeta Para otras carpetas la operaci n es la misma que FOLDER REPEAT ALL RANDOM Para la carpeta MUSIC M o la carpeta OTHER FOLDER E se reproducir n repetidamente todos los archivos de la carpeta en orden aleatorio Para otras carpetas la operaci n es la misma que FOLDER RANDOM El n mero m ximo de archivos que se reconocen es 3 000 Saltos a intervalos regulares TIME SKIP Saltos a intervalos regulares 1 Pulse gt OK durante 1 segundo aproximadamente o m s durante la reproducci n El modo cambia a modo de tiempo de salto y se muestra WA El modo de salto cambia cada vez que se pulsa el bot n Pulse M lt gt gt Cada vez que se pulsa el bot n se realizara un salto de 5 segundos ajuste de f brica Para cambiar el intervalo de salto Pulse MENU Cuando la reproducci n est en curso acuda al paso Pulse para seleccionar PLAY MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar TIME SKIP y pulse
205. n is returned to the original setting ENGLISH 5 8 VQT4J81 E VQT4J81 Making sound easier to hear VOICE EMPHASIS This function makes the target sound easier to hear by reducing noise during playback and partially emphasising the stereo sound at the front left or right Put the unit into the stopped state or playback state Press MENU When playback is in progress go to step O Press to select PLAY MENU and press gt OK to enter 3 Press to select VOICE EMPHASIS and press gt OK to enter Press to select the type of voice emphasis and press gt OK to enter The factory setting is NORMAL VOICE EMPHASIS im ENORMAL J To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE I NOISE CXL L A NOISE CXL H Gi FOCUS FRONT ET Ti FOCUS LEFT 1 24 5 pa E FOCUS RIGHT wes tach M Nothing is displayed for INDEX NORMAL The set voice emphasis indication is only displayed during playback NORMAL Plays sound as it was recorded NOISE CXL L Performs a small amount of noise reduction NOISE CXL H Performs a large amount of noise reduction FOCUS FRONT Emphasises the sound at the front FOCUS LEFT Emphasises the sound at the left FOCUS RIGHT Emphasises the sound at the right The result may not be sufficient depending on the sound source O Voice emphasis will not
206. n los requisitos del sistema de Windows Media Player Para m s detalles sobre Windows Media Player acuda a Microsoft Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows Media y Windows Vista son marcas registradas o marcas comerciales de Microsoft Corporation en Estados Unidos y otros pa ses Tecnolog a de decodificaci n de audio MPEG Layer 3 de Fraunhofer IIS y Thomson IBM y PC AT son marcas registradas de International Business Machines Corporation de Estados Unidos Macintosh y Mac OS son marcas comerciales de Apple Inc Otros nombres de sistemas y nombres de productos que aparecen en este documento son en general marcas registradas o marcas comerciales de las empresas desarrolladoras respectivas Tenga en cuenta que los s mbolos y no aparecen en este documento Seg n el entorno del ordenador pueden producirse fallos de funcionamiento por ejemplo no pueden utilizarse los datos de audio grabados en esta unidad etc Panasonic y los distribuidores de Panasonic no se responsabilizan de ninguna p rdida de datos de audio u otros da os directos o indirectos excepto en casos de negligencia intencional o grave Memoria interna 4 GB RR XS450 2 GB RR XS420 La capacidad utilizable ser inferior ESPANOL di 3 VQT4J81 n Ss 5 VQT4J81 202 Conexion de esta unidad a un ordenador Saque la clavija USB de la unidad Conecte la unidad a un ordenador utilizando el puerto USB Si la unidad n
207. n und zum ndern der Werte dr cken BD OK dr cken Die Wiedergabe beginnt von der festgelegten Position Um den Einstellvorgang abzubrechen F2 CLOSE dr cken Wiedergabe mit geringf gigem R cklauf OD OK w hrend der Wiedergabe dr cken Bei jedem Dr cken des Knopfes l uft die Wiedergabe f r ungef hr 3 Sekunden Werkseinstellung zur ck Einstellung der R cklaufzeit MENU dr cken W hrend der Wiedergabe zu Schritt wechseln dr cken um PLAY MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um SLIGHT RETURN auszuw hlen 3 und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 5 O dr cken um die Anzahl der Sekunden 1 bis 5 gt auszuwahlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Werkseinstellung ist 3 sec KZ F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen 106 Wiederholwiedergabe REPEAT MENU dr cken W hrend der Wiedergabe zu Schritt wechseln O dr cken um PLAY MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken dr cken um REPEAT auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 4 dr cken um Art der Wiedergabewiederholung auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Werkseinstellung ist OFF F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen OFF Die Wiedergabe wird nacheinander von der ausgew hlten Datei bis zur letzten Datei in einem
208. nahmeanzeige blinkt REC erneut dr cken um mit der Aufnahme fortzufahren Wiedergabe 1 gt OK dr cken Wiedergabe beginnt Einstellen der Lautst rke Erh hen der Lautst rke dr cken Verringern der Lautst rke dr cken Funktionen bei Wiedergabe Sprung Skip k lt gt gt dr cken Suchlauf r ckw rts vorw rts 44 gt gt gedr ckt halten Beenden der Aufnahme STOP W RETURN dr cken Pr fung der Information STOP M RETURN dr cken Der Informationsschirm erscheint 2 Den Informationsschirm unter Benutzung von oder auf oder abw rts bewegen So verlassen Sie den Informationsbildschirm STOP W RETURN dr cken Mith ren des Tons ber Ohrh rer Stereo Ohrh rer nicht mitgeliefert anschlieBen Steckerausf hrung o 3 5 mm Stereo Klinkenstecker Empfohlener zus tzlicher Ohrh rer Panasonic RP HV154 RP HJE120 Stand Mai 2012 berwachen der aktuellen Aufnahme Einstellen der Lautst rke Die Lautst rke des mitgeh rten Tons kann durch Dr cken von eingestellt werden ohne den Aufnahmepegel zu beeinflussen Abh ren des Wiedergabetons W hrend der Wiedergabe wird der Ton ber den eingebauten Lautsprecher ausgegeben In einer lauten Umgebung ist der Lautsprecherton m glicherweise schwer zu h ren In einem solchen Fall empfiehlt sich der Anschluss eines Stereo Ohrh rers nicht mitgeliefert Eingebauter Lautsprecher
209. nar la banda de frecuencia que se vaya a modificar y pulse para ajustar el nivel de volumen 6 dB Una vez que los ajustes para la banda de frecuencia a cambiar se hayan completado vaya al paso O 5 Pulse gt OK para confirmar Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Modo EQ Efectos y aplicaciones La funci n del ecualizador de sonidos no est en uso ELAT Escuchar el sonido original sin cambio alguno BASS Enfatiza fuertemente el rango de los graves CLEAR Enfatiza fuertemente el rango de los agudos HEAVY Enfatiza ligeramente el rango de los agudos y graves SOFT Enfatiza el rango medio VOICE Reduce el ruido para que las voces sean mas audibles USER Este modo habilita el ajuste de las bandas de frecuencia de 150 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 4 kHz y 12 kHz El ajuste de fabrica es FLAT ESPANOL DI VQT4J81 N 193 5 VQT4J81 EI Uso de una tarjeta SD Montaje de la tarjeta SD O Desconecte la alimentaci n y abra la cubierta de la ranura de la bater a tarjeta SD 2 Introduzca la tarjeta SD y cierre la cubierta de la ranura de la bater a tarjeta SD Alinee la tarjeta SD en la direcci n correcta 4 e introd zcala completamente hasta que oiga el sonido clic Para retirar la tarjeta SD Desconecte la alimentaci n y abra la cubierta de la ranura de la bater a tarjeta SD Empuje la tarjeta SD con suavidad
210. nci n desconecta autom ticamente la alimentaci n si no se realiza ninguna operaci n durante un cierto per odo de tiempo como por ejemplo cuando la grabaci n est detenida Esta funci n le ayudar a ahorrar energ a si olvida desconectar la alimentaci n AUTO POWER OFF 0 min OFF a 15min El ajuste de f brica es 15 min BACKLIGHT Luz de Fondo Establezca el tiempo de luz de retroiluminaci n cuando se pulsa el bot n Tiempo de iluminaci n OFF no se enciende 5 seg 15 seg siempre encendida El ajuste de f brica es 15 sec CONTRAST Contraste Utilice esta funci n para ajustar el contraste de la pantalla Podr elegir entre 10 niveles para el ajuste Ajuste del contraste 1 L a 10 H El ajuste de f brica es 5 RECYCLE BIN Papelera de Reciclaje Cuando se utiliza la funci n de papelera de reciclaje los archivos eliminados se mueven a la papelera de reciclaje Antes de vaciar la papelera de reciclaje se pueden restaurar los archivos eliminados por ello no tiene que preocuparse por archivos que pueda eliminar por error OFF No utilizar la tunci n de papelera de reciclaje ON Utilizar la funci n de papelera de reciclaje El ajuste de f brica es ON FORMAT Formateo Se borran todos los archivos en la memoria interna o en la tarjeta SD Los archivos borrados no se pueden recuperar O Seleccione INTERNAL MEMORY o microSD CARD y pulse gt OK
211. nd press gt OK to enter Press to select ON and press gt OK to enter The factory setting is OFF To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE ER is displayed FOLDER REC STOP W RETURN Setting the recording level manually The recording level can be adjusted automatically or manually on this unit When the recording level adjustment is AUTO the sound distortion is reduced by adjusting the recording level automatically To record the original sound volume level faithfully such as an instrument playing and nature sound set the recording level adjustment to MANUAL The factory setting is AUTO Setting the recording level adjustment to MANUAL Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press MENU Press to select MIC REC MENU and press gt OK to enter 3 Press to select REC LEVEL ADJ and press gt OK to enter Press to select MANUAL and press gt OK to enter To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE The recording level is displayed Adjusting the recording level manually Set the recording level adjustment to MANUAL beforehand When the recording level adjustment is AUTO the unit does not enter the recording standby Press and hold REC 0 for 1 second or more The unit enters the recording standby Blinks 2 Aim the microphone at the sound source to reco
212. nd use gt OK to add a check mark Press gt OK again to clear the selection When the day is selected select OK and press gt OK TIME Set the start time and end time Select the item select the start hour minutes end hour minutes using 14 Bi and set using e Up to 12 hours can be set for the period from start time until end time PLAY ALARM Plays the alarm sound FILE Plays a file The file list of the folder being selected is displayed Press to select the file and press gt OK When selecting files by switching folders press tl and you can move within hierarchies For details of file and folder selection methods see page 13 SOURCE MIC Microphone recording LINE Records sound from an external device MODE PCM 44 1kHz MP3 320kbps MP3 192kbps MP3 128kbps MP3 64kbps MP3 32kbps REC TO Select the folder in which to save the recorded file e If an SD card folder is selected insert the SD card REC PLAY PLAY Plays a set file or plays the alarm sound REC Records the set sound source When setting the start time and end time do not mix up a m and p m AM12 00 and PM12 00 represent 0 00 a m and noon respectively When performing timer recording at 0 00 a m set the start time to AM12 00 Displayed when PLAY is selected for REC PLAY Displayed when REC is selecte
213. ndigkeit dr cken und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Wiedergabegeschwindigkeit Die Wiedergabegeschwindigkeit kann in 10 Schritten f r im Vergleich zur Normalgeschwindigkeit 100 schnellere Geschwindigkeiten angepasst werden und in 5 Schritten f r im Vergleich zur Normalgeschwindigkeit langsamere Geschwindigkeiten angepasst werden Statusanzeige w hrend der Wiedergabe Wiedergabe mit Normalgeschwindigkeit schnellere Wiedergabe und langsamere Wiedergabe werden jeweils als D D bzw J gt angezeigt A B Wiederholwiedergabe Bei der Wiedergabe ERASE A BC dr cken Der Startpunkt A ist festgelegt und F SX leuchtet und H blinkt werden angezeigt O ERASE A BO am gew nschten Endpunkt B dr cken Die Anzeige wechselt auf Pf leuchtet und der festgelegte Abschnitt wird wiederholt abgespielt Aufheben der A B Wiederholwiedergabe ERASE A BO 4 Db oder STOP H RETURN dr cken DEUTSCH A gt g VQT4J81 a Wiedergabe von einer festgelegten Position TIME SEARCH MENU dr cken W hrend der Wiedergabe zu Schritt wechseln dr cken um PLAY MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um TIME SEARCH auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dricken Die Wiedergabestartposition einstellen Den Wert f r TIME ndern um die Startposition einzustellen 44 PPI dr cken um 00 00 00 Stunden Minuten Sekunden zu w hle
214. ne andare al punto O 2 Premere per selezionare PLAY MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare Premere per selezionare SOUND EQ quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare la modalit di suono EQ In caso di selezione di modalit diverse da USER andare al punto Impostazione quando si seleziona USER Dopo il punto O premere F1 EDIT Premere k d gt gt per selezionare la frequenza di banda da modificare quindi premere per regolare il livello del volume 6 dB Quando sono state completate tutte le impostazioni per la banda di frequenza da modificare andare al punto O 5 Premere gt OK per confermare Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Modalit A Fun EQ Effetti e applicazioni La funzione di equalizzazione del suono non in uso FLAT i 7 23 A Viene riprodotto il suono originale senza alcuna modifica BASS Enfatizza molto le basse frequenze CLEAR Enfatizza molto le alte frequenze HEAVY Enfatizza leggermente le basse e le alte frequenze SOFT Enfatizza le medie frequenze VOICE Riduce il rumore affinch la voce umana si possa udire pi facilmente USER Questa modalit consente la regolazione di bande di frequenza di 150 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 4 kHz e 12 kHz L impostazione di fabbrica FLAT ITALIANO a VQT4J81 N 137
215. ne st r o ordinaire ZOOM Accentue le son devant l appareil durant l enregistrement Ad quat pour enregistrer des conf rences ou des interviews lorsque le son est amp mis d une direction sp cifique Enregistrer Appuyez sur F2 FOLDER Appuyez sur td gt gt pour choisir le dossier de destination de l enregistrement et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Pour un enregistrement au microphone choisissez un dossier parmi les dossiers A B C et D Le r glage d usine est A O Appuyez sur REC 0 l enregistrement commence Appuyez sur STOP W RETURN pour arr ter Penregistrement Pour mettre l enregistrement en pause Appuyez sur REC pendant l enregistrement Le voyant d enregistrement clignote Appuyez nouveau sur REC pour faire reprendre l enregistrement Lire 1 Appuyez sur gt OK la lecture commence R gler le volume Montez le volume Appuyez sur Baissez le volume Appuyez sur Op rations pendant la lecture Saut passer une piste Appuyez sur 4 lt gt gt Recul rapide Avance rapide Recherche Maintenez enfonc es les touches 4 bb Pour arr ter Appuyez sur STOP W RETURN V rifier les informations Appuyez sur STOP W RETURN L cran des informations appara t 2 Faites d filer l cran des informations vers le haut ou le bas en utilisant ou Pour q
216. nected to a computer USB plug ENGLISH ii a a VQT4J81 o B VQT4J81 Screen display e The following screen examples explain each item Some items may not be displayed simultaneously Screen display during recording Index gt page 38 File number gt page 16 5 Status indication page 16 UB MN 1 SD card gt page 12 40E 00 E OVER Folder name gt page 12 LULU UT Level meter page 16 40 30 20 23 3 0 1 OA Direct scene gt page 23 Recording elapsed time Recording mode page 25 UMENERA mi Recording Scene gt page 20 Screen display during playback Repeat indication gt pages 39 41 Sound EQ gt page 45 Status indication page 39 an Teer TINI Shadowing page 43 Gama 1 1 File name gt page 67 7212011_ 180340 NES Playback elapsed time 1 _ Playback status bar a 192k INEA SPEED ras Playback speed gt page 39 IB i Voice emphasis page 44 Timer indication gt page 57 Battery indicator page 10 Battery setting BATT SETTING gt page 59 OVER indication gt page 16 Low cut filter page 26 EI Synchro recording gt page 37 Remaining recording time Input Built in microphone ExT 1 External microphone page 33 LIME CD Line in gt page 35 Microphone sensitivity gt page 26 Recording level page 27 WAS VAS gt page
217. nged even by switching the microphone position If you wish to switch only the stereo and zoom functions of the microphone without linking the recording scenes set direct scene setting to OFF page 24 When an external microphone is connected the recording scene cannot be switched even by switching the microphone position tm we ee gag 200 THER IND ENGLISH 8 8 VQT4J81 ES e VQT4J81 Direct scene Changing direct scene setting Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press MENU Press to select MIC REC MENU and press gt OK to enter 3 Press to select DIRECT SCENE and press gt OK to enter Press to select the ss DIRECT SCENE mm microphone position SETTING ON STEREO or ZOOM STEREO and press gt OK to enter UE LECTURE Press to select the STEREN TE recording scene and LANG STUDY press gt OK to enter KARAOKE MUSIC PERF CONVERSATION MEETING If you wish to change the recording scene for the other microphone position perform steps and to set the recording scene To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE Setting direct scene setting to OFF Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press MENU Press to select MIC REC MENU and press gt OK to enter 3 Press to select DIRECT SCENE and press gt OK to enter Press
218. ni o a meio Reproduc o com recuo ligeiro Pressione gt OK durante a reprodu o Sempre que pressionar o bot o a reprodu o recua cerca de 3 segundos programac o de f brica Definir o tempo de recuo Pressione MENU Quando a reprodug o estiver a decorrer avance para o passo O 2 Pressione para seleccionar PLAY MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar SLIGHT RETURN e pressione gt OK para confirmar 4 Pressione para seleccionar o n mero de segundos 1 a 5 e pressione gt OK para confirmar A programa o de f brica 3 sec Para sair do ecr de defini o pressione F2 CLOSE Reprodu o com repeti o REPEAT Pressione MENU Quando a reprodu o estiver a decorrer avance para 0 passo 2 Pressione para seleccionar PLAY MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar 3 Pressione para seleccionar REPEAT e pressione gt OK para confirmar 4 Pressione para seleccionar o tipo de reprodu o com repeti o e pressione gt OK para confirmar A programa o de f brica OFF Para sair do ecr de defini o pressione F2 CLOSE OFF A reprodu o feita sucessivamente a partir do ficheiro seleccionado at ao ltimo ficheiro numa pasta e depois a reprodu o p ra ONE Reproduz um ficheiro repetidamente FOLDER REPEAT Reproduz repetidame
219. nit may receive radio interference caused Be sure to use the supplied or recommended by mobile telephones during use If such headphones or earphones interference occurs please increase separation Based on EN 50332 2 2003 between this unit and the mobile telephone 1 Maximum output voltage earphone output 150mV CAUTION 2 Wide band characteristic voltage earphones e Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly 75mV replaced Replace only with the type recommended by the manufacturer When disposing the batteries please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal 8 g VQT4J81 8 6 VQT4J81 Maintenance Clean this unit with a dry and soft cloth If the unit becomes too dirty wring a cloth moistened in water wipe the dirt with it and clean with a dry cloth e Do not use solvents including benzine thinner alcohol kitchen detergent a chemical wiper etc This might cause the exterior case to be deformed or the coating to come off Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries A A These symbols on the products packaging and or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste For proper treatment recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national l
220. not be copied moved because the number of files in the copy move destination folder has reached the limit 199 Delete files in the copy move destination folder or specify another folder as copy move destination EMPTY RECYCLE BIN This is displayed when you attempt to delete files or folders with the maximum number of files 199 present in the recycle bin folder and no more files can be moved to the recycle bin M gt page 54 This is displayed when you attempt to restore files from the recycle bin Mm to the original folder and the maximum number of recordable files are present in the original folder means the folder name for the original folder page 54 CAN T MOVE FILE EMPTY RECYCLE BIN This may be displayed when there is no free space on the SD card gt page 54 CAN T FORMAT The internal memory or the SD card may be damaged Consult your dealer CAN T ADD FILES PLAYLIST FULL This is displayed when you attempt to register files with the playlist with the number exceeding maximum number 99 of files that can be registered with each playlist page 49 CAN T ADD ALL FILES TO PLAYLIST This is displayed when not all files can be registered because the number of files exceeds the maximum number 99 of files that can be registered while registering the files with playlist page 49 CAN T EDIT PLAYLIST NO FILE The editing operation for the playlist is impossible be
221. nte todos os ficheiros da pasta FOLDER RANDOM Reproduz repetidamente todos os ficheiros contidos na pasta por ordem aleat ria ALL REPEAT Para MUSIC M ou OTHER FOLDER Ed todos os ficheiros dentro da pasta s o reproduzidos de forma repetida Para outras pastas a operag o igual da op o FOLDER REPEAT ALL RANDOM Para MUSIC M ou OTHER FOLDER Ed todos os ficheiros dentro da pasta s o reproduzidos de forma repetida por ordem aleat ria Para outras pastas a operac o igual da op o FOLDER RANDOM O numero m ximo de ficheiros reconhecidos de 3 000 Saltar em intervalos regulares TIME SKIP Saltar em intervalos regulares 1 Pressione gt OK durante cerca de 1 segundo ou mais durante a reprodu o O modo muda para modo de salto de tempo e aparece a indica o IA O modo de salto muda sempre que pressionar o bot o O Pressione I44 gt Sempre que pressionar o bot o efectuado um salto de 5 segundos programa o de f brica Alterar o intervalo de salto Pressione MENU Quando a reprodu o estiver a decorrer avance para o passo 2 Pressione para seleccionar PLAY MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar 3 Pressione para seleccionar TIME SKIP e pressione gt OK para confirmar 4 Pressione para seleccionar o tempo e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pode definir o intervalo de salto para 5 seg
222. o Si consiglia di staccare l unit dal computer quando si avvia riavvia il computer Il funzionamento non garantito nei seguenti casi Quando due o pi dispositivi USB sono collegati a un computer tranne il mouse e la tastiera in condizioni normali di funzionamento Quando si utilizza un hub USB Quando si utilizza un cavo di prolunga USB diverso da quello in dotazione 5 VQT4J81 D a Il computer potrebbe non riconoscere l unit se essa stata collegata al computer durante l avvio riavvio o mentre esso si trova in modalit standby Staccare l unit e ricollegarla al computer o ricollegare l unit dopo aver riavviato il computer O Vedere le istruzioni per l uso del computer H Scollegamento dell unit Fare doppio clic sull icona Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 nella barra delle applicazioni sul lato inferiore dello schermo del computer e seguire le istruzioni a schermo per rimuovere l unit l icona potrebbe non essere visualizzata a seconda delle impostazioni del sistema operativo Dopo la rimozione dell unit l unit si spegne Quando l unit viene accesa dopo l eliminazione di file od operazioni simili attraverso il computer viene visualizzato il messaggio UPDATING FILE NAME L aggiornamento pu richiedere alcuni minuti H Funzione di memoria di massa USB Questa unit funziona come memoria USB e viene riconosciuta come un dispositivo di m
223. o spostati nel cestino Prima di svuotare il cestino possibile ripristinare i file eliminati in modo che non ci si debba preoccupare dei file eliminati per errore OFF Non usare la funzione cestino ON Usare la funzione cestino L impostazione di fabbrica ON FORMAT Tutti i file sulla memoria interna o sulla scheda SD vengono eliminati file eliminati non possono essere recuperati Selezionare INTERNAL MEMORY o microSD CARD quindi premere gt OK per confermare Selezionare YES quindi premere gt OK per confermare INIT MENU Se le impostazioni di questa unit vengono inizializzate tutte le impostazioni vengono riportate ai valori di fabbrica ad eccezione di DATE amp TIME Selezionare YES quindi premere gt OK per confermare Le impostazioni verranno inizializzate VERSION possibile verificare la versione del firmware dell unit Requisiti di sistema a partire da maggio 2012 Computer Computer compatibili IBM PC AT Macintosh Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Professional e Service Pack 2 Service Pack 3 Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business Ultimate e tn Service Pack 1 Service Pack 2 f f Versione preinstalata Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate HAG SOLVICE PACK fra pal ron E ie ii e Mac OS X da 10 2 8 a 10 7 Interfaccia Porta USB il funzionam
224. o de procura de ficheiros e pressione gt OK para confirmar in mem ria interna ou Ed cart o SD apresentado como o alvo da procura Quando seleccionar CALENDAR SRCH Pressione kK PP para seleccionar a data de grava o e pressione gt OK para confirmar Quando seleccionar DAY OF WEEK Pressione para seleccionar o dia da semana e pressione gt OK para confirmar S poss vel seleccionar um dia da semana 4 Pressione para seleccionar o ficheiro e pressione gt OK para confirmar Ouvir musica na unidade ficheiros de musica WMA MP3 Seleccionar um ficheiro da pasta M Seleccione o ficheiro e pressione gt OK Func o de preparac o de pasta 1 Pressione F2 C CUE durante a reprodu o Aparece a indica o FOLDER SKIP que muda para a visualiza o de prepara o de pasta ri Pressione M4 gt gt quando aparecer a indica o el Cancelar a preparac o de pasta possivel cancelar a definig o utilizando qualquer um dos seguintes m todos Pressione F2 C CUE novamente Quando isto cancelado os ficheiros podem ser ignorados utilizando td PP Pressione gt OK Pressione STOP II RETURNI A reprodu o conclu da Utilizar a fun o de lista de reprodu o Registar faixas favoritas numa lista de reprodu o Seleccione a pasta MUSIC M no ecr de lista gt p gina 4 Pode tamb
225. o puede conectarse directamente al ordenador utilice el cable alargador de USB incluido No use cables alargadores de USB distintos del suministrado No utilice el cable suministrado con otros dispositivos Precauci n Utilice exclusivamente el cable alargador de USB incluido de n cleo de ferrita cuando se conecte al ordenador 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000 O La primera vez que conecte la unidad a su PC Aparecer n varios mensajes Nuevo dispositivo encontrado no desconecte la unidad del ordenador hasta que todos los mensajes desaparezcan O Esta unidad no se puede usar mientras est conectada al ordenador O Cuando est conectada al ordenador la unidad puede funcionar sin pila porque utiliza la alimentaci n suministrada por el ordenador O Cuando la unidad est conectada al ordenador ste puede que no se inicie reinicie Se recomienda retirar la conexi n de la unidad con el ordenador cuando se inicie reinicie este ltimo EI funcionamiento no se garantiza en los casos siguientes Cuando dos o m s dispositivos USB est n conectados al ordenador excluyendo el rat n y el teclado en normal funcionamiento Cuando se usa un concentrador USB Cuando se utiliza un cable alargador de USB que no sea el incluido O Cuando la unidad se conecta al ordenador si usted inicia reinicia el ordenador o ste entra en el modo de espera el ordenador puede no reconoce
226. o select INT MEMORY internal memory or microSD CARD and press F1 SEARCH SELECT MEMORY dm INT MEMORY microsD CARD Press to select the type of file search and press gt OK to enter CALENDA DAY OF WEEK RECENT R FILE LH internal memory or Er SD card is displayed as the search target Press td PPI to select the recorded date and press gt OK to enter The cursor only moves to dates on which files were recorded When DAY OF WEEK is selected Press to select the day of the week and press gt OK to enter Only one day of the week can be selected Press to select the file and press gt OK to enter Gap FILE SENNO AIR FILE SRCH i o EE When CALENDAR SRCH is selected RT A O Ti 2012 5EP QM SUN MON TUE WEDTHL FRI SAT IL FLAT on DAY OF WEEK q MONDAY 10 TUESDAY 1 WEDNESDAY 1 SEARCH ENGLISH u A VQT4J81 ko Listening to music on this unit WMA MP3 music files Transfer music files to this unit from the computer page 71 Selecting a file from folder M See page 12 for selecting a folder and pages 13 and 17 for selecting a file Select the file and press gt OK GED EI 0 8 Sakura ea Bob Asai O Four Seasons 5 IE Playback elapsed time i Total playback time Length of the selected file duration of time
227. odifier et appuyez sur gt OK Appuyez sur F1 TAB pour passer a d autres crans de r glage Les d tails du r glage et les m thodes de modification d pendent de l l ment Pour plus de d tails voir la page correspondante Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE Diviser des fichiers Pendant la lecture appuyez sur STOP W RETURN au moment ou vous voulez effectuer la division du fichier S lectionnez DIVIDE l cran de r glage des modifications gauche Appuyez sur pour s lectionner YES et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Pendant la division du fichier le voyant d tat clignote Modification Combiner des fichiers S lectionnez COMBINE l cran de r glage des modifications gauche Appuyez sur pour s lectionner PREVIOUS FILE et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le fichier combiner et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Si vous s lectionnez le fichier dans un autre dossier vous pouvez naviguer l arborescence des dossiers en appuyant sur 44 Pour des d tails relatifs aux m thodes de s lection des fichiers et des dossiers voir la page 4 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner NEXT FILE et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider O Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le fichier combiner au dos du fichier pr c dent et appuyez sur gt OK pour v
228. or 71 files cannot be copied or moved If the size of the file to be copied or moved exceeds the amount of free space in the destination the file cannot be copied or moved ENGLISH ii 8 E VQT4J81 Recycle bin function When deleting files with the recycle bin function set to ON deleted files are moved to the recycle bin TI folder excluding MUSIC M folder or OTHER FOLDER ka Files moved to the recycle bin can be returned to the original folders so you do not have to worry about deleting files by mistake If files are deleted with the recycle bin function set to OFF deleted files are completely erased without being moved to the recycle bin The factory setting is ON Returning files in the recycle bin to the original folder Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press F2 FOLDER Press 144 PD to select HT and press gt OK to enter The recycle bin folders exist in the internal memory and SD card respectively Use td gt gt to select the dani file you want to return Dem and press ERASE _FILE No 015 015 121201 173940 A BC to enter Stored folder before deletion File number before deletion Press to select RESTORE FILE and press gt OK to enter 5 Press to select YES and press gt OK to enter The status indicator flashes and the selected file is returned to the end of the original folder Press gt OK to retu
229. ording PCM MP3 MP3 MP3 MP3 MP3 format 44 1 kHz 320 kbps 192 kbps 128 kbps 64 kbps 32 kbps When the recording mode is set to MP3 32kbps the recording becomes monaural ENGLISH DI 5 3 VQT4J81 Switching microphone sensitivity Switch the microphone sensitivity according to the volume of the sound source When the sound source volume is loud set the sensitivity to LOW When it is low set the sensitivity to HIGH Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press MENU 2 Press to select MIC REC MENU and press gt OK to enter Press to select MIC SENS and press gt OK to enter O Press to select HIGH or LOW and press gt OK to enter The factory setting is HIGH To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE When the microphone position is STEREO gt page 14 a displayed for High and When the microphone ol is ZOOM displayed for High and for Low Reducing low frequency noise during recording Sound of low frequency range is reduced during microphone recording This is effective when reducing noise of air conditioning equipment etc while recording at a meeting etc LOW CUT FILTER e Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press MENU 2 Press to select MIC REC MENU and press gt OK to enter 3 Press to select LOW CUT FILTER a
230. ot use a battery that can still be used on other equipment This unit considers the battery as empty even if there is actually power left in it This is to preserve the clock setting Did you set the AUTO POWER OFF function This function turns the power off if there is no operation for a certain period of time such as when the unit is stopped page 59 The factory setting is 15 minutes Playback is extremely short despite recharging The rechargeable battery life is over Number of recharging times of supplied rechargeable battery Approx 300 Replace with a new specified rechargeable battery optional 3 is displayed when the battery is recharged Cannot recharge batteries The temperature of this unit has risen Disconnect the unit from the computer and leave it for a while Then recharge the battery again Are you trying to recharge a battery other than the specified rechargeable battery or an alkaline battery Insert the specified rechargeable battery supplied and recharge it The rechargeable battery is not properly inserted Remove the battery completely once Then insert it again Is alkaline battery set in the battery switching setting Switch the setting to the rechargeable battery setting and recharge it gt page 59 ENGLISH ii SI y vores N El VQT4J81 y o Troubleshooting guide Symptom Checkpoints Operations The unit does not start Make sure
231. our valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner TIMER amp ALARM et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider D finissez les l ments tels que la date et l heure ou la source sonore Appuyez sur pour s lectionner l l ment et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur kK gt gt pour s lectionner le r glage et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider R p tez les tapes et pour terminer les r glages O Appuyez sur pour s lectionner OK et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE l ment r gl D tails SETTING OFF Le retardateur est d sactiv ON Le retardateur est activ REPEAT ONCE L enregistrement ou la lecture est ex cut une seule fois DAILY L enregistrement ou la lecture est ex cut quotidiennement SELECT L enregistrement ou la lecture est ex cut toutes les semaines au jour choisi Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le jour et utilisez gt OK pour ajouter une coche Appuyez nouveau sur OK pour supprimer la s lection Q Une fois le jour choisi s lectionnez OK et appuyez sur gt OK l ment r gl D tails M enu commun TIME D finissez l heure de d but et l heure de fin PIRO m S lectionnez l l ment s lectionnez l heure et les Op ration de r glages communs minutes de d but l heure et les minutes
232. oz En tal caso conecte unos auriculares est reo no incluidos Altavoz incorporado Inserte firmemente ESPA OL E E VQT4J81 q A VQT4J81 o N Eliminaci n de archivos Pulse ERASE A BOD 2 Pulse para seleccionar FILE y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar YES y pulse gt OK para confirmar Durante la eliminaci n el indicador de estado parpadea y se visualiza ERASING La eliminaci n puede llevar unos minutos Si se selecciona FOLDER en el paso O se accede a la pantalla desde la que se pueden eliminar todos los archivos de la carpeta seleccionada Para salir de la pantalla de borrado pulse F2 CLOSE Borrado de archivos desde la pantalla de lista Seleccione los archivos en la pantalla de lista p gina 4 y pulse ERASE A BC Aparecer la pantalla para borrar los archivos Seleccione la carpeta y pulse ERASE A BC Aparecer la pantalla para borrar todos los archivos de la carpeta Selecci n de la situaci n para la grabaci n 1 Pulse MENU durante 1 segundo aproximadamente o m s Se muestra la pantalla para seleccionar la situaci n para la grabaci n 2 Pulse para seleccionar la situaci n para la grabaci n y pulse gt OK para confirmar Si selecciona USER omita el paso Pulse para seleccionar LOAD y pulse gt OK para confirmar Para salir de la pantalla de ajust
233. parecen referenciadas como tarjeta SD Selecci n de una carpeta o un archivo en la pantalla de lista Pulse LIST P durante 1 segundo aproximadamente o m s Vaya al paso si ha introducido una tarjeta SD gt p gina 18 o al paso E en caso conatrario Pulse para seleccionar INT MEMORY memoria interna o microSD CARD y luego pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar la carpeta y pulse gt OK para confirmar Si se han creado carpetas dentro de la carpeta MUSIC o en OTHER FOLDER k repita el paso para seleccionar la carpeta de destino Pulse para seleccionar el archivo y pulse gt OK para confirmar Se inicia la reproducci n del archivo Cambio de la posici n del micr fono Posici n del micr fono Usos recomendados STEREO Resulta adecuado para grabar Funciona como un micr fono est reo normal eventos tales como una reuni n o una actuaci n con un gran n mero de asistentes ZOOM Graba resaltando el sonido existente frente a usted Resulta adecuado para grabar eventos tales como una conferencia o una entrevista donde el sonido se emite en una direcci n concreta Grabaci n Pulse F2 FOLDER Pulse K gt gt para seleccionar la carpeta de destino de la grabaci n y pulse gt OK para confirmar Para la grabaci n con micr fono seleccione una carpeta de entre las carpetas A B C
234. piar y pulse gt OK para confirmar Cuando seleccione un archivo de otra carpeta puede moverse dentro de las jerarqu as pulsando Hd Para detalles sobre la selecci n de archivos y carpetas acuda a la p gina 4 Cuando est copiando archivos en la carpeta LINE LINE_SD acuda al paso 6 Pulse para seleccionar el destino de la copia INTERNAL MEMORY o microSD CARD y luego pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar la carpeta de destino de la copia y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar YES y pulse gt OK para confirmar Mientras el archivo est siendo copiado el indicador de estado parpadear Movimiento de archivos Seleccione MOVE en paso a la izquierda para mover los archivos La operaci n es la misma que para copiar un archivo Funci n de papelera de reciclaje Devoluci n de archivos dentro de la papelera de reciclaje a la carpeta original Pulse F2 FOLDER Pulse M lt Dbi para seleccionar Il y pulse gt OK para confirmar Las carpetas de papelera de reciclaje existen en la memoria interna y en la tarjeta SD Utilice 144 gt gt para seleccionar el archivo que desea devolver y pulse ERASE A BCD para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar RESTORE FILE y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar YES y pulse gt OK para confirmar El indi
235. presa mini 3 5 mm stereo Q Premere nuovamente REC per riprendere la registrazione Auricolari addizionali consigliati Panasonic RP HV154 RP HJE120 z a partire da maggio 2012 Riprod uzione Monitoraggio della Premere gt OK viene avviata la riproduzione registrazione in corso y Regolazione del volume Regolazione del volume Il volume pu essere regolato premendo ma ci non ha alcun effetto sul livello di registrazione Ascolto del suono durante la riproduzione Il suono durante la riproduzione proviene Per alzare il volume Premere Per abbassare il volume Premere Operazioni durante la riproduzione Altoparlante incorporato Salta Skip Premere lt bb Indietro veloce Avanti veloce Ricerca dall altoparlante L ascolto potrebbe Tenere premuto bb essere difficile in luoghi rumorosi a Per arrestare l unit Premere STOP W RETURN 1 saldamente Causa dell uscita dall altoparlante In tal caso collegare gli auricolari stereo non in dotazione ITALIANO M e VQT4J81 D a A VQT4J81 N Eliminazione dei file Premere ERASE A B 2 Premere per selezionare FILE quindi premere gt OK per confermare 3 Premere per selezionare YES quindi premere gt OK per confermare Mentre in atto l eliminazione l indicatore di stato lampeggia e viene visualizzato ERASING L eliminazione pu richiedere
236. pressione MENU e siga os passos O a O Quando acabar de ajustar o nivel de entrada sa da pare a fonte de som do outro dispositivo na posi o onde deseja iniciar a grava o Pressione REC 6 para iniciar a grava o Reproduza o dispositivo externo Esta unidade tem a seguinte fun o de grava o sincronizada Esta fung o detecta o sil ncio entre faixas etc e depois grava cada faixa em diferentes ficheiros como primeira faixa segunda faixa etc Se detectar som oriundo do dispositivo externo a gravac o iniciada automaticamente Se detectar sil ncio durante cerca de 2 segundos ou mais a gravac o entra em pausa A nova detec o de som ir retomar a grava o Definic o de gravac o sincronizada Pressione MENU Pressione para seleccionar LINE REC e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar SYNCHRO REC e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar ON Auto Stop ou ON Manual Stop e pressione gt OK para confirmar Auto A gravac o colocada em pausa se for detectado sil ncio durante cerca de 2 segundos ou mais e parada se o sil ncio continuar durante cerca de 15 segundos ou mais Manual Mesmo se o sil ncio continuar a gravac o continua pausada em espera at que se pressione STOP W RETURN A programa o de f brica OFF Para sair do ecr de definic o pressione F2
237. puyez sur pour s lectionner YES et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Changer la vitesse de lecture Appuyez sur F1 SPEED durant la lecture O Appuyez sur F1 SLOW ou F2 FAST pour s lectionner la vitesse de lecture puis appuyez sur gt OK Vitesse de lecture La vitesse de lecture peut tre ajust e par tapes de 10 pour un taux sup rieur la vitesse normale 100 et par tapes de 5 pour un taux inf rieur la vitesse normale Indication de l tat pendant la lecture Les vitesses de lecture normale plus rapide et plus lente sont indiqu es avec P pp et q Lecture r p t e A B Appuyez sur ERASE A BC pendant la lecture Le point de d but A est sp cifi et FF EX allum et E clignotant sont affich s Appuyez sur ERASE A BC au point de fin B L affichage devient Ft allum et la lecture r p t e commence Annuler la lecture r p t e A B Appuyez sur ERASE A BC 44 gt gt ou STOP M RETURN FRANCAIS a g VQT4J81 2 Si o gt 162 Lecture partir d une position d finie TIME SEARCH Appuyez sur MENU Lors de la lecture passez l tape 2 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner PLAY MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner TIME SEARCH et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Definissez la position de d part de la lecture
238. quindi premere gt OK Premere F1 TAB per passare alle schermate delle altre impostazioni dettagli di impostazione e i metodi di modifica variano in base alla voce Per dettagli si veda la pagina corrispondente Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Divisione di file Durante la riproduzione premere STOP WRETURN nel punto in cui si desidera dividere il file 2 Selezionare DIVIDE nella schermata di modifica delle impostazioni gt sinistra 3 Premere per selezionare YES quindi premere gt OK per confermare Mentre l unit esegue la divisione del file l indicatore di stato lampeggia Modifica Associazione di file Selezionare COMBINE nella schermata di modifica delle impostazioni gt sinistra 2 Premere per selezionare PREVIOUS FILE quindi premere gt OK per confermare 3 Premere per selezionare il file da associare quindi premere gt OK per confermare Quando si seleziona il file in un altra cartella possibile spostarsi tra i livelli gerarchici della cartella premendo Id Per dettagli sui metodi di selezione di file e cartelle si veda pagina 4 4 Premere per selezionare NEXT FILE quindi premere gt OK per confermare 5 Premere per selezionare il file da associare all inizio quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare NEXT quindi pr
239. quindi premere gt OK per confermare 3 Premere per selezionare REPEAT quindi premere gt OK per confermare 4 Premere per selezionare il tipo di ripetizione quindi premere gt OK per confermare L impostazione di fabbrica OFF Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE OFF La riproduzione viene eseguita in successione dal file selezionato all ultimo file nella cartella e successivamente si arresta ONE Viene riprodotto ripetutamente un solo file FOLDER REPEAT Vengono riprodotti ripetutamente tutti i file nella cartella FOLDER RANDOM Vengono riprodotti ripetutamente tutti i file nella cartella in ordine casuale ALL REPEAT Per la cartella MUSIC M o OTHER FOLDER Ed vengono riprodotti ripetutamente tutti i file nella cartella Per le altre cartelle operazione analoga a quella per FOLDER REPEAT ALL RANDOM Per la cartella MUSIC M o OTHER FOLDER E vengono riprodotti ripetutamente tutti i file nella cartella in ordine casuale Per le altre cartelle l operazione analoga a quella per FOLDER RANDOM Il numero massimo di file riconosciuti 3 000 Salto a intervalli regolari TIME SKIP Salto a intervalli regolari 1 Premere gt OK per almeno 1 secondo durante la riproduzione La modalit passa alla modalit di salto temporale e viene visualizzato IA La modalit di salto cambia ogni volta che si preme il tasto
240. r excluding the mouse and keyboard in normal operation When a USB hub is used When a USB extension cable other than the supplied one is used O When the unit is connected to the computer if you start restart the computer or the computer enters standby mode the computer may not recognise the unit Disconnect the unit and reconnect to the computer or reconnect the unit after the computer is restarted O Please see the Operating Instructions for the computer E Disconnecting the unit Double click the icon Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 on the task tray at the bottom of the computer screen and follow the on screen instructions to remove the unit The icon may not be displayed depending on the OS settings After the unit is removed this unit turns off When this unit is turned on after deleting etc files on this unit using the computer UPDATING FILE NAME is displayed lt may take several minutes until updating is complete E USB mass storage function This unit functions as a USB memory and is recognised as a computer s external storage device Data files in the computer can be transferred and saved on this unit Opening folders of this unit The illustrations show Windows XP OS The display may differ depending on the OS Connect this unit to a Computer beforehand gt page 63 1 Click start gt My Computer The internal memory and SD card of this unit are displayed as the follo
241. r glage d usine est ON SANO MP3 128 ko s MP3 64 ko s MP3 32 ko s RECTO S lectionnez le dossier dans lequel sauvegarder REC LED Voyant d enregistrement le fichier enregistr rane Si un dossier de la carte SD est s lectionn yos e en ON bu el ou non r gler le voyant ins rez la carte SD enregistrement sur ou 3 OFF Ne s allume pas ON S allume Le r glage d usine est ON FRANCAIS M 3 8 VQT4J81 e VQT4J81 q N Menu commun BATT SETTING D finit le type de pile utilis pile rechargeable nickel hydrure m tallique ou pile alcaline Type de pile RECHARGEABLE ALKALINE Le r glage d usine est RECHARGEABLE AUTO POWER OFF Cette fonction teint automatiquement l appareil si aucune op ration n est effectu e pendant un certain temps par exemple si l enregistrement est arr t Cette fonction permet d conomiser la pile lorsque vous oubliez d teindre l appareil AUTO POWER OFF 0 min OFF 15 min Le r glage d usine est 15min BACKLIGHT D finissez la dur e d allumage du r tro clairage lors de la pression du bouton Dur e d allumage OFF ne s allume pas 5 s 15 s toujours allum Le r glage d usine est 15 sec CONTRAST Utilisez cette fonction pour r gler le contraste de l cran Vous pouvez choisir parmi 10 niveaux pour l ajustement Ajustement du contraste 1 Faible 10 lev Le r
242. r die 24 Stundenanzeige und die 12 Stundenanzeige angezeigt O zur Einstellung der Stunde dr cken und gt gt dr cken O zur Einstellung der Minute dr cken kea gt gt zur nderung der Einstellung dr cken um zwischen den Punkten hin und her zu schalten und anschlie end erneut dr cken um die Einstellung vorzunehmen gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Das Datum und die Uhrzeit sind eingestellt und die Uhr beginnt mit dem Betrieb F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen DEUTSCH i a i VQT4J81 8 A VQT4J81 Auswahl des Ordners Wechseln der Mikrofonposition 1 Dr cken von F2 FOLDER Mikrofonposition Empfohlene Einsatzweisen 2 44 gt P dr cken um den Ordner STEREO Geeignet zum Aufzeichnen auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Funktioniert wie von Ereignissen wie einer E OTHER FOLDER dient zur Wiedergabe von Dateien gin gew hnliches Besprechung oder einer die von einem anderen Ger t als diesem aufgezeichnet wurde Stereomikrofon Auff hrung mit vielen Beteiligten Dieses Ger t kann auch Musikdateien wiedergeben die mit mit ZOOM Geeignet zum Aufzeichnen von USB Aufnahmefunktion ausgestatteten Panasonic Stereoger ten Verst rkt w hrend der Ereignissen wie Vorlesungen oder aufgezeichnet oder von diesen bertragen wurden Aufnahme den Ton Interviews bei denen der Ton n N N a unmittelbar vor Ihnen aus einer bestimmten Richtung Ums
243. r do ecr de definic o Pressionar REC 0 inicia a grava o Modo de EQ Efeito e aplicac o Este modo b sico n o d nfase a uma gama FLAT especifica de som EXTRA BASS Da uma forte amp nfase a gama baixa BASS Da uma ligeira nfase gama baixa MIDDLE D nfase gama media BASS amp TREBLE D uma ligeira nfase s gamas de baixo e agudos TREBLE D uma ligeira nfase gama de agudos ollie D uma forte amp nfase a gama de agudos USER Este modo permite o ajuste das bandas de frequ ncia de 150 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 4 kHz e 12 kHz A programac o de f brica FLAT Auto temporizador Pressione MENU 2 Pressione para seleccionar MIC REC MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar 3 Pressione para seleccionar SELF TIMER e pressione gt OK para confirmar 4 Pressione para seleccionar o tempo e pressione gt OK para confirmar A programac o de f brica OFF Para sair do ecr de definic o pressione F2 CLOSE Evitar gravac es desnecess rias VAS Pressione MENU 2 Pressione para seleccionar MIC REC MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar O Pressione para seleccionar VAS e pressione gt OK para confirmar 4 Pressione para seleccionar ON e pressione gt OK para confirmar A programac o de f brica OFF Para sair do
244. r el a o y pulse PP Pulse para establecer el mes y pulse Dbi O Pulse para establecer el d a y pulse PP Pulse para establecer el m todo de indicaci n del reloj y pulse gt gt Et y EM E se muestran para el modo de visualizaci n de 24 horas o de 12 horas respectivamente Pulse para establecer la hora y pulse PP ESPA OL N O Pulse para establecer los minutos Para cambiar los ajustes pulse td gt gt para desplazarse entre los elementos y a continuaci n pulse de nuevo para realizar el ajuste Pulse gt OK para confirmar La fecha y hora est n ahora ajustadas y el reloj comienza a funcionar Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE ii VQT4J81 q A VQT4J81 o S Selecci n de la carpeta Pulse F2 FOLDER Pulse 144 gt gt para seleccionar la carpeta y pulse gt OK para confirmar ey OTHER FOLDER sirve para reproducir archivos grabados con un dispositivo que no sea esta unidad Esta unidad tambi n puede grabar archivos musicales grabados con o transferidos por algunos dispositivos de Sistema Est reo Panasonic equipados con la funci n de grabaci n USB Cambio entre la memoria interna y la tarjeta SD Si la tarjeta SD esta colocada los elementos de la tarjeta SD se muestran en la pantalla en el paso O Pulse F1 MEMORY para seleccionar la memoria En este manual las tarjetas microSD microSDHC a
245. r interviste o riunioni ecc MEETING Wim Registrazione di un ampia banda audio Ad mim esempio per la registrazione di riunioni ecc LECTURE Gel Registra i suoni ad esempio le lezioni in aula e cos via FAVORITE Dx Registrazione delle proprie impostazioni Modifica delle impostazioni della scena di registrazione O Premere MENU per almeno 1 secondo O Premere per selezionare la scena di registrazione quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare CHANGE SETTING quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare la voce che si desidera modificare quindi premere gt OK per confermare 5 Premere per selezionare l impostazione quindi premere gt OK per confermare Ripetere i punti e per modificare altre voci O Al termine delle impostazioni premere per selezionare OK quindi premere gt OK per confermare Per selezionare la scena di registrazione modificata selezionare LOAD Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Inizializzazione delle impostazioni della scena di registrazione 1 Premere MENU per almeno 1 secondo 2 Premere per selezionare la scena di registrazione che si desidera inizializzare quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare INITIALIZE quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per s
246. r la unidad Desconecte la unidad y vuelva a conectarla al ordenador o vuelva a conectar la unidad despu s de reiniciar el ordenador O Consulte las instrucciones de funcionamiento del ordenador H Desconexi n de la unidad Haga doble clic en el icono Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 g en la bandeja de tareas en la parte inferior de la pantalla del ordenador y siga las instrucciones en pantalla sobre c mo retirar la unidad Es posible que el icono no se muestre dependiendo de la configuraci n del sistema operativo La unidad se apaga despu s de retirarla Cuando esta unidad se enciende despu s de haber eliminado de ella archivos etc a trav s del ordenador se mostrar el mensaje UPDATING FILE NAME La actualizaci n puede tardar varios minutos en completarse H Funci n de almacenamiento masivo USB Esta unidad funciona como memoria USB y es reconocida como dispositivo de almacenamiento externo del ordenador Los archivos de datos del ordenador pueden transferirse y guardarse en esta unidad Mantenimiento Limpie esta unidad con un trapo seco y suave Si la unidad est demasiado sucia humedezca un trapo en agua limpie la suciedad con ese trapo y luego con un trapo seco No utilice disolventes incluyendo bencina diluyentes alcohol detergentes de cocina limpiadores qu micos etc podr an causar la deformaci n de la carcasa exterior o el deterioro del revestimiento El s mbolo microSDHC es
247. razioni inutili VAS Premere MENU 2 Premere per selezionare MIC REC MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare O Premere per selezionare VAS quindi premere gt OK per confermare Premere per selezionare ON quindi premere gt OK per confermare L impostazione di fabbrica OFF Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Per avviare la registrazione VAS premere REC Regolazione del funzionamento del VAS Premere H gt gt durante la registrazione VAS L impostazione di fabbrica 3 Funzione di registrazione differita PRE RECORD Premere MENU 2 Premere per selezionare MIC REC MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare 3 Premere per selezionare PRE RECORD quindi premere gt OK per confermare Premere per selezionare ON quindi premere gt OK per confermare L impostazione di fabbrica OFF Per uscire dalla schermata di impostazione premere F2 CLOSE Per registrare con la funzione di registrazione preliminare Tenere premuto REC 6 per pi di 1 secondo Lunita entra in modalit standby di registrazione preliminare Cambia a 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec e si arresta a 3 sec dati audio del microfono vengono sempre aggiornati circa 3 secondi prima della registrazione e l unit in standby O Premere REC 0 Lindicatore di registrazione
248. rd Press M lt gt gt to adjust the recording level page 28 Adjustment range is 0 to 30 The factory setting is 15 Pressing REC starts recording ENGLISH N N VQT4J81 N Setting the recording level manually on MES OVER indication Eos MAO Level meter HE 40 30 20 12 LT in 1 Recording level O If the level meter swings and is displayed this means the recording level is too high Adjust the level within the ES range even if the recording sound reaches the highest level The input level volume input to this unit for recording is combination of the recording level and microphone sensitivity The input level image is as below l Recording cc level 30 1 30 MIC SENS LOW HIGH No sound is recorded at the recording level 0 and MUTE is displayed The recording level can also be adjusted during recording or while recording is paused ES When MENU is pressed during recording standby the microphone sensitivity page 26 LOW CUT FILTER gt page 26 and recording EQ gt page 29 can be set 3 B VQT4J Setting the recording peak limiter to ON Even if the recording level adjustment is MANUAL when the excessive volume is input the recording level is automatically adjusted and the sound distortion is reduced Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press MENU 2 Press to select
249. recording start time comes the current recording is prioritised Stop the recording However if you are using the unit for operations other than recording the timer recording is prioritised Others The power cannot be turned on The battery may have run out Replace the battery with the new one or charge the rechargeable battery 3 page 7 The power automatically turns off Did you set the AUTO POWER OFF function This function turns the power off if there is no operation for a certain period of time such as when the unit is stopped page 59 The factory setting is 15 minutes SD card cannot be recognised The SD card is not properly inserted Turn off the unit and reinsert the SD card page 46 Was the SD card formatted using the computer etc Format it on this unit gt page 60 Symptom Checkpoints Others Cannot delete a file or folder e If WMA MP3 music files transferred from the computer are Read only or subfolders are created in the MUSIC folder or OTHER FOLDER they cannot be deleted on this unit Delete them on the computer page 66 Free space does not increase even after files were deleted Empty the recycle bin folder page 54 Cannot divide a file Is there sufficient space in the internal memory 199 recorded files maximum recordable number may be present in the folder If the folder contains 199 recorded files dividing a file
250. ress STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press F2 FOLDER O Press 144 PPI to select the folder and press gt OK to enter P1 to P5 present playlist files gt page 49 SELECT FOLDER M CT OTHER FOLDER is for the playback of files recorded by a device other than this unit This unit can also play music files recorded with or transferred by some Panasonic Stereo System devices equipped with the USB recording function Switching between the internal memory and SD card If the SD card is inserted the items for SD card are displayed on the screen in step O Press F1 MEMORY to select the memory SELECT FOLDER mini microSD COLT M Pi P2 Pa Pd PE ea hriSELECT 0K a When the internal memory is selected When the SD card is selecte When the SD card is selected mn Gil is displayed on the screen tg Dio Selecting the folder or file in the list screen Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit D Press LIST P for approx 1 second or more Go to step if an SD card is inserted gt page 46 and step 3 if not Press to select INT MEMORY internal memory or microSD CARD and press gt OK to enter SELECT MEMORY Ni INT MEMO microsD CARD List screen Press to select the Folder folder and press gt OK ETF LAT m E INT MEMORY to enter If folders have been created in the MUSI
251. rn to the screen in step E g E VQT4J e If k FOLDER FULL CAN T RESTORE is displayed folder has reached the maximum recordable number 199 Delete files in the folder and then try the procedure again from the beginning Emptying the recycle bin folder When the recycle bin folder is emptied all of the files in the recycle bin are completely deleted Be sure to save all required data onto a computer or other external device before emptying the recycle bin folder Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press ERASE A BC Press to select EMPTY RECYCLE BIN and press gt OK to enter When the recycle bin folder is selected select EMPTY in step and press gt OK Press to select YES and press gt OK to enter The status indicator flashes and the recycle bin folder is emptied When the recycle bin function is ON possible remaining recording time free space does not increase even if files are deleted To increase the remaining recording time empty the recycle bin im folder and erase the files completely Using the timer Audio can be recorded at the set date and time The timer can also be used as an alarm by playing back files or sounds Set the clock correctly beforehand gt page 11 ERASE A BO lt Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit MENU Press MENU Press to select COMMON MENU and press gt OK to enter Press
252. s again to make the setting Press gt OK to enter The date and time are set and the clock starts to operate To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE O The clock operates with the monthly loss gain of approx 60 seconds at normal temperature O The clock setting will be lost if the battery is removed or completely exhausted MENU ENGLISH Es VQT4J81 iS 5 VQT4J81 File and Folder File Recorded audio data from the starting point to the ending point is saved as a file The saved data is called a file Folder This is where files are stored This unit has the following folders e A B C and D folders for microphone recording gt page 15 L folder for files recorded from other devices connected to this unit gt page 35 Il folder Recycle where deleted files are placed gt page 54 M folder for music gt page 48 Gey OTHER FOLDER where the folders created by the device other than this unit are placed gt page 70 Using each folder according to the purposes of recording enables you to search files easily later Up to 199 files can be recorded in each recording folder Folders are created in the internal memory When an SD card page 46 is inserted folders are created in the same way on the SD card In this manual microSD microSDHC card is written as SD card Selecting the folder P
253. s O If you individually change settings such as the recording mode when the recording scene is set the settings overwrite the USER settings and the recording scene indication disappears O The recording scene operates when microphone recording is used Recording scene does not operate when another device is connected and the Mic Line switch is set to LINE gt page 35 You can also set the recording scene by pressing MENU and selecting SCENE SELECT from MIC REC MENU E The factory setting of recording scenes Settings 32 Recording Scene LANG STUDY KARAOKE MUSIC PERF CONVERSATION MEETING LECTURE FAVORITE Application ziel Je il 22 2a Gil Dx Recording Loud volume High quality Recording Records a Records You can your own recording recording other broad sound sounds register your voice for such as such as people s band For such asin own settings pronunciation karaoke musical voices for recording classroom R practice etc performances interviews meetings Setting Item or meetings etc lectures etc page etc Recording mode MP3 MP3 PCM MP3 MP3 MP3 MP3 25 192 kbps 320 kbps 44 1 kHz 64 kbps 192 kbps 192 kbps 192 kbps Microphone HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH sensitivity 26 Recording level AUTO MANUAL MANUAL AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO 27 Low cut filter ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 26 Recording peak OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
254. s Vista Windows 7 de la barre des t ches au bas de l cran de l ordinateur et suivez les instructions l cran pour retirer l appareil Suivant les r glages du syst me d exploitation il se peut que l ic ne ne s affiche pas Une fois l appareil retir il s teint Lorsque cet appareil est allum apr s que l on a supprim etc des fichiers s y trouvant partir de l ordinateur le message UPDATING FILE NAME appara t La mise jour peut prendre plusieurs minutes H Fonction de m moire auxiliaire USB Cet appareil fonctionne en tant que m moire auxiliaire USB et est reconnu en tant que p riph rique de stockage externe de Pordinateur Les fichiers de donn es de l ordinateur peuvent tre transf r s et sauvegard s sur cet appareil Entretien Nettoyez cet appareil avec un chiffon doux et sec Si l appareil est trop sale passez un chiffon humidifi dans l eau puis passez un chiffon sec e N utilisez aucun solvant tel que benz ne diluant alcool d tergent de cuisine chiffon impr gn chimiquement etc Lutilisation de ces produits peut causer la d formation du bo tier ext rieur ou le d tachement du rev tement FRANCAIS M to en E o gt 5 VQT4J81 3 o Le logo microSDHC est une marque d pos e de SD 3C LLC Ce produit est prot g par certains droits de propri t intellectuelle de Microsoft Corporation et de tiers Toute utilisation ou d
255. s baterias no deberian ser mezclados con los desechos dom sticos Para el tratamiento apropiado la recuperaci n y el reciclado de aparatos viejos y baterias usadas por favor observe las normas de recolecci n aplicables de acuerdo a su legislaci n nacional y a las Directivas 2002 96 CE y 2006 66 CE AI desechar estos aparatos y baterias correctamente Usted estar ayudando a preservar recursos valiosos y a prevenir cualquier potencial efecto negativo sobre la salud de la humanidad y el medio ambiente que de lo contrario podria surgir de un manejo inapropiado de los residuos Para mayor informaci n sobre la recolecci n y el reciclado de aparatos y baterias viejos por favor contacte a su comunidad local su servicio de eliminaci n de residuos o al comercio donde adquiri estos aparatos Podr n aplicarse penas por la eliminaci n incorrecta de estos residuos de acuerdo a la legislaci n nacional Para usuarios empresariales en la Uni n Europea Si usted desea descartar aparatos el ctricos y electr nicos por favor contacte a su distribuidor o proveedor a fin de obtener mayor informaci n Informacion sobre la Eliminaci n en otros Pa ses fuera de la Uni n Europea Estos s mbolos s lo son v lidos dentro de la Uni n Europea Si desea desechar estos objetos por favor contacte con sus autoridades locales o distribuidor y consulte por el m todo correcto de eliminaci n Nota sobre el s mbolo de la bater a abajo dos ejemplos
256. s displayed page 77 When the computer is in sleep mode or is restarted recharging may be impossible Charging is possible even during data transfer The rechargeable battery does not need to be fully depleted before recharging O The rechargeable battery or this unit may become hot while charging but this is not a malfunction If the usage time becomes remarkably short even though the battery is fully recharged the battery has reached the end of its lifespan Purchase a new rechargeable battery page 2 E When using a dry cell battery not supplied An AAA LRO3 alkaline battery not supplied can also be used O If you use an alkaline battery set the BATT SETTING in the common menu to ALKALINE page 59 Turning the Power ON OFF OFF OPRJON COS lt HOLD OPR HOLD switch Turning the power ON Slide the OPR HOLD switch to ON side to turn the power on Then the display lights on Set the current date and time when turning this unit on for the first time page 11 Turning the power OFF Slide the OPR HOLD switch to OFF side while the unit is in the stop state E Auto power off The power automatically turns off after a preset time the factory setting is 15 minutes elapses while recording is stopped If the power is turned off by the auto power off function slide the OPR HOLD switch to the OFF side before turning the power on gt page 59 ENGLISH ar El VQT4J81
257. s etc that have more than approx 2 seconds of silence between tracks using line recording O Manual stop is useful when recording onto cassette tapes etc that need switching from side A to side B causing silence of more than 15 seconds When MENU is pressed during recording standby in step O on page 36 the synchro recording setting can be made O If the start of a track is cut from the recording turn synchro recording OFF Synchro recording cannot be used when using timer recording for line recording Synchro recording Make the synchro recording setting beforehand Perform steps to on pages 35 and 36 When connecting to the headphone output terminal of the external device the synchro recording may not function properly When approx 2 seconds or more of silence cannot be detected or depending on the combination of external devices the synchro recording may not function Selecting line recording mode The sound quality can be changed when recording with line recording See page 25 for information about recording modes e Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press MENU 2 Press to select LINE REC and press gt OK to enter 3 Press to select LINE REC MODE and press gt OK to enter Press to select the setting PCM sampling frequency MP3 bitrate and press gt OK to enter The factory setting is MP3 192kbps LINE REC MODE Ni
258. s glisser le commutateur Mic Line sur MIC Branchez le microphone externe Microphone externe non fourni Ins rez le fermement W Type de fiche mini fiche st r o 3 5 mm O Appuyez sur REC 0 pour commencer Penregistrement FRANCAIS Ni VQT4J81 a B VQT4J81 a S Enregistrer partir d autres appareils 1 Faites glisser le commutateur Mic Line sur LINE Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner LINE REC et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider 4 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner LINE INPUT et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider 5 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le r glage et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Si vous connectez la prise couteur d un appareil externe ou la prise de sortie d un appareil portable s lectionnez respectivement HIGH ou LOW Le r glage d usine est HIGH O Appuyez sur F2 CLOSE Branchez le dispositif externe Branchez le dispositif externe et faites glisser le commutateur Mic Line sur LINE Le r glage s lectionn de l entr e ligne et le mode d enregistrement par entr e ligne s afficheront alors O Maintenez enfonc REC 0 pendant 1 seconde ou plus Lappareil passe en attente d enregistrement 9 Mettez le dispositif externe en lecture et r glez le niveau d entr e sortie Si le compteur de niveau oscille et que le volume du dispositif externe es
259. s hierarquias da pasta pressionando 44 Para mais informa es sobre m todos de selec o de ficheiros e pastas consulte a p gina 4 Quando copiar ficheiros na pasta LINE LINE SD avance para o passo Pressione para seleccionar o destino de c pia INTERNAL MEMORY ou microSD CARD e pressione gt OK para confirmar O Pressione para seleccionar a pasta de destino da c pia e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar YES e pressione gt OK para confirmar Enquanto o ficheiro est a ser copiado o indicador de estado pisca Mover ficheiros Seleccione MOVE no passo 11 esquerda para mover ficheiros A operac o igual da c pia de ficheiros Func o de reciclagem Repor ficheiros colocados na reciclagem na pasta original 1 Pressione F2 FOLDER O Pressione 144 PP para seleccionar II e pressione gt OK para confirmar As pastas de reciclagem existem na memoria interna e no cart o SD respectivamente Utilize K lt gt gt para seleccionar o ficheiro que pretende repor e pressione ERASE A BC para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar RESTORE FILE e pressione gt OK para confirmar O Pressione para seleccionar YES e pressione gt OK para confirmar O indicador de estado pisca e o ficheiro seleccionado reposto na parte final da pasta original Pressione
260. s zu hoch Die Lautst rke des externen Ger ts auf den Bereich a einstellen selbst wenn so die Lautst rke auf Maximum gedreht wird Zur Rekonfiguration der Einstellungen des Line Inputs MENU dr cken und den Schritten bis folgen Wenn Sie den Eingangs Ausgangspegel eingestellt haben halten Sie die Tonquelle des anderen Ger ts an der Stelle an an der Sie die Aufnahme beginnen wollen REC 6 zum Starten der Aufnahme dr cken Spielen des externen Ger tes Dieses Ger t hat die folgende Synchron Aufnahmefunktion Diese Funktion erkennt die Stille zwischen Titeln usw und zeichnet jeden Titel als separate Datei auf z B als ersten Titel zweiten Titel usw Wird ein Ton vom externen Ger t erkannt beginnt die Aufnahme automatisch Wird f r etwa 2 Sekunden oder mehr Stille erkannt wird die Aufnahme angehalten Durch das erneute Erkennen von Ton wird die Aufnahme wieder aufgenommen Synchron Aufnahmeeinstellung MENU dr cken O dr cken um LINE REC auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 3 dr cken um SYNCHRO REC auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken dr cken um ON Auto Stop oder ON Manual Stop auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Auto Die Aufnahme pausiert wenn etwa 2 Sekunden lang oder l nger Stille erkannt wird und sie stoppt wenn die Stille etwa 15 Sekunden oder l nger andauert Manual Selbst wenn die S
261. se detecta un silencio durante aproximadamente 2 segundos o m s y esta se detiene si el silencio contin a durante aproximadamente 15 segundos o m s Manual Incluso si el silencio continua la grabaci n continuar pausada modo de espera hasta que se pulse STOP W RETURN El ajuste de f brica es OFF Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Grabaci n sincronizada Realice los pasos del al gt izquierda Selecci n del modo de grabaci n de linea Pulse MENU 2 Pulse para seleccionar LINE REC y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar LINE REC MODE y pulse gt OK para confirmar O Pulse para seleccionar el ajuste PCM sampling frequency MP3 bitrate y pulse gt OK para confirmar El ajuste de fabrica es MP3 192kbps Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Funci n Indice Afiadir indices Durante la grabaci n o reproducci n o si la grabaci n est en pausa pulse F2 INDEX en la posici n en la que desea a adir una marca de ndice Se muestra E parpadeando y ADDING INDEX Se muestra FT encendido para el archivo al que se le han a adido marcas de ndice Eliminaci n de ndices Pulse ERASE A BC 2 Pulse para seleccionar INDEX y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar YES y pulse gt OK para confirmar Mo
262. seleccionado a la posici n deseada y pulse gt OK para confirmar El orden de las pistas se ha cambiado g VQT4J81 a 8 A VQT4J81 Uso de la funci n de lista de reproducci n Cancelaci n de pistas registradas en la lista de reproducci n Seleccione la lista de reproducci n desde P1 a P5 en la pantalla de lista pagina 4 2 Pulse para seleccionar el archivo que desee eliminar y pulse F1 EDIT 3 Pulse para seleccionar ERASE FILE y pulse gt OK para confirmar Cuando se vayan a cancelar todas las pistas registradas Pulse para seleccionar ERASE ALL y pulse OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar YES y pulse gt OK para confirmar Edicion Division de archivos Visualizaci n de la pantalla de ajustes de edici n Pulse MENU Pulse para seleccionar EDIT MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar 3 Pulse para seleccionar el elemento que desea editar y pulse gt OK Pulse F1 TAB para cambiar a otras pantallas de ajuste Los detalles de ajuste y los m todos de cambio difieren dependiendo del elemento Para una informaci n m s detallada acuda a la p gina correspondiente Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Divisi n de archivos Durante la reproducci n pulse STOP WRETURN en el punto en el que desea dividir el archivo 2 Seleccione DIVIDE en la pantalla de ajust
263. seleccionar HIGH ou LOW e pressione gt OK para confirmar A programac o de f brica HIGH Para sair do ecr de definic o pressione F2 CLOSE Reduzir o som de baixa frequ ncia durante a gravac o Pressione MENU 2 Pressione para seleccionar MIC REC MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar LOW CUT FILTER e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar ON e pressione gt OK para confirmar A programa o de f brica OFF Para sair do ecr de defini o pressione F2 CLOSE Definir manualmente o n vel de grava o Definir o ajuste do n vel de grava o para MANUAL Pressione MENU Pressione para seleccionar MIC REC MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar O Pressione para seleccionar REC LEVEL ADJ e pressione gt OK para confirmar 4 Pressione para seleccionar MANUAL e pressione gt OK para confirmar Para sair do ecr de definic o pressione F2 CLOSE Ajustar manualmente o nivel de gravac o O Pressione e mantenha pressionado REC 6 durante 1 ou mais segundos A unidade entra em espera da grava o 2 Aponte o microfone para a fonte de som a gravar Pressione M lt gt gt para ajustar o nivel de gravac o O intervalo de ajuste de 0 a 30 A programag o de f brica 15 Pres
264. sen Wenn die Einstellungen f r das zu ndernde Frequenzband abgeschlossen sind fortfahren mit Schritt O BD OK zur Eingabe dr cken F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Nach dem Verlassen des Einstellungsbildschirms wird der EQ Modusname nicht angezeigt Dr cken von REC 0 startet Aufnahme EQ Modus Wirkung und Anwendung Dieser Basis Modus verst rkt keinen FLAT bestimmten Tonbereich EXTRA BASS Verst rkt den Bassbereich sehr stark BASS Verst rkt den Bassbereich leicht MIDDLE Verst rkt den Mittelbereich BASS amp TREBLE Verst rkt den Bass und den Hochtonbereich leicht TREBLE Verst rkt den Hochtonbereich leicht EXTRA TREBLE Verst rkt den Hochtonbereich sehr stark Dieser Modus erm glicht die Anpassung der USER Frequenzb nder von 150 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 4 kHz und 12 kHz Die Werkseinstellung ist FLAT Selbstausl ser MENU dr cken O dr cken um MIC REC MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 3 dr cken um SELF TIMER auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um die Zeit auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Werkseinstellung ist OFF F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Verhindern einer unerw nschten Aufnahme VAS MENU dr cken 2 dr cken um MIC REC MENU
265. si illumina e la registrazione viene avviata proseguendo direttamente dopo i dati audio memorizzati Per arrestare l unit Premere STOP WRETURN Registrazione mediante un microfono esterno Far scorrere l interruttore Mic Line su MIC Collegare il microfono esterno Microfono esterno non in dotazione Inserire I saldamente Tipo di spina t presa mini 3 5 mm stereo 3 Premere REC 6 per iniziare la registrazione ITALIANO Ri VQT4J81 2 B VQT4J81 w D Registrazione da altri dispositivi 1 Far scorrere l interruttore Mic Line su LINE Premere MENU 3 Premere per selezionare LINE REC quindi premere gt OK per confermare 4 Premere per selezionare LINE INPUT quindi premere gt OK per confermare 5 Premere per selezionare l impostazione quindi premere gt OK per confermare Quando si effettua il collegamento all uscita cuffie del dispositivo esterno o all uscita di linea del dispositivo portatile selezionare rispettivamente HIGH o LOW L impostazione di fabbrica HIGH Q Premere F2 CLOSE O Collegare il dispositivo esterno Collegarsi al dispositivo esterno e far scorrere l interruttore Mic Line verso LINE Quindi vengono visualizzate l impostazione di ingresso linea selezionata e la modalit di registrazione linea Tenere premuto REC 0 per pi di 1 secondo L unit entra in standby
266. sieren der Einstellungen f r den Aufnahme Ort 1 MENU etwa 1 Sekunde oder l nger gedr ckt halten 2 dr cken um den Aufnahme Ort auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 3 dr cken um INITIALIZE auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 4 dr cken um YES auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Der ausgew hlte Aufnahme Ort wird wieder auf die Voreinstellung zur ckgesetzt Zum Initialisieren des ge nderten Aufnahmeorts LOAD ausw hlen F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Direktszene Diese Funktion dient dazu die Aufnahmeszene in Verbindung mit dem Umschalten der Mikrofonposition umzuschalten 0 Zum Zeitpunkt des Kaufs ist STEREO MEETING zugewiesen und ZOOM ist LECTURE zugewiesen ndern der Direktszeneneinstellung MENU dr cken O dr cken um MIC REC MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um DIRECT SCENE auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 4 dr cken um die Mikrofonposition STEREO oder ZOOM auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um die Aufnahmeszene auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Wenn Sie die Aufnahmeszene f r das andere Mikrofonposition ndern wollen f hren Sie zum Einstellen der Aufnahmeszene die Schritte und aus F2 CLOSE dr cken
267. sionar REC 0 inicia a grava o PORTUGU S m N hi VQT4J81 wo VQT4J81 214 Definir manualmente o nivel de gravac o Configurar o limitador do pico de gravac o para ligado ON Pressione MENU Pressione para seleccionar MIC REC MENU e pressione gt OK para confirmar 3 Pressione para seleccionar PEAK LIMITER e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar ON e pressione gt OK para confirmar A programac o de f brica OFF Para sair do ecr de definic o pressione F2 CLOSE Definir o EQ de gravac o 1 Pressione e mantenha pressionado REC durante 1 ou mais segundos A unidade entra em espera da gravac o Pressione MENU Pressione para seleccionar REC EQ e pressione gt OK para confirmar 4 Pressione para seleccionar o modo de EQ de gravac o Quando seleccionar modos que n o USER avance para o passo O Defini o quando seleccionar USER Depois do passo O pressione F1 EDIT O Pressione kiq PP para seleccionar a banda de frequ ncia a mudar e pressione para ajustar o nivel de gravac o 12 dB Quando todas as defini es para mudar a banda de frequ ncia estiverem completas avance para o passo O 5 Pressione gt OK para confirmar Para sair do ecr de defini o pressione F2 CLOSE O nome do modo EQ n o apresentado depois de sai
268. ss to select INDEX and press gt OK to enter Press to ERASE INDEX mi select YES and 121201 170040 MP3 press gt OK to ERASE INDEX enter Indexes are deleted O Deleting index marks from a file does not delete the audio part of the file When more than 1 index are added in 1 file they cannot be deleted one by one ERASE A BO Fi STOP W RETURN Changing the playback speed The playback speed can be adjusted in 21 steps from the slow speed of 0 5 times normal speed 50 to the fast speed of 2 times normal speed 200 Press F1 SPEED during playback 2 Press F1 SLOW or F2 FAST to select the speed and press gt OK to enter E 3114 121003 123340 MP3 MPS 192k Status indication During playback the playback speed is displayed The display will stop blinking when the speed is fixed Playback speed The playback speed can be adjusted in 10 steps for speeds faster than normal speed 100 and 5 steps for speeds slower than normal speed Status indication during playback Normal speed playback playback faster and playback slower are displayed as P Pp and gt respectively The speed cannot be adjusted for playback using folder cue page 49 or timer playback gt page 55 When the playback speed is other than 100 voice emphasis gt page 44 does not work A B Repeat play Playb
269. sseite zur ckzuf hren sind Interner Speicher 4 GB RR XS450 2 GB RR XS420 Der tats chlich nutzbare Speicherplatz ist geringer El VQT4J81 q 5 VQT4J81 o Anschlie en dieses Ger tes an einen Computer Herausnehmen des USB Steckers des Ger tes Anschlie en des Ger tes an einen Computer ber den USB Port Wenn das Ger t nicht direkt mit dem Computer verbunden werden ann das USB Verl ngerungskabel mitgeliefert benutzen Nur das mitgelieferte USB Verl ngerungskabel verwenden Auf keinen Fall das mitgelieferte Kabel mit einem anderen Ger t verwenden Achtung Zum Anschlie en dieses Ger tes an einen PC ausschlie lich das mitgelieferte USB Verl ngerungskabel mit Ferritkern verwenden 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000000 Erstmaliger Anschluss des Ger tes an den PC Da mehrere Neue Hardware gefunden Meldungen erscheinen werden das Ger t nicht vom PC abtrennen bis alle Meldungen verschwinden O Solange dieses Ger t mit dem Computer verbunden ist kann es nicht betrieben werden O Wenn das Ger t an Ihren PC angeschlossen ist funktioniert es ohne die Batterie da die Stromversorgung ber den Computer erfolgt O Wenn das Ger t an den Computer angeschlossen ist startet der Computer m glicherweise nicht Neustart Daher wird empfohlen das Ger t vom Computer abzutrennen wenn der Computer gestartet bzw neu gestartet wird O
270. st suspendu si un silence d environ 2 secondes ou plus est d tect il s arr te en cas d un silence d environ 15 secondes ou plus Manual L enregistrement se poursuit m me si le silence perdure jusqu ce que vous appuyiez sur STOP W RETURN Le r glage d usine est OFF Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE Enregistrement synchronis Effectuez les tapes de gauche S lectionner le mode d enregistrement par entr e ligne Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner LINE REC et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner LINE REC MODE et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider O Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le r glage fr quence d chantillonnage PCM d bit binaire MP3 et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Le r glage d usine est MP3 192kbps Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE Fonction d index Ajouter un index 1 Pendant l enregistrement ou la lecture ou lorsque Penregistrement est en pause appuyez sur F2 INDEX la position o vous d sirez ajouter un index F clignotant et ADDING INDEX sont affich s F7 allum est affich pour le fichier sur lequel l index est ajout Supprimer un index Appuyez sur ERASE A B 2 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner INDEX et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Ap
271. sto manuale vengono illustrate le operazioni e le funzioni di base dell unit Accessori in dotazione 1 Batteria Ni MH ricaricabile AAA O Indicata come batteria ricaricabile nel testo 1 Borsa da trasporto per batteria 1 Cavo di prolunga USB Acquistare HHR 4MVE per l Europa o HHR 4MVT per l Asia e l America Latina e usare una delle due in caso di sostituzione della batteria ricaricabile a partire da maggio 2012 Inserimento della batteria 1 batteria Ni MH ricaricabile AAA in dotazione Accertarsi che la batteria sia rivolta nelle direzioni corrette Caricamento della batteria Estrarre la spina USB Spingere e far scorrere fino a quando viene riprodotto un clic Conservazione della spina USB Inserire la spina USB dell unit nel computer Se l unit non pu essere collegata direttamente al computer utilizzare il cavo di prolunga USB in dotazione La prima volta che si collega l unit al PC Poich appariranno diversi messaggi Trovato nuovo hardware non disconnettere l unit dal PC prima che tutti i messaggi siano scomparsi Non scollegare mai l unit o rimuovere la scheda SD mentre visualizzato ACCESS in caso contrario l unit potrebbero danneggiarsi Fare scorrere l interruttore OPR HOLD verso il lato ON Fare scorrere l interruttore OPR HOLD verso il lato OFF Lindicatore di stato si illumina e ha
272. sur pour s lectionner ON et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Le r glage d usine est OFF Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE Pour d marrer l enregistrement VAS appuyez sur REC Ajuster le niveau de fonctionnement VAS Appuyez sur kq gt gt pendant l enregistrement VAS Le r glage d usine est 3 Fonction de pr enregistrement PRE RECORD Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner MIC REC MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider O Appuyez sur pour s lectionner PRE RECORD et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner ON et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Le r glage d usine est OFF Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE Pour enregistrer en utilisant la fonction de pr enregistrement Maintenez enfonc REC pendant 1 seconde ou plus Lappareil passe en mode attente de pr enregistrement Passe a 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec et s arr te 3 sec Les donn es audio du microphone environ 3 secondes avant l enregistrement sont toujours mises jour et l appareil passe en mode veille Appuyez sur REC Le voyant d enregistrement s allume et l enregistrement commence directement apr s les donn es audio pr enregistr es Pour arr ter Appuyez sur STOP WRETURN Enregistrer en branchant un microphone externe Faite
273. switch between the internal memory and SD card by pressing F2 FOLDER for more than 1 second when the stopped screen is displayed O This unit is compatible with 2 GB microSD cards and 4 GB to 32 GB microSDHC cards As of May 2012 O This unit may not operate correctly depending on the manufacturer or type of SD card For details on SD cards that are confirmed to operate correctly according to our manufacturing standards see the support site below http panasonic net support If an SD card is inserted but microSD is not displayed on the SELECT FOLDER screen etc this unit does not recognise the SD card Turn off the power and reinsert the SD card O Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing Using the file search function Using the file search function enables you to search the files recorded on this unit You cannot search for files in the MUSIC M folder or OTHER FOLDER J H Types of file search CALENDAR Recorded files are refined by date and SRCH displayed in a list DAY OF WEEK Recorded files are refined by day of the week and displayed in a list RECENTR Recorded files are displayed in FILE recording date order starting from the most recent 20 files File search Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit D Press LIST 9 for approx 1 second or more Go to step if an SD card is inserted gt page 46 and step 3 if not Press t
274. t OK to enter The factory setting is OFF To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE AS is displayed To start VAS recording press REC Adjusting the VAS operation level Press k lt bi during VAS recording The factory setting is 3 You can adjust the sound detection level from 1 to 5 If the audio to record is low increase the VAS value sensitivity level If the sound is loud decrease the VAS value When the recording level adjustment is MANUAL gt page 27 even if the VAS setting is set to ON the setting does not change to the VAS recording O For important recording set the VAS setting to OFF O If the LOW CUT FILTER setting is ON low frequency sound may be cut out and VAS recording may not activate In this case change the LOW CUT FILTER setting to OFF page 26 O If the recording is paused with no sound state WAS blinks When REC is pressed from this recording pause state the status is changed to normal recording pause state and IAS lights up ENGLISH amp g VQT4J81 co DI t o gt 32 Past recording function PRE RECORD If you start recording from the standby state of the past recording function recording can be started with the audio approx 3 seconds before the recording operation O Press and hold REC for 1 second or more II PRE RECORD mni Es To set the past recording to O
275. t dans la documentation qui l accompagne ce pictogramme indique que les piles et appareils lectriques et lectroniques usag s doivent tre s par s des ordures m nag res Afin de permettre le traitement la valorisation et le recyclage ad quats des piles et des appareils usag s veuillez les porter l un des points de collecte pr vus conform ment la l gislation nationale en vigueur ainsi qu aux directives 2002 96 CE et 2006 66 CE En liminant piles et appareils usag s conform ment la r glementation en vigueur vous contribuez pr venir le gaspillage de ressources pr cieuses ainsi qu prot ger la sant humaine et l environnement contre les effets potentiellement nocifs d une manipulation inappropri e des d chets Pour de plus amples renseignements sur la collecte et le recyclage des piles et appareils usag s veuillez vous renseigner aupr s de votre mairie du service municipal d enl vement des d chets ou du point de vente o vous avez achet les articles concern s Le non respect de la r glementation relative l limination des d chets est passible d une peine d amende Pour les utilisateurs professionnels au sein de l Union europ enne Si vous souhaitez vous d faire de pi ces d quipement lectrique ou lectronique veuillez vous renseigner directement aupr s de votre d taillant ou de votre fournisseur Information relative l limination des d chets dans les pays ext rieurs
276. t ou la lecture Pour d sactiver la fonction de verrouillage Faites glisser le commutateur OPR HOLD l oppos amp de HOLD R gler l horloge Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner COMMON MENU et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider 3 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner DATE amp TIME et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider 4 Appuyez sur pour r gler l ann e puis appuyez sur PPI 5 Appuyez sur pour r gler le mois puis appuyez sur PPI O Appuyez sur pour r gler la date puis appuyez sur PPI O Appuyez sur pour choisir la m thode d indication de l horloge puis appuyez sur Db F et EE sont affich s respectivement pour l affichage 24 heures et pour l affichage 12 heures O Appuyez sur pour r gler l heure puis appuyez sur PPI O Appuyez sur pour r gler les minutes Pour modifier les r glages appuyez sur 444 gt gt pour vous d placer entre les l ments puis appuyez encore sur pour effectuer les r glages Appuyez sur gt OK pour valider La date et l heure sont r gl es et l horloge commence fonctionner FRAN AIS M Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE a E VQT4J81 A VQT4J81 a D S lectionner le dossier Appuyez sur F2 FOLDER Appuyez sur M lt gt gt pour choisir le dossier et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider ey OTHER FOLDER es
277. t trop le volume du dispositif externe sur la plage kg volume est mont au maximum Pour reconfigurer les r glages de l entr e ligne appuyez sur MENU et suivez les tapes O Une fois le niveau d entr e sortie ajust arr tez la source sonore de l autre appareil la position laquelle vous voulez lancer l enregistrement s affiche R glez le m me si le D Appuyez sur REC 0 pour commencer l enregistrement Activez le dispositif externe Cet appareil est quip de la fonction d enregistrement synchronis suivante Cette fonction d tecte les silences entre les pistes etc puis enregistre chaque piste dans un fichier diff rent savoir une premi re piste une deuxi me piste etc Lorsque l appareil d tecte du son provenant de l appareil externe l enregistrement commence automatiquement S il d tecte un silence qui dure plus de 2 secondes environ l enregistrement est mis en pause L enregistrement reprend ensuite lorsque l appareil d tecte nouveau du son R glage de l enregistrement synchronis Appuyez sur MENU Appuyez sur pour s lectionner LINE REC et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner SYNCHRO REC et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner ON Auto Stop ou ON Manual Stop et appuyez sur D gt OK pour valider Auto L enregistrement e
278. t utilis pour la lecture de fichiers enregistr s par un autre appareil Cet appareil peut aussi lire les fichiers audio enregistr s avec ou transf r s via certains appareils systeme st r o de Panasonic fournissant une fonction d enregistrement USB Passer entre la m moire interne et la carte SD Si la carte SD est ins r e ses l ments apparaissent l cran l tape O Appuyez sur F1 MEMORY pour choisir la m moire Dans ce manuel le terme carte microSD microSDHC est remplac par carte SD S lectionner le dossier ou le fichier sur l cran de liste Appuyez au moins une seconde sur LIST P Passez l tape 2 si une carte SD est ins r e page 18 et l tape dans le cas contraire O Appuyez sur pour s lectionner INT MEMORY m moire interne ou microSD CARD puis appuyez sur gt OK O Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le dossier et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Si des dossiers ont t cr s dans les dossiers MUSIC ou OTHER FOLDER Ed r p tez l tape pour s lectionner le dossier cible Appuyez sur pour s lectionner le fichier et appuyez sur OK pour valider La lecture du fichier commence Changer la position du microphone Position du microphone Utilisations recommandees STEREO Ad quat pour enregistrer des r unions ou des spectacles par un nombre important de personnes Fonctionne comme un micropho
279. tandby screen is cancelled on the menu or the stop operation is performed audio data is freshly stored from that point The past recording function operates when recording actually starts It does not operate when recording is paused If the recording remaining time is less than 10 seconds the past recording function does not operate Use this setting when recording by connecting an external microphone to the external microphone Line Recording by connecting an external microphone ER in jack of this unit Fo Press STOP IN RETURN to stop the unit Connect the external microphone a Slide the Mic Line switch to MIC ot supped z n E z m 3 Press REC 0 to start recording See page 15 for recording operations O Read the operating instructions for the connected device O If the recording level is too low or high adjust the microphone sensitivity page 26 The built in microphone of this unit does not work if another device is connected to the external microphone Line in jack O If the connected external microphone is monaural the sound for one channel may only be recorded 8 E VQT4J81 g q VQT4J81 Copying to other devices Connect the headphone earphone jack 0 of this unit with the audio input mic terminal of the external device with an audio cable Stereo Monaural mini plug mini plug seamen Audio Cable with resistor not supplied Insert securely Plug t
280. tart of file names for files moved to the recycle bin to show the order in which they were moved This number is only displayed on a computer Transferring music files to this unit You can enjoy music by transferring music files stored in the computer to this unit This unit can play back MP3 WMA and PCM WAV music files Only PCM WAV files recorded on this unit Transferring music files to this unit from the computer Open MUSIC folder of this unit beforehand gt page 65 1 Select a music file right click and select Copy 2 Select MUSIC folder of this unit right click and select Paste to transfer to this unit m Meeting amp MUSIC DO File Edt 42 Q File Edit 4 y Back y ss Ev E co al 01 AAAAA MP3 lt Up to 199 of transferred files can be played on this unit If subfolders are created number of files playable is reduced by the equivalent number of subfolders created Never disconnect the unit or remove the SD card while ACCESS is displayed otherwise this unit may be damaged You can create subfolders in the MUSIC folder to transfer and play back files For folder structure see page 69 You can play the files in each folder in the desired order by adding numbers to the beginning of file names page 68 O This unit does not support PD DRM and DRM10 ENGLISH ii a N VQT4J81 mh N VQT4J81 q N Q amp A Frequently Asked Questions Q
281. ten Ordners wird angezeigt F2 CLOSE dricken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu dr cken um die Datei auszuw hlen und gt OK verlassen dr cken Bei der Auswahl von Dateien durch das Wechseln F r Details zu DATE 8 TIME Seite 3 und TIMER amp von Ordnern He dr cken um sich innerhalb der ALARM gt Seite 22 siehe die entsprechenden Seiten Rangfolge der Hierarchieebenen zu bewegen Einzelheiten hinsichtlich der Datei und Ordnerauswahlmethoden finden sind auf Seite 4 zu finden BEEP SOUND SOURCE MIC Mikrofonaufnahme Der Tastenbet tigungston kann eingestellt werden LINE Nimmt Ger usche bzw T ne von einem OFF Kein Betriebs Piepton externen Ger t auf ON Betriebs Piepton ist ON MODE PCM 44 1 kHz MP3 320 Kbit s MP3 192 Kbit s Die Werkseinstellung ist ON MP3 128 Kbit s MP3 64 Kbit s MP3 32 Kbit s REC LED Aufnanmeanzeige REC TO Den Ordner auswahlen in welchem die x aufgenommene Datei gespeichert werden soll Es kann ausgew hlt werden ob die Beleuchtung der Falls ein SD Karten Ordner ausgew hlt wurde Aufnahmeanzeige auf ON oder OFF eingestellt sein soll die SD Karte einf hren OFF Keine Beleuchtung ON Beleuchtung Die Werkseinstellung ist ON VQT4J81 a e VQT4J81 o Allgemeines Men BATT SETTING Die Einstellung der benutzten Batterieart wiederaufladbare Nickel Metall Hybrid Batterien oder Alkali Batterien Art der Batterie RECHARGEABLE ALKAL
282. the battery is correctly inserted Remove the battery completely and then insert it back into the unit again The battery has run down When using the specified rechargeable battery supplied recharge it When using the AAA LR03 battery replace it with a new one gt page 7 No operation e The Hold function is on Switch Hold off gt page 10 You cannot operate on this unit when the unit is connected to a computer Recording The memory is used completely earlier than expected Remaining recording time largely differs depending on the recording mode 3 page 86 Select a suitable recording mode according to the purpose for use gt page 25 Is much data stored Delete unnecessary files Recording is suspended by itself e VAS is functioning gt page 31 Howling occurs when listening to the recording in progress with earphones e Turn down the volume gt page 17 Keep earphones and this unit separate page 18 When you are using an external microphone keep earphones and external microphone separate Recording ended halfway e If the unit receives a shock e g it is dropped if the battery comes off or the battery runs out during recording recording data may not be updated There may be no space left in the memory Symptom Checkpoints Recording Sound skipping on the recorded file You formatted the internal memory of this unit or the
283. tille andauert wird die Aufnahme weiterhin angehalten Standby bis STOP W RETURN gedr ckt wird Die Werkseinstellung ist OFF F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Synchron Aufnahme Die Schritte O bis ausf hren gt links Wahl des Line Aufnahmemodus MENU dr cken 2 dr cken um LINE REC auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um LINE REC MODE auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe driicken dr cken um die Einstellung PCM Abtastfrequenz MP3 Bitrate auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Werkseinstellung ist MP3 192kbps F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Indexfunktion Index hinzuf gen 1 W hrend der Aufnahme oder der Wiedergabe oder w hrend die Aufnahme angehalten wird F2 INDEX bei der Position dr cken wo ein Index hinzugef gt werden soll E blinkt und ADDING INDEX werden angezeigt FX leuchtet wird f r die Datei angezeigt zu der Indexe hinzugef gt werden Index l schen ERASE A BC dr cken 2 dr cken um INDEX auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um YES auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken ndern der Wiedergabegeschwindigkeit 1 F1 SPEED w hrend der Wiedergabe dr cken F1 SLOW oder F2 FAST zum Ausw hlen der Geschwi
284. tzt Ton besser h rbar machen VOICE EMPHASIS MENU dr cken W hrend der Wiedergabe zu Schritt wechseln O dr cken um PLAY MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 3 dr cken um VOICE EMPHASIS auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 4 dr cken um die Art der Stimmverst rkung auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Werkseinstellung ist NORMAL F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen NORMAL Ton wird so wiedergegeben wie er aufgenommen wurde NOISE CXL L St rger usche werden in geringem Umfang reduziert NOISE CXL H St rger usche werden in gro em Umfang reduziert FOCUS FRONT Der Ton auf der Vorderseite wird verst rkt FOCUS LEFT Der Ton auf der linken Seite wird verst rkt FOCUS RIGHT Der Ton auf der rechten Seite wird verst rkt Einstellung des Wiedergabe EQ SOUND EQ MENU dr cken W hrend der Wiedergabe zu Schritt wechseln dr cken um PLAY MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken dr cken um SOUND EQ auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 4 dr cken um den Ton EQ Modus zu w hlen Bei der Wahl eines anderen Modus als USER fortfahren mit Schritt O Einstellung bei Auswahl von USER Nach Schritt 6 F1 EDIT dr cken Auf 44 PI dr cken um das Frequenzband auszuw hlen das ge ndert werden so
285. uaci n para la grabaci n a la otra posici n del micr fono siga los pasos 4 y 6 para establecer la situaci n para la grabaci n Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE ESPANOL DI Bi VQT4J81 183 g p VQT4J81 Situaci n directa Configuraci n de la situaci n directa en OFF Pulse MENU Pulse para seleccionar MIC REC MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar DIRECT SCENE y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar SETTING y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar OFF y pulse gt OK para confirmar Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE Selecci n del modo de grabaci n Pulse MENU 2 Pulse para seleccionar MIC REC MENU y pulse gt OK para confirmar Pulse para seleccionar MIC REC MODE y pulse gt OK para confirmar 4 Pulse para seleccionar el ajuste PCM sampling frequency MP3 bitrate y pulse gt OK para confirmar El ajuste de fabrica es MP3 192kbps Para salir de la pantalla de ajustes pulse F2 CLOSE O Dependiendo del modo de grabaci n seleccionado la calidad del sonido y el tiempo de grabaci n restante podr variar Formato de grabaci n PCM 44 1 kHz Grabaci n de alta calidad MP3 320 kbps MP3 192 kbps MP3 128 kbps MP3 64 kbps MP3 32 kbps
286. uency band to change are all complete go to step O O Press gt OK to enter To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE The selected sound EQ _ am ni mode is displayed EN 1714 120920 172040 MP3 EQ mode Effect and application FLAT The sound equalizer function is not used You hear the original sound without any change BASS Emphasise the bass range strongly CLEAR Emphasise the treble range strongly HEAVY Emphasise the bass and treble ranges slightly SOFT Emphasise the middle range VOICE Reduce noise to make human voice easily heard USER This mode enables adjustment of frequency bands of 150 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 4 kHz and 12 kHz The factory setting is FLAT ENGLISH pl amp g VQT4J81 5 5 VQT4J81 Using an SD Card You can use a microSD microSDHC card in addition to the internal memory Use this unit to format a new SD card page 60 before use Inserting the SD card Turn off the power and open the battery SD card slot cover Insert the SD card and close the battery SD card slot cover Align the SD card in the correct direction A and insert it fully until a click sound is heard Terminal side down i Terminal side To remove the SD card Turn off the power and open the battery SD card slot cover Q Gently push the SD card When the SD card protrudes slightly slowly pull the card out You can
287. uestion Answer Can I play files recorded on other Panasonic IC recorders e You can play files recorded on IC recorders using MP3 or PCM format by transferring them to MUSIC folder page 71 However cannot play files with other formats i e ADPCM and TRC formats because the recording format is different What kind of files can be played Error messages Error message e WMA MP3 files and PCM WAV files recorded on this unit can be played AAC and other files cannot be played Checkpoints e NO PLAYABLE FILES e NO FILE This is displayed when there are no files in the folder and you attempt to play back perform Time Search or delete a file PLEASE INSERT microSD CARD This is displayed when you attempt to format without the SD card inserted This is displayed when copying or moving a file within the LINE folder without the SD card inserted CAN T READ microSD CARD INSERT CARD AGAIN This is displayed when the SD card fails to be recognised or is broken 3 page 46 Insert the card again CAN T READ INTERNAL MEMORY Format it on this unit page 60 If the problem persists the internal memory may be damaged Consult your dealer CAPACITY FULL This is displayed when you attempt to record to the internal memory or SD card without free space This is displayed when you attempt to combine files when the free space is smaller than the size of back file
288. uitter l cran d informations Appuyez sur STOP BI RETURN Ecouter des donn es audio avec les couteurs Connectez des couteurs st r o non fournis Type de fiche mini fiche st r o o 3 5 mm Ecouteurs suppl mentaires recommand s Panasonic RP HV154 RP HJE120 A partir de mai 2012 Contr ler l enregistrement en cours Regler le volume Vous pouvez ajuster le volume en appuyant sur mais cela n affecte pas le niveau d enregistrement Ecouter ce qui est lu Le son est amp mis par le haut parleur pendant la lecture L coute peut tre difficile dans les endroits bruyants du fait de la puissance de sortie du haut parleur Le cas ch ant connectez des couteurs st r o non fournis Haut parleur int gr Ins rez le fermement FRANCAIS E E VQT4J81 153 Al VQT4J81 a gt Supprimer des fichiers Appuyez sur ERASE A BC 2 Appuyez sur pour s lectionner FILE et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Appuyez sur pour s lectionner YES et appuyez sur gt OK pour valider Pendant la suppression le voyant d tat clignote et ERASING est affich Lop ration de suppression peut prendre plusieurs minutes Si vous s lectionnez FOLDER l tape O vous passerez l cran qui permet de supprimer tous les fichiers du dossier s lectionn Pour quitter l cran de suppression appuyez sur F2 CLOSE S
289. ul ejes ejqeuoseel pue esn ewou apun suogonijsui Bunesedo eu ul pejou se suonepuauuiodeI S J9IMPEJNueuJ y IM GOUEPIODOE UI pasn pue pelleisui useq Sey jonpoud eu Ji saldde juo Alueuem s yl pejsenheu s sones Auelien u ym pejueseud si aseyaund yo jooud pile y uo pue sny oluoseued q pjos pue eijensny ul peseyoind sjonpoJd oluoseued 0 saljdde juo AUELEM s yl Z popad Aueuem eu uryym Ane aq 0 punoy si Jonpa d eu oluoseued Jo uojuido eu ur ji inogej Jo sped 40 afyeyo noyym JONPOId ay UO solas lesseoau WJojad m SUS SIAS P SHOYNY sy Jo oluoseued queuem siu JO SUONIPuoo eu 0 Joelgng eseyaind Jo aep au Way SIpUOLU Z 104 PEJUELEM SI jonpoud ayl Ayueuem Diuoseueg VIIVHLSNV 401 NINO LBP LOA HSIMONI L8PPLOA ea y ueyjodo yayy pue 4 091X9IN 0021 0008 55 401193u Z9Z2 278 008L0 WNWd dIA 00810 Siequnu sauoyd Buimo oj xau ayy ul sn joejuos Aew NOA JO woI IIUOSPUEAXWRSIJUIIDI UOIIUNJE jews ye sn JOE UOI oo xayy Jo S lqnday au ul UOI ELUOQUI UIEIgO OL BIIAIBS ODIXON Z9ZZ LZE 0180 VNVd LZE 0180 Z97L 0080 VWNWd EE 0080 eunuabiy 92200 0080 nied Z922 008 0 VNVd 008 0 fenBnun 008 2922 008 008 WNWd 008 ejonzausa 0009 262 auoyd 1189 e wol 209 06 008 suo z922 LL8 LO8 L VNVd LL8 LO8 L ejewejeno 2922 008 VNWd 008 Jopeales 3 LE12922 008 LELVNWd 008 E9IN ejsod 922922 008L DINOSVNVd 008L Jop
290. um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen DEUTSCH M VQT4J81 o 3 p VQT4J81 Direktszene Einstellen der Direktszeneneinstellung auf OFF MENU dr cken O dr cken um MIC REC MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken 3 dr cken um DIRECT SCENE auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken dr cken um SETTING auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um OFF auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen Wahl des Aufnahmemodus MENU dr cken O dr cken um MIC REC MENU auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken O dr cken um MIC REC MODE auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken dr cken um die Einstellung PCM Abtastfrequenz MP3 Bitrate auszuw hlen und gt OK zur Eingabe dr cken Die Werkseinstellung ist MP3 192kbps F2 CLOSE dr cken um den Einstellungsbildschirm zu verlassen O Je nach eingestelltem Aufnahmemodus sind die Tonqualit t und die verbleibende Aufnahmezeit unterschiedlich Aufnahmeformat Hochwertige PCM 44 1 kHz Aufnahme MP3 320 kbit s MP3 192 kbit s MP3 128 kbit s MP3 64 kbit s Lange Aufnahme Wenn der Aufnahmemodus auf MP3 32kbps eingestellt ist wird die Aufnahme monophon MP3 32 kbit s
291. ument practice Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press MENU 2 Press to select MIC REC MENU and press gt OK to enter Press to select SELF TIMER and press OK to enter Press to select the time and press OK to enter nn The factory setting is OFF To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE When REC 0 is pressed countdown starts Then recording starts after the set time The recording indicator blinks during countdown Once the self timer is set the setting is preserved until the self timer setting is set to OFF or the settings of this unit are initialised gt page 61 O Pressing REC during countdown starts recording immediately O If you press STOP W RETURN during countdown the self timer recording can be stopped MENU STOP W RETURN Preventing unnecessary recording VAS When VAS Voice Activated System is set if silence continues for approx 2 seconds during microphone recording the recording is paused automatically If the unit detects sound the recording resumes Set the recording level adjustment to AUTO beforehand gt page 27 Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Press MENU Press to select MIC REC MENU and press gt OK to enter Press to select VAS and press gt OK to enter O Press to select ON and press g
292. und from the earphones or it is difficult to hear or noisy Ensure the plug is inserted firmly Wipe the plug clean The selected file changes on its own NO PLAYABLE FILES is displayed e If this unit is connected to the computer and then a file on the unit is deleted the file selected on this unit may change For the MUSIC folder the file immediately under the MUSIC folder is selected If there are no files NO PLAYABLE FILES is displayed Reselect the file There is no sound or the volume is low during A B repeat playback Is the shadowing function set to ON gt page 43 ENGLISH ur g VQT4J81 8 8 VQT4J81 Troubleshooting guide Symptom Checkpoints Timer Timer recording does not operate properly Timer Recording failed e Set the clock with correct date and time page 11 The folder at the recording destination is full Delete unnecessary files gt page 19 e The battery has run down Replace with a new battery page 7 When using the rechargeable battery recharge it gt page 7 Is there sufficient space in the internal memory Delete unnecessary files gt page 19 Is the unit connected to the computer etc Disconnect it from the computer e If the unit is still used even if the timer playback time comes the current operation is prioritised Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit e If another recording is in progress even if the timer
293. unit viene spenta con la funzione di spegnimento automatico portare l interruttore OPR HOLD in posizione OFF prima di accendere l unit pagina 24 Funzione di blocco Le operazioni con i tasti vengono ignorate quando si attiva la funzione di blocco Per attivare la funzione di blocco Fare scorrere l interruttore OPR HOLD verso il lato HOLD durante la registrazione o la riproduzione Per disattivare la funzione di blocco Far scorrere l interruttore OPR HOLD in direzione opposta a HOLD Impostazione dell orologio Premere MENU 2 Premere per selezionare COMMON MENU quindi premere gt OK per confermare 3 Premere per selezionare DATE amp TIME quindi premere gt OK per confermare 4 Premere per impostare l anno quindi premere O Premere per impostare il mese quindi premere gt P 6 Premere per impostare la data quindi premere PPI Q Premere per impostare il metodo di indicazione dell orario quindi premere PPI F e EN BH vengono visualizzati rispettivamente per i formati a 24 ore e a 12 ore O Premere per impostare Vora quindi premere Db Premere per impostare i minuti Per cambiare l impostazione premere 44 gt gt per spostarsi tra le voci quindi premere nuovamente per effettuarne l impostazione 10 Premere gt OK per confermare La data e lora vengono impostate e l orologio entra in funzion
294. upprimer des fichiers de l cran de liste S lectionnez des fichiers sur l cran de liste page 4 et appuyez sur ERASE A BC L cran d effacement des fichiers apparait alors S lectionnez le dossier et appuyez sur ERASE A BC L cran d effacement de tous les fichiers du dossier apparait alors S lectionner la sc ne d enregistrement Appuyez au moins une seconde sur MENU L cran de s lection de la scene d enregistrement est affich Appuyez sur pour choisir la sc ne et appuyez sur OK pour valider Si vous s lectionnez USER ignorez l tape Appuyez sur pour s lectionner LOAD et appuyez sur OK pour valider Pour quitter l cran de r glage appuyez sur F2 CLOSE Apr s une pression de REC l enregistrement a lieu avec le r glage de sc ne d enregistrement s lectionn Sc ne d enregistrement Application LANG a Enregistrement de votre propre voix pour STUDY gia pratiquer la prononciation etc KARAOKE dell Enregistrement un volume lev tel que pour le karaok MUSIC Enregistrement de haute qualit tel que PERF Lisl pour des repr sentations musicales CONVERSATION m Enregistrement de la voix d autres personnes A pour des entretiens ou des r unions etc MEETING ata Enregistre une large bande sonore Pour mm l enregistrement de r unions etc LECTURE Enregistrement de
295. ur product please visit our website www panasonic co uk Direct Sales at Panasonic UK Order accessory and consumable items for your product with ease and confidence by phoning our Customer Communications Centre Monday Thursday 9 00 a m 5 30 p m Friday 9 30 a m 5 30 p m Excluding public holidays e Or go on line through our Internet Accessory ordering application at www pas europe com Most major credit and debit cards accepted All enquiries transactions and distribution facilities are provided directly by Panasonic UK e It couldn t be simpler Also available through our Internet is direct shopping for a wide range of finished products Take a browse on our website for further details Features This unit supports the Linear PCM hereinafter referred to as PCM recording Also you can use the zoom recording function to reduce the sounds in the surrounding environment to clearly record the sound source in front of you A wide range of recording settings optimised according to recording scene are provided enabling you to turn on the power select a recording setting and then start recording immediately Recorded file WMA MP3 music file Support for playback of files recorded with a device other than this unit Connecting this unit to a computer Support for USB charging Move and organise recording music data files Recording Playback using the Timer You can record at a specified time
296. ver a unidade Dependendo das defini es do SO o cone pode n o aparecer Depois de ser removida a unidade desliga se Quando esta unidade ligada depois de eliminar etc ficheiros nesta unidade utilizando o computador UPDATING FILE NAME apresentado Podem ser necess rios v rios minutos at a actualiza o estar terminada HI Fun o de armazenamento em massa USB Esta unidade funciona como uma mem ria USB e reconhecida como um dispositivo de armazenamento externo do computador Os ficheiros de dados do computador podem ser transferidos e guardados nesta unidade Manutencao Limpe a unidade com um pano seco macio Se a unidade estiver muito suja limpe a com um pano humedecido em gua bem torcido e depois seque a com um pano seco N o utilize solventes incluindo benzina diluente lcool detergente de cozinha um produto de limpeza qu mica etc Se o fizer pode deformar a caixa exterior ou danificar o revestimento O log tipo microSDHC uma marca comercial da SD 3C LLC Este produto encontra se protegido por determinados direitos de propriedade intelectual da Microsoft Corporation e terceiros proibido utilizar ou distribuir essa tecnologia fora do mbito do produto sem uma licen a da Microsoft ou de uma subsidi ria Microsoft e terceiros autorizados Este produto pode estar sujeito a interfer ncias de r dio provocadas por telefones m veis durante a sua utiliza o
297. vez les instructions l cran pour retirer l appareil Suivant les r glages du syst me d exploitation il se peut que l ic ne ne s affiche pas Une fois l appareil retir il s teint 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000000000 Lors de l utilisation d une batterie rechargeable utilisez la batterie rechargeable fournie ou une batterie rechargeable facultative Si des batteries vendues dans le commerce diff rentes de celles ci dessus sont utilis es le fonctionnement n est pas garanti Une pile alcaline AAA LROS non fournie peut galement tre utilis e Mettre l appareil sous hors tension Mettre l appareil sous tension Faites glisser le commutateur OPR HOLD du c t ON pour mettre l appareil sous tension L cran s allume Mettre l appareil hors tension Faites glisser le commutateur OPR HOLD sur OFF pendant que l appareil est en tat d arr t M Extinction automatique Lappareil s teint automatiquement au bout d un delai pr d fini le r glage d usine est 15 minutes si aucun enregistrement n est effectu Si l appareil s est teint automatiquement faites glisser le commutateur OPR HOLD sur OFF avant de rallumer l appareil 3 page 24 Fonction de verrouillage Les commandes de touches sont ignor es lorsque la fonction de verrouillage est activ e Pour activer la fonction de verrouillage Positionnez le commutateur OPR HOLD sur HOLD pendant l enregistremen
298. vidual recording scenes whose settings have been changed to the factory settings Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit O Press MENU for approx 1 second or more 2 Press to select the recording scene you want to initialise and press gt OK to enter Press to select SCENE SELECT mm INITIALIZE and press an gt OK to enter CHANGE SETTING INITIALIZE Press to select YES and press gt OK to enter The selected recording scene setting is returned to the factory setting To select the initialised recording scene select LOAD 3 page 20 To exit the setting screen press F2 CLOSE Direct scene This function is for switching the recording scene gt page 20 linked to switching the microphone position The factory setting is ON You can switch to the recording scene assigned to each microphone position Microphone position Recording scene STEREO STEREO qm E EMEETING 2 ws ZOOM oo zoom m ELECTUREI Ku Factory setting O At the time of purchase MEETING is assigned to STEREO and LECTURE is assigned to ZOOM You can also change the recording scene assigned to a microphone position Select the desired recording scene from seven recording scenes gt page 24 Switch the microphone position when the unit is in the stopped state During an operation such as recording or playback the recording scene cannot be cha
299. vozes de outras pessoas Mi para entrevistas reuni es etc MEETING a ta Grava uma amplitude abrangente de som mim Para gravar reuni es etc LECTURE 58 Grava sons como nas salas de aula etc FAVORITE Dx Permite registar definig es personalizadas Alterar as definic es de cen rio de gravac o O Pressione MENU durante cerca de 1 segundo ou mais 2 Pressione para seleccionar o cen rio de gravac o e pressione gt OK para confirmar O Pressione para seleccionar CHANGE SETTING e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar o item que pretende alterar e pressione gt OK para confirmar Pressione para seleccionar a defini o e pressione gt OK para confirmar Repita os passos 4 e 0 para alterar outros itens QO Depois de concluir as defini es pressione para seleccionar OK e pressione gt OK para confirmar Para seleccionar o cen rio de grava o alterado seleccione LOAD Para sair do ecr de defini o pressione F2 CLOSE Inicializar as defini es de cen rio de grava o 1 Pressione MENU durante cerca de 1 segundo ou mais 2 Pressione para seleccionar o cen rio de grava o que pretende inicializar e pressione gt OK para confirmar O Pressione para seleccionar INITIALIZE e pressione gt OK para confirmar 4 Pressione para seleccionar YES e
300. wing names Internal Memory IC RECORDER SD card IC REC SD B j My Documents Log Off Shut Down A feb DYDICD RW Drive Fi i IC RECORDER G If an SD card is not inserted or an SD card that was not formatted on this unit is inserted Removable Disk is displayed 2 Right click to open the IC RECORDER G this unit Folder structure on this unit page 69 p Fie Edit View Favorites Tools 4 gt D Search ms MCD muse RECYCLE 3 Right click to open the folder This unit s files are displayed File Edit Back CG ECC View Favorites Di Address GAMIC amp 001_121017_1414A0 MP3 Depending on the computer settings a file with the extension INX may be displayed This file contains index information If this file is deleted from your computer the index information will be deleted ENGLISH ii a E VQT4J81 Importing files to a computer Organising files Connect this unit to a Computer beforehand gt page 63 Importing files recorded on this unit to a computer 1 Select the recorded file in this unit right click and select Copy 2 Select a folder in the computer right click and select Paste to import to the computer Folder in this unit Folder in the computer f MIC A OO amp Meeting OB l e File Edit Y q Eile Edit Yi Ey Back ess B M so a foot 121017 1414A0
301. work in the following cases e During fast slow playback page 39 e During WMA file playback e During playback of a file with a sampling frequency of less than 16 kHz When FOCUS FRONT FOCUS LEFT or FOCUS RIGHT is selected for playback of a file recorded with the microphone position set to ZOOM or a monaural audio file Setting the playback EQ SOUND EQ Using the sound EQ enables you to set bass middle and treble range of volume level according to your preferred settings for playback The sound EQ includes 6 types of fixed mode and the USER mode with which you can set the volume level according to each frequency band The sound EQ is effective only when listening with the earphones Put the unit into the stopped state or playback state Press MENU When playback is in progress go to step O 2 Press to select PLAY MENU and press gt OK to enter 3 Press to select SOUND EQ and press gt OK to enter O Press to select the sound EQ mode Press F1 CONFIRM to confirm the details Press F1 again to return to the previous screen When you select modes other than USER go to step 6 Setting when selecting USER After step press F1 EDIT 150 Hz band is selected Press H PPI to select the frequency band to change and press to adjust the volume level 6 dB When the settings for the freq
302. ype 9 3 5 mm stereo mini plug To audio input mic terminal External device 2 Start recording on the external device 3 Play the file that you want to copy on this unit 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e 0 0 0 e nen e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e es 0 e 0 e 0 0 0 0 00 Read the operating instructions for the connected device O Use the connection cable that matches monaural stereo of the connected device Wrong connection may cause recording trouble i e Only 1 channel is copied The copied sound quality may differ from the sound quality of this unit O Adjust the volume on this unit to copy with a proper volume Recording from other devices This is the method to record to the L folder by connecting an external device to the external microphone Line in jack of this unit Press STOP W RETURN to stop the unit Slide the Mic Line switch to LINE lt a INIT DIN Press MENU 3 Press to select LINE REC and press gt OK to enter Press to select LINE INPUT and press gt OK to enter 5 Press to select LINE INPUT dui the setting and press HIGH gt OK to enter LOW When connecting to the headphone terminal of external device or the line output terminal of portable device select HIGH or LOW respectively The factory setting is HIGH Press F2 CLOSE Connect the ext

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

CSXi (user manual)    Sony TA-F501ES Stereo Amplifier User Manual  SERVICE MANUAL - LéRIEN.SOUND.SYSTEM  Samsung NX mini (9 mm) Felhasználói kézikönyv  GE C4S Data Sheet  S・57 - 岩通計測  Application Note - Bound-T time and stack analyser    Quick guide for Baha® users  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file